Human Machine Interface

LXP-Designer
XGT Panel
 Revision History

Revision History
Version Date Revised content Revised location

V 1.00 ‘22.06 1st edition -

V 1.10 ’22.08 V1.10 Version Update

V 1.20 ’23.02 V1.20 Version Update

V1.20, 2023.02

1
 Table of Contents

REVISION HISTORY.......................................................................................................... 1

1. GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................1

1.1.1 LXP-Designer Features ........................................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Supportable XGT Panel Models .......................................................................................................................................................3

1.2 Installation and Update ..............................................................................................................................................4

1.2.1 Installation ..................................................................................................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Update .........................................................................................................................................................................................................4

1.3 Configuration and Function ......................................................................................................................................5

1.3.1 LXP-Designer Configuration ...............................................................................................................................................................5
1.3.2 Option Setting ...........................................................................................................................................................................................8

2. PROJECT..................................................................................................................... 1

2.1 Creating a Project ........................................................................................................................................................1

2.1.1 Starting a new project ...........................................................................................................................................................................1
2.1.2 Saving a project .......................................................................................................................................................................................6

2.2 Project Properties .......................................................................................................................................................7

2.2.1 Setting a project password ..................................................................................................................................................................7
2.2.2 Setting project properties .....................................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.3 Basic Options Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 53

2.3 Screen Configuration............................................................................................................................................... 57

2.3.1 Adding a screen .................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
2.3.2 Screen Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
2.3.3 Editing a screen .................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
2.3.4 Drawing a figure/object ...................................................................................................................................................................... 68
2.3.5 Editing an object ................................................................................................................................................................................... 78
2.3.6 Creating Tab Group ...........................................................................................................................................................................104
2.3.7 Exporting/Installing Font..................................................................................................................................................................106
2.3.8 Exporting/Importing Screen ...........................................................................................................................................................107
2.3.9 Project Print ..........................................................................................................................................................................................115
2.3.10 Rename tag and add it as a new tag ......................................................................................................................................118

１
 Table of Contents

2.3.11 Print .......................................................................................................................................................................................................120

2.3.12 Print Preview .....................................................................................................................................................................................123

2.4 Library Management .............................................................................................................................................. 125

2.4.1 Graphic library management .........................................................................................................................................................125
2.4.2 Object library management ............................................................................................................................................................144

2.5 Controller Connection Settings ........................................................................................................................... 154

2.5.1 Ethernet connection ..........................................................................................................................................................................154
2.5.2 Serial port connection ......................................................................................................................................................................156

2.6 Simulation & debugging........................................................................................................................................ 162

2.6.1 Simulation configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................162
2.6.2 Start device monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................................164
2.6.3 Run Data Check .................................................................................................................................................................................168
2.6.4 View device map ................................................................................................................................................................................169
2.6.5 Memory usage status .......................................................................................................................................................................171
2.6.6 Finding & replacing device .............................................................................................................................................................172
2.6.7 Moving a screen tab..........................................................................................................................................................................186

2.7 Project management .............................................................................................................................................. 187

2.7.1 Sending a project ...............................................................................................................................................................................187
2.7.2 Sending to external storage ...........................................................................................................................................................199
2.7.3 Receiving a project file .....................................................................................................................................................................201
2.7.4 Receiving backup data ....................................................................................................................................................................205
2.7.5 Converting a XP-Builder project ..................................................................................................................................................209
2.7.6 Controller setting synchronization function .............................................................................................................................213

2.8 Communication connection settings (Advanced) ............................................................................................ 215

2.8.1 1:N communication connection of multiple protocols .........................................................................................................215
2.8.2 RS-485 1:N communication connection ...................................................................................................................................217
2.8.3 Viewing communication manual ..................................................................................................................................................219

3. ERROR, WARNING CODE, AND MESSAGE ........................................................... 1

3.1 Error code displayed in the Result window ............................................................................................................1

3.2 Solution method to display an error message in a pop-up window ............................................................... 10

4. EDITING COMMON DATA ......................................................................................... 1

２
 Table of Contents

4.1 Common data ...............................................................................................................................................................1

4.1.1 Tag .................................................................................................................................................................................................................3
4.1.2 Text table.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
4.1.3 Logging ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.1.4 Recipe ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
4.1.5 Flow alarm ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 75
4.1.6 History alarm .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 81
4.1.7 Scheduler ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 98
4.1.8 Sound ......................................................................................................................................................................................................103
4.1.9 OPC UA Server ...................................................................................................................................................................................105
4.1.10 Database .............................................................................................................................................................................................118

4.2 Scripts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 122

4.2.1 Script Features ....................................................................................................................................................................................122
4.2.2 Creating script .....................................................................................................................................................................................156
4.2.3 XGT Panel control function ............................................................................................................................................................171

4.3 [Effect] Dynamic Characteristic ........................................................................................................................... 187

4.3.1 Width .......................................................................................................................................................................................................188
4.3.2 Height ......................................................................................................................................................................................................190
4.3.3 X Move....................................................................................................................................................................................................192
4.3.4 Y Move ....................................................................................................................................................................................................194
4.3.5 Rotation .................................................................................................................................................................................................196
4.3.6 Color ........................................................................................................................................................................................................198

4.4 Object ....................................................................................................................................................................... 199

4.4.1 Lamp object ..........................................................................................................................................................................................203
4.4.2 Switch object ........................................................................................................................................................................................233
4.4.3 Message object ...................................................................................................................................................................................305
4.4.4 Number/character object.................................................................................................................................................................322
4.4.5 Window object .....................................................................................................................................................................................384
4.4.6 Animation Object ................................................................................................................................................................................394
4.4.7 Graph Object ........................................................................................................................................................................................397
4.4.8 View history alarm object ................................................................................................................................................................488
4.4.9 Logging Viewer object ......................................................................................................................................................................501
4.4.10 Clock object........................................................................................................................................................................................512
4.4.11 Insert screen object ........................................................................................................................................................................517
4.4.12 Multimedia object .............................................................................................................................................................................520
4.4.13 Explorer ...............................................................................................................................................................................................528

３
 Table of Contents

4.4.14 Thermal Camera Object...............................................................................................................................................................532

4.4.15 Database Viewer .............................................................................................................................................................................534

4.5 Displaying & changing XGT Panel information ................................................................................................ 539

4.6 Using CSV file converter ....................................................................................................................................... 542

4.7 File backup using external storage device ........................................................................................................ 544

4.7.1 Path structure on file backup.........................................................................................................................................................544
4.7.2 Operation setting if there is no capacity to back up in storage .......................................................................................548
4.7.3 Monitoring the connection status of external storage .........................................................................................................550
4.7.4 Safe removal switch ..........................................................................................................................................................................552

4.8 Use Audit Log Viewer ............................................................................................................................................ 554

5. OTHER FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................. 1

5.1 Gesture, multi-touch, screen zoom ..........................................................................................................................1

5.1.1 Gesture definition ....................................................................................................................................................................................1
5.1.2 Screen switch gesture function .........................................................................................................................................................2
5.1.3 Logging trend graph gesture function.............................................................................................................................................2
5.1.4 Logging view gesture function ...........................................................................................................................................................3
5.1.5 History alarm view gesture function ................................................................................................................................................4
5.1.6 Multitouch function ..................................................................................................................................................................................5
5.1.7 Screen zoom function ...........................................................................................................................................................................6
5.1.8 Gesture function On/Off .......................................................................................................................................................................7

APPENDIX .......................................................................................................................... 1

1 XGT Panel OS Update ....................................................................................................................................................1

2 Rules for displaying objects before communication connection ..........................................................................2

3 Terminology .....................................................................................................................................................................3

4 List of Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................................................6

5 Precautions......................................................................................................................................................................8

４
 1.Getting Started

1. Getting Started
LXP-Designer is the software which creates and manages projects executed in XGT Panel. LXP-
Designer is the software which has various functions and can be edited with the software easily.

• Provides toolbars and shortcuts a user can edit.

• Provides tool and project pen a user can edit.
• Supports common data import and export functions.
• Provides a tab function that can be used easily when working with several screens.
• Supports project screen preview.
• Provides image and object library a user can edit.
• Provides alarm, logging, scheduler, recipe, and multimedia functions such as script or advanced
function.
• Supports multi-language.

1.1 Overview
This chapter describes the basic usage of LXP-Designer and XGT Panel model supported by LXP-
Designer.

1-1
 1.Getting Started

1.1.1 LXP-Designer Features

LXP-Designer is the starting point to interface with Human Machine Interface (HMI), which is an
industrial application device. A user can control a controller such as XGT Panel, PLC, inverter, and servo
with the convenient interface provided by LXP-Designer.
XGT Panel is a graphic control device which is capable of monitoring and controlling PLCs and
controllers from various manufacturers including a variety of the Company's PLCs. If various figures and
objects are placed on the screen, make a simple setting, and then send them to XGT Panel via Edit tool
in order to transmit data to XGT Panel, you can monitor the information of each controller as set in the
tool. In addition, you can make a simple control through switch and write object. Moreover, it provides
the functions such as various scripts, logging, recipe, and alarm to give the optimal control environment.
As shown in the figure below, an object created in LXP-Designer is transmitted to XGT Panel and then
connected to the controller, which communicates with XGT Panel. Through this, the state of the
controller also receives feedback to XGT Panel to be monitored.

LXP-Designer

XGT Panel Controller XGT Panel

1-2
 1.Getting Started

1.1.2 Supportable XGT Panel Models

You can set LXP and many other controllers in LXP-Designer. You can download a project of LXP-
Designer only from XGT Panel series, which are LS ELECTRIC products. In order to view XGT Panel
models which can be set and the specifications of each model, proceed as follows in LXP-Designer.
Select [PROJECT] ▶ [New Project] and then select series and model.

Notes

• The LXP series do not provide the user memory.

• It supports the drawing memory of 128MB.
• For a model which support extended memory, the size of the extended memory is 64MB.
• LXP series consists of a main unit and a display unit.

1-3
 1.Getting Started

1.2 Installation and Update

This section describes how to install and update LXP-Designer.

1.2.1 Installation
PC requirements for LXP-Designer installation:
• Processor: Pentium 4 or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or more
• Communication port: Ethernet port, USB port
• Hard disk: 1GB or more
• Monitor: Resolution of 1024x768 or higher
• OS: Windows 10 or higher
• Peripherals: Mouse, keyboard

Installing on Windows 10:

1. Log in as Administrator Mode from PC.

2. Run the LXP-Designer installation file(https://www.ls-electric.com/support/download-center).

3. Select a language (English, Korean, Chinese, Japanese).

4. Follow the installation wizard guide for installation.

1.2.2 Update
To check the version of LXP-Designer, check [HELP] ▶ [About LXP-Designer], and to update LXP-
Designer, download it from the LS ELECTRIC home page (https://www.ls-
electric.com/support/download-center).

1-4
 1.Getting Started

1.3 Configuration and Function

LXP-Designer provides various options for customization, so that you can configure and manage a
project more efficiently. This section describes LXP-Designer configuration and how to use it according
to a user’s need.

1.3.1 LXP-Designer Configuration

The screen configuration of LXP-Designer is based on Windows. By using the option setting. a user can
set the desired configuration.
<1.3.2 Option Setting>

Tool Bar

Tool Box

Edit Screen

Project/Screen

Output Window

Status Bar

Screen Description

Toolbar Use it by using a tool or setting a menu or specific option.

Project/screen You can check the elements contained in the project in the project tree.
You can check all screens you are using now in the project in the screen tree.
You can add or edit each item.

1-5
 1.Getting Started

Screen Description

<Project Window> <Screen Window> <Graphic Library> <Object Library>

Graphic Library, Object Library, Device Map, Script Toolbox, and Data Element
windows can be repositioned or docked in another window.

Edit screen You can edit an object and a figure and assign a screen property.

Toolbox You can select and edit several types of objects.

You can select the Data Elements window, Graphic Library, and Object Library
from View menu as well.
 To view a figure or an object in TreeType, select the toolbox and then select
[TOOLBOX] ▶ [TreeType Toolbox] from the displayed menu Toolbar, or select it
from Toolbox window.

 To view a figure or an object in Continuous Insert Mode, select the toolbox and
then select [TOOLBOX] ▶ [Continuous Insert Mode] from the displayed menu
toolbar, or select it from the Toolbox window.

Output Window Displays an output window, which shows errors and user interface messages,
and the results of Find All.

1-6
 1.Getting Started

Screen Description

Status bar The status bar shows the information related to a project.
A B C D E F G

Description

A System message

B XGT Panel model information

C Controller information

D Mouse position

E Object position (top/left)

F Object size

G Status of Caps Lock/Num Lock/Scroll Lock on the keyboard

Notes

LXP-Designer project screen

The screen includes objects and figures provided by LXP-Designer. You can use 2 screens in total.
 Base screen: You can edit an objects or a figure and the base screen has a fixed size by XGT Panel
model as follows:
Series Model Name Screen size and color specifications
LXP LXP-D12□□ 1024 X 768 pixels, 16.7M colors
 Window screen: It is a screen which pops up or is composited to be displayed on the base screen.

1-7
 1.Getting Started

1.3.2 Option Setting

Customized Toolbar, keyboard shortcut, menu and other options in LXP-Designer

Customized Toolbar
In LXP-Designer, you can add or delete an icon with Customized Toolbar option to view Toolbar a user
has selected.

Creating Toolbar:

1. Select [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Toolbars].

2. Select [New].

1-8
 1.Getting Started

3. Enter a toolbar name and select [OK]. A toolbar that has been created newly is created on the base
screen. You can drag the created toolbar and paste it on Toolbar located at the top of LXP-Designer.

Adding/deleting an icon on Toolbar:

1 Select [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Commands].

2 You can select an item in the left category and drag it to Toolbar where you created the menu for the
corresponding command. Also, you can drag the icon that has been dragged to Toolbar to the base
screen and delete it.

1-9
 1.Getting Started

Selecting a toolbar to display:

1 Select [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Toolbars].

2 You can check or uncheck the checkbox to show or hide a toolbar.

1-10
 1.Getting Started

Customize Keyboard

Setting a shortcut key on keyboard:

1. Select [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Keyboard].

2. Select the corresponding command item from the list in the category.
3. Select a new shortcut key set box, and then enter a combination key. If it is the combination in use,
display the assignment status in the window at the bottom.

4. Select [Assign].
5. To delete a shortcut key, select an item displayed in the current status and then select [Remove].
6. To finish the operation, select [Close].

1-11
 1.Getting Started

Customize Menu

You can display the selected context menu on the base screen. [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Menu]

Color Setting
You can change the default color theme of LXP-Designer.

1. Select [TOOL]▶ [Customize] ▶ [Color].

2. Set the color theme, and then select [Apply] button.

1-12
 1.Getting Started

Docking window
You can select a window, which is provided to [VIEW] to hide the corresponding docking window. You
can drag and move the same window as Project. You can right click to change the property of the
docking window. You can also maintain the docking window in floating state or hide it automatically.

When you dock the corresponding window to a desired position, the position to be docked is previewed
with a shadow. To float the corresponding window, right-click ▶ Select [Floating]. To hide the
corresponding window, select .

1-13
 1.Getting Started

Customize Options
With an additional option, do not display the tooltip in Toolbar or shortcut keys when the mouse cursor is
hovering over them. To use these options, select [TOOL] ▶ [Customize] ▶ [Options].

1-14
 2.Project

2. Project
LXP-Designer provides various and convenient screen edit functions. You can display the functions such
as figures, objects, and graphs, and define and operate a script. Before you download a project to XGT
Panel, you can check the error with simulation operation or data check.

2.1 Creating a Project

Start and open a project

2.1.1 Starting a new project

Starting a new project:

1. If you run LXP-Designer, a window as in the picture below is displayed. Select [Create Project].

 To open a saved project, select [Open Project].

 To display the project selection window every time LXP-Designer is run, check the checkbox of
Show this dIalog at Startup.

 To create a project, select [PROJECT]▶ [New Project].

Notes

• Since LXP-Designer supports multiple-instance, a user can run more than one LXP-
Designers. Because you can check several projects at the same time, it is easy to edit
between projects.
• When you open a read-only project, the following error message is displayed.

2-1
 2.Project

• When you open a project that has been already opened, the following error message is
displayed.

2. Select the series and model of XGT Panel, as well as the manufacturer and product of the connected
controller in the basic information setting window.

3. To set the communication of the controller, select [Set Communication XGT Window] and detailed
connection setting. For connection setting, please refer to the [2.5 Controller Connection Setting]
section.

2-2
 2.Project

4. Select [Finish].

Notes

 LXP series is divided into a main unit and a display unit, and has different specifications such
as resolution and supported colors depending on model.

[Main unit]
Model Runtime XP-VLINK External storage Ethernet HDMI
LXP-M00D Mounted Supported 3 X USB, 1 X SD, O O
(separation type) Extended memory
LXP-M01D Mounted Not supported 3 X USB, 1 X SD, O O
(all-in-one) Extended memory

[Display unit]
Model Resolution Colors Front XP-VLINK Front
camera camera
LXP-D1200 1024 X 768 16.7M Supported Supported O
(separation type)
LXP-D1201 1024 X 768 16.7M Supported Not supported O
(all-in-one)
LXP-D1210 1024 X 768 16.7M Not Supported X
supported (separation type)
LXP-D1211 1024 X 768 16.7M Not Not supported X
supported (all-in-one)

 If you select the series, main unit, or display unit, the specifications of the model you selected
are displayed. When [Unused Display Unit] is selected, monitoring and resolution can be
specified on the monitor connected via HDMI.

2-3
 2.Project

 If there is no font required for the PC or XGT Panel, the text displayed on LXP-Designer or
XGT Panel may not be displayed properly. In this case, install the required fonts in the PC,
select [TOOL] ▶ [Install Font] or [Export Font] in LXP-Designer, save the font file or select the
folder you want search, and then select [OK].

2-4
 2.Project

 The extension of LXP-Designer project file is “.xpe”, and the extension of XP-Builder project file
is “.xpd”. In LXP-Designer, you can import the project file of XP-Builder as well, but upon
saving, it is saved only as an LXP-Designer project. You cannot open an LXP-Designer project
in XP-Builder.
Item Open project file Save project file
XP-Builder *.xpd *.xpd
LXP-Designer *.xpd , *.xpe *.xpe
 The extension of the user object library is “.xpo”.
 The extension of the user graphic library is “.xpg”.
 The extensions of the common data are shown in the table below.
Items File extension
Text table, recipe, tag *.CSV
History alarm *.HLE
Flow alarm *.FLE
Logging *.LGE
Scheduler *.SHE
Script *.STE

 The internal device setting area is different depending on the series. The internal device area,
which can be set for each series, is as follows.
Series HX area HW area HS area HK area
LXP 0~63F 0~65535 0~4095 0~8191

2-5
 2.Project

2.1.2 Saving a project

Saving a project:

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Save Project].

 You can select the icon located on Toolbar to save a project as well.

 To save in another name, select [PROJECT] ▶ [Save As Project].

2. Enter a location and a file name to save the project, and then select [Save].
3. To close the project, select [PROJECT] ▶ [Close Project].

Notes

 If you save the project, two files are created.

- Backup file: The extension of the backup file is “.bake” and “.bake0–bake9”. After the backup file
is created up to “.bake9”, it is overwritten starting from “.bake0” again to be created.
 If (*) appears on the right side of the project name in the Project window, this indicates the status
where the current project has been modified but not saved.

2-6
 2.Project

2.2 Project Properties

You can set project properties for the device, screen, security, language setting, etc. of XGT Panel.

2.2.1 Setting a project password

You can set a password on a project to prevent other users from opening it.

Setting a password:

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Project Password].

2. Enter a new password and again in Confirm.

3. Select [Apply].

Notes

 Only Latin characters are accepted as the password. The password is case-sensitive, and you can
use up to 12 characters for the password.
 If you forget your password, you will not be able to open the project, so please be careful.

2-7
 2.Project

Changing the password:

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Project Password].

2. Enter the old password.

3. Enter a new password.

4. Select [Apply].

Deleting a password:

1 Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Project Password].

2 Enter the old password.

3 Select [Delete].

2-8
 2.Project

2.2.2 Setting project properties

You can change or check the property of a project in Project Property of LXP-Designer. If you select
[Common] ▶[Project Property Setting] in the menu Toolbar, you can check the property as below.

Items Description
Project Summary Set the basic information about the project file, such as project
name and author.

XGT Panel Settings Set XGT Panel information and communication connection.

Screen Settings Set Change screen option and HDMI screen.

Security Settings Set the permission to use XGT Panel.

Key Window Settings Specify a key window.

Language Set the editing language and runtime language.

Storage Settings Set the storage path of the external storage of XGT Panel.

Global Script Settings Set the global script item.

Camera Record Settings Select the built-in camera, IP camera, or USB camera, and set the
recording function.

FTP Backup Server Set the server information so that the backup file created in XGT
Panel can be automatically transmitted to the FTP server.

Thermal Camera Set whether to use the thermal imaging camera, connection
property, recording, etc.

Auxiliary Settings Set the barcode reader, screen capture, script watchdog time flow
alarm display, e-mail, system alarm, communication error window
display, etc.

2-9
 2.Project

Project Summary
The project summary has the information on the project name, file path, author, created date, modified
date, downloaded date, version, and description of the project. To change the information, enter the
information in the corresponding item and select [OK].

Items Description
Project name You can set the project name differently from the project save file name. If the
project name is changed, the top-level node name in the project window is
changed to the changed project name.

File path Indicates the location of the file where the project was saved. (Cannot be edited)

Author Enter a person who creates a project.

Description Enter the description for a project.

Created Displays the date the project file was initially created. (Cannot be edited)

Modified Displays the last modified date of the project. (Cannot be edited)

2-10
 2.Project

Items Description
Downloaded Displays the last date at which the project was transmitted to XGT Panel.
(Cannot be edited)

Version Displays the version information of LXP-Designer. (A user enters the information to
differentiate between versions.)

2-11
 2.Project

XGT Panel Settings

Set the information about the model and communication connection of XGT Panel. Depending on the
controller, the options you set may be different.

Items Description
Series Select the series of XGT Panel. For the details on XGT Panel series type,
refer to the device user manual.

Main Unit Select the main unit to use.

Display Unit Select the display unit to use.

Unused Display Unit Select when using a monitor connected via HDMI without using a display
unit. Select the resulotion of the monitor to be connected when the display
unit is not in use.

Portrait Mode You can view the projects vertically in XGT Panel. When you change a
project created in horizontal view to vertical view, the size of the created
figure or object may change or may go out of the edit screen. When you
download a project to the device, if it is different from the current state

2-12
 2.Project

Items Description
(vertical or horizontal), the device is rebooted. For the precautions when
installing XGT Panel in the vertical direction, refer to the device user
manual.

RS-232C 5V power Outputs the power of 5V, 250mA at RS-232C port.

supply

Add Controller You can add and delete a controller.

Select [Add Controller] to add a controller tab. When adding a controller,
Delete Controller the controller tab number increases automatically.
Depending on the protocol used, you can add 16 controllers in total. For
the details, refer to the section <2.9.1 1:N Communication Connection
of Multi Protocols>.
 If you select the controller tab and select [Delete Controller], the
corresponding tab is deleted. When you add more than one controller,
the Delete Controller button is enabled.
 If you delete a controller, the controller tab number decreases
automatically. For example, there are 3 controllers (controller 0~2), and
if you delete controller 1, controller 2 is automatically changed to
controller 1.

Controller Settings You can select the manufacturer and product of the controller, which
communicates with XGT Panel.

Refer to manual... You can open the communication user manual for the selected controller.

Protocol Select a method to connect XGT Panel with a controller. Make sure to
check the protocol you selected and hardware connection of XGT Panel
for a normal connection.
Serial Port This is a setting related to the connection method and you can select this
for serial communication. Depending on the model, if there is only one port
that can be connected, you don't need to select it. If there are multiple
ports, check the port name specified on XGT Panel, and then select the
port number.

Detail Settings Set a method to connect between XGT Panel and the controller. If a
controller is selected, it is automatically set to default. Depending on the
controller, the options may be different.

Timeout Set the timeout time during communication.

Wait to send Set a latency between unit data transmissions during communication
between XGT Panel and the controller.

Retry count Set the number of retry attempts when an error occurs during

2-13
 2.Project

Items Description
communication between XGT Panel and the controller.

Notes

• When changed to a model with a different screen resolution, the size of the object may
change. A fixed object size or font size is not affected, but the aspect ratio is change
d.

2-14
 2.Project

Screen Settings
You can set the screen to be changed according to the setting of the initial screen number and the
device value to start in XGT Panel.

Items Description
Initial screen number This indicates the initial screen number when XGT Panel starts for the
first time or when you start monitoring after a download is completed.
An error is displayed when there is no window of the corresponding
number at transmission.
To set the initial screen, select [Browse] ▶ specify a screen ▶ [OK].

Change screen by device An option for screen switching function by device value. When you
use this function, the device value is changed if the screen is
switched.

Change to screen number Set a device with which you specify the base screen number. If the
value of the corresponding device is changed, the screen is changed
to the screen number in which a device value (unsigned 16-bit) is

2-15
 2.Project

Items Description
displayed.

Current screen number Saves the screen number that is currently displayed.

Global window 1 number If the corresponding device value is changed, the screen is switched
Global window 2 number to the screen number, which is indicated by the device value.
The two specified window devices have no priority in operation.
- Create a window of the window in a specified location: A user can
specify the location of the global window for himself or herself.

2-16
 2.Project

Security Settings
XGT Panel allows a user to control PLC devices through an input/output object. At this time, you can set
the security level in XGT Panel so that only authorized users can control it. XGT Panel supports 10
security levels in total (0 or not set: no access restriction, 9: highest security level). You can set 'not set'
or level 1 ~ 9 in the security setting, and you can set the security level to restrict an access of an
individual object in the object. The higher level security can disable the lower level security. The lower
level security can disable the higher level security.

Items Description
Password mode Set a password that can work only if you enter the password.
You can set a password by level.

Password device This is used when the password is entered into a word device for operation.
mode A user can enter up to 12 bytes of data to set a password. This option is
used to encrypt the authentication or when a user changes his or her
password frequently.

2-17
 2.Project

Items Description
User ID mode This is used to enter a user ID and password for operation.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the user ID text. You can enter only
numbers, special characters, and English letters for the password and user
ID text strings. Upon entering, you shall enter the user ID first and then the
password.
[Order of entering user ID mode]
(1) Select [User ID mode].
(2) Enter the ID in the [User ID] column.
(3) Select a value in 1-9 levels.
(4) Enter the password.
Level Set a desired security level. Level 0 has no access restriction and all users
can control it. Therefore, you cannot specify a password.
(You can specify a password only for levels 1-9.)

Password You can set only Latin characters for the password, and specify up to 12
characters in a case-sensitive manner.

Password device This is used when the password is entered into a word device for operation.
Enter a device address where you set the password directly or select it with
the mouse cursor to set it with the device calculator.

Password input • Set the security duration. If the duration is exceeded, the password shall be
interval(min) entered again. The default setting is in the unit of minutes and can be set
up to 30 minutes.
• If the security level duration is set to 0, a password shall be entered
for all operations whose security has been set.
• Even before the security level duration has elapsed, password confirm
ation is required for operations with higher security settings. For the o
perations which require strict security management, set the security lev
el duration to a small value.

Password mode Even when the screens are changed upon check, the security mode is
locked on screen locked regardless of the duration of the security level. Therefore, you shall
change enter the password in the object whose security has been set and then
disable the security. Please refer to the security mode lock function of the
special switch.

Notes

The objects whose security level can be set include bit switch, word switch, screen change switch,
special switch, multiple switch, numeric input, and text input.

2-18
 2.Project

Key Window Settings

Set the key window to be used for the input device on the screen. The key window is applied as the
default key window of all objects.

2-19
 2.Project

Language
The language setting specifies the editing language used when creating a screen in LXP-Designer and
the language to be used when a project is transmitted to XGT Panel to be executed.

Items Description
Language list A user can edit the editing language of the text table or create a multilingual
text. If necessary, a user can select other languages he or she wants and
add them to the list. The text of the editing language is included in the
project, but not transmitted to XGT Panel.

Runtime language Runtime language is transmitted to XGT Panel in the TTF (true-type font) file
format. Up to 40 languages can be selected for runtime languages.

You can set Editing language list and Multilingual font in Language Settings..

2-20
 2.Project

Items Description
Editing language list Set the language displayed in the text table.

Add Select when adding a language to display. Select a language from

the list of supported languages and click [OK] to add a language.

Remove If you select a language and click Remove to delete the selected
language.

Editing Language Settings You can change the default font of the text table editing language.

Default runtime language This is a list of runtime languages to use for a project. You can
change the language list through adding or deleting.

Multilingual font

2-21
 2.Project

Items Description

 Set the font to be transmitted with the project file. You can use this
function when there is a font not supported by XGT Panel.
 Select this option considering the size of user memory supported by
XGT Panel model because this option transmits all of the specified
fonts to the device.
 The fonts for which multi-language is supported are used for
headers such as text input, text output unit, and logging backup CSV
file format. For details, refer to the next section. <4.3.4.4 Text
Display>

Runtime language Select a runtime language to use for the project. You can add and
delete languages to for the project.

Language change by device Select the device with the method to change runtime language. If
the value entered in the device matches the runtime language

2-22
 2.Project

Items Description
number, the runtime language suitable for the corresponding
number is displayed on XGT Panel.

Korean
좋은 아침?
Use language
Change device

Good Morning?
English

Language change device You can enter when you check Language change by device.
When you use a word device and enter a runtime language number
into the word device, the language specified in the selected number
is displayed.

Runtime language list Select a runtime language to use in XGT Panel. It is disabled when
you check Language change by device.

Notes

 If the characters used in the text table cannot be displayed in the default font, it may not be displayed
properly in XGT Panel.
 If the language corresponding to the device value is not specified when switching the language using
the language switching device, it is not displayed on XGT Panel.
Please refer to the next section for details. <2.2.2.6 Language>

2-23
 2.Project

Storage Settings
Set the storage location of an external storage to save data such as images, font file, logging data,
recipe, screen capture image, and video file of XGT Panel.

Items Description
Image files The size of the area to save the project file is fixed in XGT Panel. If a user
wants to transmit data of more than a limited size to XGT Panel and use
it, you can specify that you save the image files, which take up a lot of
space among project files, in a portable storage instead of the basic
project file storage for using. A user specifies the file location on XGT
Panel including the full path.

Upload project file Select a location to save when downloading a project to XGT Panel.
Sound files
Recipe data

Movie Play Specify a path to play a movie file in the multimedia object of the project.

2-24
 2.Project

Items Description
Alarm data Select an external storage to back up the data of XGT Panel.
Logging data
Recipe data
Capture Image
Camera Record
Camera Capture
Thermal Camera Record
Thermal Camera
Capture

Delete old file if disk is If the backup area is full, delete the old files first.
full

Create Directory The backup data such as alarm, logging, and recipe have a unique folder
name and are backed up under it. If you uncheck Create Directory, the file
can be backed up in the backup directory root without creating a unique
folder.
Note that you can uncheck Create Directory for only one of the backup
items such as alarm, logging, and recipe.

Notes

 XGT Panel supports 3 external storage devices in total: USB memory, SD card, and extended
memory.
 The files related to multimedia such as sound file, camera recording file, and thermal imaging camera
recording file are incapable of using the USB memory.
 [Delete old file if disk is full], [Create Directory] cannot be se in case of camera recording and camera
capture. If the number of camera recorded or captured files exceeds 1000 or the capacity is exceeded,
the oldest files are automatically deleted. Each file is created in the following directory withing each
storage device.
1. Camera general recording directory: \cameraRecord
2. Camera event recording directory: \carmeraEventRecord
3. Camera capture directory: \cameraCapture
4. Thermal camera capture file: \thermal_camera\capture

2-25
 2.Project

Global Script Settings

The global script is always monitored during XGT Panel monitoring and is executed when the condition
is met. You can register a global script up to 32. Set the execution priority when two or more conditions
are met at the same time.

Items Description
Name Select a name of the script.

Device Set the bit device corresponding to the condition with which you
execute the script. You can set only when the condition type is rising
edge/falling edge/upon change.

Type Set bit conditions, i.e., rising edge, falling edge, upon change, and
periodic and continuous script execution conditions.

Second You can set only when the type is periodic and set the script execution
cycle in seconds.

Insert, Delete, Modify Insert, delete, or modify the selected script.

2-26
 2.Project

Items Description
Up If two or more conditions among scripts are met at the same time,
Down determine the execution priority between scripts.

2-27
 2.Project

Control Panel Setting

XGT Panel control panel can be set in LXP-Designer. You can also import the connected XGT Panel
control panel settings through [Get Setting].

Items Description
Connection Setting Select the Connection Settings option. You can change the transmission
options by selecting the button .
Ethernet: Sets the device and PC connection method to Ethernet. You
can enter the IP and port of the device to which the project data will be
transmitted.

USB: Set the device and PC connection method to USB method. USB
drivers can also be installed manually.

Display Brightness and backlight can be set

2-28
 2.Project

Items Description
Touch You can set the touch mode, touch sensitivity, and gestures.

Date/Time You can set the date and time.

Ethernet IP, subnet mask and gateway of LAN0 and LAN1 can be set.

Sound You can set audio and browser.

Menu Bar You can set the position of the menu and screen duration.

System OS You can configure system language, HDMI, and other settings.

Notes

 The XGT Panel control panel setting function is applied only when the “Use XGT Panel control panel
settings” check box is checked..
 There is a checkbox for each setting category, and settings are applied only to the checked category..
 XGT Panel control panel setting function is applied to XGT Panel in the following two cases.
1. In the case of writing a project in the form of Ethernet or USB in LXP-Designer.
2. In the case of performing import in the project menu of XGT Panel after creating project data in the
file method in LXP-Designer (availability can be selected).

2-29
 2.Project

Camera Record Settings

You can record a video from a built-in camera or a camera connected with an USB or an IP.

You can set the use of barcode reader and camera recording which can be connected to XGT Panel in
the corresponding project property.

Items Description
Use Video Select an option for using camera recording.

Camera Type Select the type of camera to use.

Only one of the built-in camera, USB camera, and IP camera can be
selected for camera recording. If you select the built-in camera, an
additional setting is not necessary.

USB Camera Index Select the USB camera number you want to use.

2-30
 2.Project

Items Description

Notes

The number refers to the location of the USB port, and you shall
connect the USB camera at this location.

USB1
USB2

IP Camera Set the options of the IP camera to use.

RTSP IP: Enter the IP address of RTSP.
RTSP Port: Enter the port number of the RTSP.
ID: If RTSP camera authentication is required, enter the ID.
Password: If RTSP camera authentication is required, enter the
password.
Camera Path: Set the RTSP URL of the IP camera. For the RTSP URL
setting, please refer to the user manual of each manufacturer.

Notes

If RTSP camera authentication is required, you shall enter an

RTSP IP including ID and password.
Example) rtsp://admin:1234@192.168.1.51/StdCh1

Record Type Select a recording type. You can set it in only one way.

Record Start/Stop Device Perform recording according to the status change of the bit device.
Recording starts when the device status is on and the recording ends
when it turns off.

Notes

2-31
 2.Project

Items Description

 Recording starts even if the recording start/end device turns

on when the operation starts.
 If Record Start/Stop Device is not turned off but recording
stops due to other reasons, do not change Record Start/Stop
Device.

Maximum Set the recording time per file. You can set this in seconds, and set from
a minimum of 5 seconds to a maximum of 3600 seconds. If the set
recording time elapses, it is saved to the next file. The saved recording
file can be recorded for about 2 seconds more.

Section Record Device Carry out a recording for the time set according to the rising edge of the
bit device. If the device status turns on, the video is recorded before it is
on for the set time, and after that, additional recording is performed for
the set time and the recording ends. Recording is carried out for the sum
of time set “before” and “after”recording, and the recorded can last for
about 2 more seconds. The device status does not change to off even if
the recording ends, and recording does not stop and continues for the
set time even if the device status is changed during recording.

Event Occur

Before set time After set time

time

Recording time

Before Set the time before event recording. You can set this in seconds, and set
a maximum of 10 seconds.

After Set the time after event recording. You can set this in seconds, and set a
maximum of 600 seconds.

Status Device Set a word device. Record the value for the operation state of recording
in the device. Please refer to the table below for device values according
to recording state.
Record Status Device Description
Value
0 Stop

1 Recording in progress

2-32
 2.Project

Items Description

2 Error

3 Recording in
preparation

4 Recording paused

Use Flip Set whether to apply Use Flip during recording.

Recording has the following restrictions:

Items Description
Storage resolution Fixed as 640×480

Storage frame rate 15fps

Storage SD Card It is recommended to use 10MB/s or more (Class 10, UHS-I).

specification

Record file You can create up to 1000 recordings in each folder.

If the number of recorded files reaches 1000 or the capacity is full, the
oldest files are deleted.

Notes

 Since the total number of all files in the folder where a

recorded file is saved is checked, if there are other types of
files in the same folder, they may be deleted as well.

Notes

The camera storage resolution and recording frame rate may vary depending on the performance of a
HMI device.

2-33
 2.Project

FTP Backup
This is a function that automatically uploads a backup file created in the XP-Runtime to the remote FTP
backup server.

Items Description

Use Backup server Select whether to use FTP Backup.

Add FTP Server
Delete FTP Server
Up to 3 FTP servers can be registered and used. When [Add FTP
Server] is selected, the server number is incremented automatically.
Set properties for each server.
Select the [FTP Server] tab and select [Delete FTP Server] to delete
the tab. When two or more FTP servers are added, the [Delete FTP
Server] button becomes active.
The tab number is automatically decremented when the FTP server
deletes it. For example, there are 3 servers, and if you delete FTP
server 1 here, the existing number 2 will automatically change to
number 1 and number 3 to number 2.

2-34
 2.Project

Items Description

Protocol Type Select the FTP transfer protocol to transfer the files.
For SFTP, anonymous is not possible and the port number is changed
to the default of 22.

IP address Enter the IP address of the FTP server.

Port Enter the port number of the FTP server.

Timeout Enter the time to wait for a response if there is no response from the
FTP server when trying to connect to the FTP server.

Login Type Select the type of login to the backup server to connect to.
Depending on the protocol type, configurable logon types are classified.
FTP: Anonymous, General
SFTP: General, Keyfile

ID If an ID is required when connecting to an FTP server, enter the ID.

Password If an ID is required when connecting to an FTP server, enter the

password.

Key file In case of SFTP, you can access the FTP server through the private
key (pem file).
Register the private key to be used for SFTP.

FTP server passive mode The FTP server is normally connected in Active mode. In this case, if
the connection is successful, a separate TCP connection is created for
data transfer. At this time, the FTP server actively connects to the client.
Therefore, if a firewall is installed in the network where a HMI acting as
the FTP client is installed, FTP connection may fail. In this case, you
can check the FTP server passive mode, and then try to connect.

Set backup data storage If you upload all the history alarm, logging, recipe, and screen capture
path files when a file is uploaded to the FTP server, the files are mixed in
one folder. For this case, enter a sub path name in order to create and
save a folder for each function under the FTP server root path.

Each backup file can be given a different FTP backup server number.
However, if the selected FTP server number is greater than the number
of FTP servers, the set FTP server number will be initialized.

If the backup path is not specified, it behaves differently according to

the FTP server's policy.
In general, if the path is not entered, it is the home path of the PC
(including the tablet) where the FTP server is running. In other words,
the action is possible even if nothing is entered in the path.
However, in the case of SFTP, it must be an absolute path, so in case

2-35
 2.Project

Items Description
of “”, it may not work in some cases because it depends on the OS of
the H/W where the FTP server operates.
It is recommended to enter the path after checking the FTP server
policy if possible.

The following is the description of the function to import the extended FileRecipe.
Items Description
Condition Enter the conditions for importing the extended FileRecipe from the
server. If you enter a device address, the extended FileRecipe file is
imported when the rising edge or falling edge of the corresponding
device is detected.

Path When importing the Extended file recipe from the server, enter the sub-
path name of the FTP server root where the file is located.

2-36
 2.Project

Thermal Camera
Set whether to use the thermal camera, the thermal camera connection properties to be connected to
the XGT Panel, and recording.

Items Description
Use a thermal camera Set whether or not to use a thermal camera.

Add Up to 4 thermal cameras can be added. If you select [Add], the thermal
Delete camera number is automatically incremented.
Set the properties for each camera.
 Select the [Thermal Camera] tab and select [Delete] to delete the tab.
When two or more thermal cameras are added, the [Delete] buttin is
activated.
 Deleting the thermal camera automatically decrease the tab number.
For example, there are 3 cameras, and if you delete the thermal
camera 1 among them, the existing thermal camera 2 is automatically
changed to #1.

2-37
 2.Project

Items Description
Save Capture File To This is the path to capture and save the corresponding camera input
image when an alarm occurs in the ROI area. Please refer to the
description of [ROI setting].
Capture files are created in the following directory in the set storage
device.
thermal_camera\capture

Connection Property Set the following items.

Communication method: Only RS485 communication method is
provided.
Baud rate: It provides only 115200.
COM Port: Set the RS 485 serial port. If it matches the serial port of
[Controller] in [XGT Panel Settings], an error occurs.

Station Number: Set the station number for connection to the thermal
camera.
Sampling: Set the period to acquire the thermal camera input.

Status Device Set the status device.

Value Description
0 Normal

1 Error

Image Setting Set the position value and transparency value of the image added to the
ROI area.
If a background image is set in the ROI area setting, the offset value of
the image is set based on the upper left corner.
If OFFSET X : 50, OFFSET Y : 50 is set in the background image below,
the background image moves by 50 pixels to the right and 50 pixels to
the bottom.

2-38
 2.Project

Items Description

Opacity Set the degree of display of the thermal image read through [Read
thermal image csv file].
Opacity 100: The thermal image read through the thermal image csv file
read is displayed.

2-39
 2.Project

Items Description

Opacity : Thermal images read through CSV file reading are not
displayed

ROI Area ROI (Regin of Interset) means the area you want to track and monitor
among the entire area input from the thermal camera.
For example, among the areas monitored by the thermal camera, the
ROI area can be designated as the area to be monitored with interest,
such as an area with a large temperature change or a high temperature.
Up to 10 ROI areas can be set per camera.

2-40
 2.Project

Items Description

Open Image File Set the background image of the area to display the temperature value of
the thermal camera.

Draw ROI After pressing the [Draw ROI] button, set a rectangular area of the
desired size in the [ROI Area Value Setting].
The ROI area can be copied/pasted.

If you double-click the created ROI rectangle, you can set the value
corresponding to the ROI area.

2-41
 2.Project

Items Description

Item Description
Cumulative Max. Save the highest temperature value of
Temper. Value the ROI area after starting monitoring

Cumulative Lowest Save the lowest temperature value of the

Temper. Value ROI area after starting monitoring

Cumulative Ave. Save the average temperature value of

Temper. Value the ROI area after starting monitoring

Current Max. Temper. Saves the current highest temperature

Value value of the ROI area.

Current Lowest Save the current lowest temperature

Temper. Value value of the ROI area

Current Ave. Temper. Save the current average temperature

Value value of the ROI area

[Image capture when an alarm occurs]: The device set in each item is
used in the history alarm, and when the alarm occurs, the thermal imager
input temperature value is displayed and the image is captured.

Palette Setting Set the palette to express the temperature value input from the thermal
camera in color.
If you set a palette, it will be displayed in the ROI editing area. The color
displayed at the bottom of the palette is the color indicating the minimum

2-42
 2.Project

Items Description
temperature value, and the color displayed at the top is the color
indicating the maximum temperature value.
 Auto: The input temperature is automatically calculated in real time to
determine the maximum/minimum temperature value.
 Manual: The user sets the maximum/minimum temperature value. If
the temperature rage is higher than the max value set by the user, the
highest temperature value of the palette is set.
If the themperature range is lower than the min value set by the user, it
is set as the lowest temperature value of the palette.

Read thermal image csv If you click the export image button in [Thermal Image Camera Object]
file while monitoring in XGT Panel, the camera temperature value is saved
as CSV.
You can check the thermal image camera temperature value file saved in
XGT Panel by reading it in LXP-Designer.

2-43
 2.Project

Items Description

Notes

 If the thermal camera connection property serial port is the same as the port number of
the controller, it cannot be set.
 Before installing the thermal camera, be sure to check and set the controller station
number.
 f the thermal image transparency is 100, the image set in the set background is not
visible.
 If you set the temperature value manually and set min/max incorrectly, it may be
displayed in a single color.
 When using the thermal camera capture function, be sure to check the storage location.

2-44
 2.Project

Auxiliary Settings
Set an auxiliary function that can be used in XGT Panel.

Items Description
Barcode settings Set when you connect a barcode reader to XGT Panel and use it.

Connection property Set the method of connection with the barcode reader to use between
RS-232C/USB protocols.

Connection Option Detailed option information:

Settings  Set the number of bytes to read: Set the date size to be read from the
barcode. If you set the number of bytes, data is read only as much as
the specified number of bytes. If you do not specify the number of
bytes to read, XGT Panel reads the entered entire barcode.
 Save data: Specify the location to save the read data. Save
continuously from the currently specified device.

2-45
 2.Project

Items Description
 Data storage device: Set a device to save the data read from the
barcode.
 Use the reading-completed device: When all barcode data has been
read, set a bit device to notify that reading has been completed.
 Set RS-232C communication parameters such as baud rate data bit,
parity and stop bit.

Notes

The baud rate shall match with the baud rate set in XGT Panel.

Notes

 You do not need to set the connection option depending on

the usage environment for the USB barcode. (Refer to how
to use the USB barcode reader below.)
 The USB barcode saves the input value of the USB in [Data
storage device] only when the connection option is set and
the HS501.2 device is on.
 After the waiting time for barcode entering elapses, entering
is saved after [Data storage device] value is initialized.
 If you use a USB barcode reader, a reader with a current
consumption of 250mA or less is recommended. If it exceeds
250mA, please supply a separate power for the USB
barcode reader and use it.

Items Description
Screen Capture Specify the screen capture output format. Select among File,
Print, and Save as File and Print.

Script Watchdog Time Set a watchdog time in the script. If you cannot run the script
within a set time, the action set in the script is not performed.

Items Description
E-mail Property Select whether to use the e-mail function.

System Alarm Window Select whether to display a system alarm message.

2-46
 2.Project

Items Description
Show communication error Select whether to display an error at the top of the screen when
window an error occurs during communication with XGT Panel.

- Show All: Displays all communication errors and system

alarms between the XGT Panel and the controller.
- System Alarm: Only system alarms are displayed.
- Communicatoin Error: Displays only the communication error
between the XGT Panel and the controller.

Sound a buzzer If you check the Sound a buzzer option, a buzzer is output at the
same time an error window is displayed. You can use the
checkbox on the right side of the communication error window to
stop or resume the buzzer sound.

Don’t show communication error When you set ‘Don’t show communication error window after it is
window after it is closed closed’ option, if a user closes the communication error window
that has appeared, the error does not show up any more even if
an error occurs again.

2-47
 2.Project

Notes

 Click [Server Settings] -> [E-mail] to set the e-mail.

Function Description
FROM You can set only one sender.

TO Set a recipient. You can specify several recipients by using a semicolon (;) between
the recipients' email addresses.

CC Set the second recipient. You can specify several recipients by using a semicolon (;)
between the recipients' email addresses.

BCC Set the hidden second recipient. The content of the e-mail does not show up in the
e-mail addresses in this space. You can specify several recipients by using a
semicolon (;) between the recipients' email addresses.

Subject Enter a subject of the email. You can enter up to 128 Latin characters.

 To set the mail server, select [Server Settings] ▶ [Mail Server].

2-48
 2.Project

Items Description
IP address or SMTP Enter the IP address or SMTP server name of the mail server.
server name

SMTP server port Enter the port number of the SMTP server. If you use the non-
account mail service on SMTP server inside intranet (Anonymous
SMTP), the port number is 25.

Use SSL/TLS Encrypt the data when sending an email to the mail server.

SMTP server Check the certificate of the mail server.

requires
authentication

Validate server If you do not use the non-account mail service on SMTP server
certificate inside intranet (Anonymous SMTP), an authentication for the user
information is required.

User name Enter the user account.

Password Enter the user password.

- The mail server shall exist in the same intranet network as XGT Panel.
- An outgoing mail is encoded in Unicode. By default, port 25 is used.
- To use the URL mail server, you shall set DNS server IP in [Ethernet Setting] of the initial
menu of XGT Panel.

2-49
 2.Project

Connecting a barcode reader:

1 Select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [Auxiliary Settings].

2 Select the checkbox in Barcode settings.

3 If you select [Detail Settings], the following settings are available.

Connecting a USB barcode reader:

4 Select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [Auxiliary Settings].

5 Select the checkbox in the Barcode settings, and then select the USB.
6 If you select [Detail Settings], the following settings are available.

2-50
 2.Project

How to use an USB barcode reader:

1 As shown in the screen (1) above, if the character input device or numeric input is in the input state:
 Even if there is no [Detail Settings], the barcode information entered is saved in the corresponding
input device.

 If there is [Detail Settings] and the internal device HS0501.2 is on, it is also saved in the device
set in [Data storage] at the same time.

2 As shown in the screen (2) above, if the character input device or numeric input is not in the input
state:
 Check to use [Project Property]-[Auxiliary Settings]-[Barcode settings] and set it to USB.

 Set [Data storage] in the Connection Details option.

 If the internal device HS0501.2 is on: An entered barcode value is saved in [Data storage]. For
example, press the HS0501.2 switch to turn it on, and enter a barcode value.

 If the internal device HS0501.2 is off: An input cannot be made. To receive an input while remaining
off, create and scan an input state as in (1).

3 Using dwell time for barcode input

2-51
 2.Project

 The inputs made within dwell time for barcode input (unit: ms) are continuously stored in [Data
storage device].

 In the above screen, since [Waiting Time] is 1000ms, all inputs within 1000ms interval is entered in
[Data storage].

 If you scan barcodes in a row within 1000ms, they are recognized as one barcode and are all saved.
If the interval of continuous scans is 1000ms or more, it is entered after [Data storage] is initialized.

 You can also adjust the time with the internal device (HS0507) in addition to [Detail Settings].

2-52
 2.Project

2.2.3 Basic Options Settings

You can set the basic options of LXP-Designer.

Edit Option

To change Edit Option, select [TOOL] ▶ [Options] ▶ [Edit Option].

Items Description
Object ID/Address Text Color Set the basic color to display device and object IDs.

Background AlphaBlend Use Set whether to display translucently over white background as the
basic color of device and object IDs.

Object ID/Address Font Size Set the default font size to display IDs and addresses of a device and
an object.

Default Text Color of Set the default color of a text figure or an object where the character
Figure/Object property are included.

Default Line Color of Set a text figure where line properties are included or the default color.
Figure/Object This is applied to the shape or object created after color setting.

Use Background Color from By default, set whether to use the background color in the screen.
New Screen This is applied from the screen created after the background color is
set.

2-53
 2.Project

Items Description
Default BG Color from New Set the default background screen color. This is applied from the
Screen screen created after the background color is set.

Screen Limit Check on This is an option to restrict allowing or disallowing a figure and an
Object/Figure’s Editing object to move out of the screen area upon editing.

Page Margin X Pixel Set the size of the margin line X axis.

Page Margin Y Pixel Set the size of the margin line Y axis.

Move/Resize Pixel(X) Set the size in pixels when moving or resizing using the keyboard
arrows along the X axis.

Move/Resize Pixel(Y) Set the size in pixels when moving or resizing using the keyboard
arrows along the Y axis.

2-54
 2.Project

Project

To set project management options, select [TOOL] ▶ [Options] ▶ [Project].

Items Description
Show File Dialog At Start Up Select whether to show Open project selection box at program
startup.

Recent Files You can set the maximum number of the lists of recent files.

Auto Save Set whether to save a project automatically.

Interval Set the project auto-save time interval.

Show Property Dialog on Set whether to display the property dialog at the time of figure/object
New Figure/Object creation.

Show Warning On Data
Check or Script Check
If the following command is executed when the Show Warning
option is checked, an error and an error item are simultaneously
displayed to the output window, only the error item is displayed in
the output window If the option is not checked.
 When executing data check ([TOOL] ▶ [Data Check])
 When downloading a project
 When checking for a script error ([TOOL] ▶ [Script Check])

2-55

Items
Create .bak whenever saving
project file
Max Backup File No.
Check ‘Include Upload
Project file’ on Project
Download as Default
2.Project
Description
This is an option that determines whether to save the existing
project as a '.bak' file when creating a project file. If checked, save
the contents of the existing project file in a .bak file before saving
the project file, and then save the changed project contents in
an .xpd file. If unchecked, save the project only in an .xpd file
without generating a .bak file.
Set the maximum number of backup files to be created when
saving. You can set between 1 and 10 files.
Set whether to check the ‘Include Upload Project file’ option in the
Send Communication dialog box. This is checked by default. With this
checked, the option, ‘Include Upload Project’ is checked by default
whenever you open the Send dialog box, and if you uncheck the
above option, a user can keep the ‘Include upload project’ setting.
2-56
 2.Project

2.3 Screen Configuration

You can draw a shape, object, graph, etc. used in a project on various types of screens. The screen
types are as follows:

Items Description
Base screen  This is the base screen where you can edit an object and a figure.
 The screen size is different depending on XGT Panel model.

Window screen  It is a screen which pops up or is composited to be displayed on the base

screen.
 You can display [Window screen] through “bit window” and “word window”
objects on the base screen. You can add up to 32 window objects (bit/word) to
one base screen.
 You can create up to 1-65530 window screens, and 65,531-65,534 are assigned
as system key windows.
 You can insert a figure and an object in the window screen. However, you
cannot insert a window object (bit/word) in the window screen.
 To check the bit window status in advance, select [VIEW] ▶ [Object On/Off].
 To check the word window condition in advance, if you change the value in the
condition combo box, the screen appears according to the window number
assigned to the window screen conditional statement and then you can check it
in advance.
 If you cannot see the shift key on the window screen, click the mouse cursor
anywhere on the window screen.
 For details, refer to the next section.
<4.3.5 Window Object>

Key window  The key window is predetermined and provides 4 types of key pad: decimal,
character (ASCII), hexadecimal, and float.
 If you want to use a custom keypad, you can use the special function of the
switch object to place it on the window screen, or you can call it from the keypad
library among the provided object libraries to modify it or use it as it is.
 To change key window settings, select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [Key
Window Settings].

You can specify the global window settings with two devices, and they can be executed on all screens
according to a specified device value. To set the global window device, select [Common] ▶ [Project
Property] ▶ [Window Settings].

Notes

2-57
 2.Project

A total of 65534 screens are provided for the window screen and sub screen. However, 65531-65534
screens are already used as assigned keypads. You can adjust the size of default screens (DEC,
HEX, ASCII, FLOAT) only.

2.3.1 Adding a screen

You can add 2 types of screens in the screen window. You can drag the window screen to the base
screen for display. This table describes how to add a screen.

Items Description
Base screen Right-click [Base Screen] in the screen tree, and click Insert.
Double-click Insert Base Screen in the screen tree.

Window screen Right-click [Window Screen] in the screen tree, and click Insert.
Double-click Insert window screen in the screen tree.

2-58
 2.Project

2.3.2 Screen Settings

A user can set which screen to display when XGT Panel is executed in LXP-Designer.

Open/close a screen
To open a screen, double-click the screen which exists in the screen window. To close a screen, select
the corresponding screen and right-click and then select [Close].

To view small all project screens in the screen list, select [VIEW]▶ [Screen Thumbnails].

2-59
 2.Project

Set as base screen

The base screen refers to the initial screen displayed on the device screen after sending screen data to
XGT Panel. The screen set as the base screen is displayed in bold and can be set only on the base
screen.

Setting base screen:

1 Select the corresponding screen in the screen window and right-click.

2 Select [As Startup Screen].

2-60
 2.Project

Rename

1 Select the corresponding screen in the screen window and right-click.

2 Select [Rename].

3 Enter a new name and press Enter on the keyboard.

Notes

 A screen name consist of numbers, spaces, and letters. There must be a space between the screen
number and the name.
(For example, if you enter a number and a name as the base screen 1, it is not recognized in LXP-
Designer.)
 You cannot the screen number for key windows DEC (65531), HEX (65532), ASCII (65533), FLOAT
(65534).
 You can select multiple screens in the screen window and then change the property at the same time.
You can select multiple screens to change while holding down Ctrl+Shift, and then right-click to
change the property.

2-61
2.Project

2-62
 2.Project

Change screen property

1. Right-click anywhere on the base screen.

2. Select [Screen Property].

3. Set the following property.

2-63
2.Project

2-64
 2.Project

Items Description
General  Set the basic information such as screen type, screen number, and screen
name.
 If there are multiple screens you want to change, select multiple screens in
Project window, and then right-click to pop up the menu and select [Property].

Background  Set the background color or color, and image. To use an image in the PC,
select [Library] in Use a desktop image, and then select the file where the
image is located. For details, refer to the next section.<2.4.1 Graphic Library

Management>
 You can set the background color and the background image at the same
time, but the background image is drawn first, followed by the background
color property.
 When adding a background image, the types of images you can add are BMP,
JPG, GIF, PNG, SVG, and EMF.

Local Script Setting  You can set the screen script so that it can be executed when the base screen
shows up or when it is switched to another base screen.
 To use the script function, a script shall be created first. For details, refer to
the next section.
<4.2 Scripts>.
 To apply a script, select an already written script, and then specify the
execution condition, and select ▶ [Add].
 You can set execution conditions as periodic, continuous, during bit
rising/falling/changing, or set it with a specific device and execute it.
 If a screen script exists when an open base screen is activated, the “Show
Scrren Script” docking window is automatically displayed.

Etc.  You can select using a script when a screen is displayed or using a script
when a screen disappears.
 Select whether to set the flow alarm displayed on XGT Panel.

2-65
 2.Project

Notes

Even if the execution condition is met again during script processing, the execution time of the script
may be slightly delayed because the condition is checked again after the script execution is
completed.

4. Select [OK] to finish settings.

Inserting a screen and deleting an inserted screen

You can insert the selected screen as a wallpaper for another screen. Alternatively, you can remove a
selected screen from an already inserted screen.

1. Right-click anywhere on the base screen. Select the following items.

Item Description
Insert a screen as the  The selected screen is inserted as a wallpaper object of all open
background of the open base base screens.
screen

Insert screen as background  The selected screen is inserted as a wallpaper object for all main
for all main screens screens

Delete only the selected insert  f the selected screen in all base screens is used as a
screen from all base screens background/insert screen object, the object is deleted.

Delete all insert screens from  Deletes background/insert screen objects from all base screens.
all base screens

2-66
 2.Project

2.3.3 Editing a screen

By default, you can edit a screen using cut, copy, paste, etc.

Editing a screen:

2. Right-click a screen to edit in the screen window.

3. Select [Copy], [Paste], [Cut], or [Delete].

4. Select [OK].

Notes

You can set the screen number when pasting a screen to the project.

2-67
 2.Project

2.3.4 Drawing a figure/object

You can place shapes, objects, and strings on the screen, and change the width, height, color, and
pattern. You can add a picture in the graphic library and apply them to figures, objects, etc.

Drawing a figure
You can draw a figure such as straight line, arc, and rectangle.

Drawing a figure:

1. Select [Figure] in the Drawing Toolbox window.

2. Select a figure type.

3. Select the location for editing or specify options.
Items Description
Line  To draw a multiline, click the starting line and the bending point as shown in the
Multiline figure below to draw it and when finished, double-click to finish it.

2-68
 2.Project

Items Description

Click Click Double Click

Click
Click

 To delete part of the multiline, click the corresponding point while holding down the
Ctrl key.

 To draw a line, drag the part you want to edit. To draw a straight line, drag while
holding down the Shift key.

Circle  To draw a circle or a rectangle, drag while holding down the Shift key.
PIe  To draw a figure from the center point, select the corresponding figure and select
Chord [Edit] ▶ [Draw from center] in Toolbar.
Ellipse
• Notes
Rectangle
RoundRect If you set the Draw from Center option, it is applied to all screens in the
same project.

 To draw a circle, pie, or chord, you shall first draw a circle and click the starting point
and ending point.

 Draw the circle again until it becomes a circle, pie, and chord.

2-69
 2.Project

Items Description

<Pie> <Chord>
 To draw an eclipse, rectangle, or RoundRect, select the corresponding figure.

Polygon  To draw a polygon, click the starting line and the bending point as shown in the
figure below to draw it, and when finished, double-click.

Click

Click

Click

Double Click Click

Click Click

•
 To delete part of the polygon, click the corresponding point while holding down the
Ctrl key.

•
Image  Bring an image in the PC. For details, refer to the next section. <2.4.1 Graphic
Library Management>
 Double-click to change the image.
Scale  You can set the direction and position of the scale.

2-70
 2.Project

Items Description
 You can set the number of number scale marks, major scale, minor scale, scale
interval, etc. in the scale option.
 You can change the color in the scale option.
 You can express a table using two scale figures.
Text  You can enter a text in the text figure.
 To bring a text from the text table, select it from the text table and select [Text
Table].
 You can set the character/line spacing of a text.
Table  You can set the number of rows and columns.
 You can set the interval of rows and columns.
 You can set the color, shape, and thickness of lines.

4. Select [OK] to finish setting the property of the figure.

Notes

 The default size value may vary from shape to shape.

 The texture displayed in XGT Panel may be different from the one displayed in LXP-Designer.

2-71
 2.Project

Creating an image from the graphic library

You can create a pictures from the graphic library. For details on the Graphic Library, refer to the next
section. <2.4.1 Graphic Library Management>

Creating an image from the graphic library:

1. Select [VIEW] ▶ [Graphic Library Window].

2. Select an image you want in the Graphic Library window.

3. Drag and import the selected image from the Graphic Library window to the base screen.

2-72
 2.Project

2-73
 2.Project

Drawing an object
You can create objects such as switch, window, part, and graph. These are important objects which
operate the controller according to a device value or condition. For details on object, refer to the next
section. <2.4.2 Object Library Management>

Creating an object:

1. Select [Object] in the Toolbox window.

2. Select the object type.
3. Drag the selected object on the base screen to specify the option.
Items
Bit/word switch, Screen change switch
Special switch, Multi switch
Bit/word lamp, N-Phase ramp, Clock
Bit message, Word message
Numeric display, Numeric input
Text display, Text input
Animation
Bit window
Word window
Bar graph, Pie graph
Meter graph, Trend graph
Logging trend graph, Distribution chart
graph
Closed curve graph
View history alarm, View logging, Explorer,
Multimedia, FTP client, Thermal imaging
camera
Description
Select an object and then click the base screen to
create it. Size can be adjusted.
 Select an object and then click the base screen to
create it.
 Size cannot be changed for this object.
Select an object and then click the base screen to
create it. Size can be adjusted.
• Select the graph type between ellipse and polygon.
• Create a closed curve in the selected closed curve
type. The method of drawing a closed curve of a
polygon is the same as that of a polygon of a figu
re.
• Select an object and then click the base screen to
create it. Size can be adjusted.
• Size of the view logging object cannot be adjusted.

4. Select [OK] to finish setting the object. To change the setting, select and double-click the
corresponding object.

Notes

2-74
 2.Project

• The table below describes the constraints when creating an object.

Items Description

View history alarm 1: Only one object can be created per screen.

View logging

Bit window Up to 32 windows can be created per screen.

Word window

Recipe explorer  Only one basic recipe can be created.

 You can select the explorer type in the explorer
options.
 An error occurs while sending a project to a device
when the limited number of explorers is exceeded.

Figure & other objects No limitation

• You cannot create an object in the following cases.

- When inserting a window object in the window screen
- When the following objects have already been created on the same screen: History alarm,
Alarm explorer, Logging trend graph, Explorer

2-75
 2.Project

Creating an object from the object library

You can create a figure or object from the object library. For details on the library, refer to the next
section. <2.4 Library Management>

Creating an image from the object library:

1. Select [VIEW] ▶ [Object Library Window].

2. Select a desired image from the object library.

3. Drag the selected image to the base screen.

2-76
 2.Project

4. To change property, select and double-click an image.

5. Select [OK] to finish changing property.

2-77
 2.Project

2.3.5 Editing an object

This section describes how to edit an object created in the project.

Selecting an object
You can select an object, and then move, resize, copy, paste, or delete it. LXP-Designer provides users
with more efficient and various options.

Basic selection
 You can click and select an object created on the screen.
 To select multiple objects at the same time, you can drag and select them with the mouse or select
them while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key.

- If you click on the screen and drag the rectangle to the bottom right, only the objects within the
rectangle are selected.

- If you click on the screen and drag the rectangle to the top left, all objects within the rectangle or the
ones that partially touch the rectangle are selected.

• To select all objects on the screen at once, press [Edit] ▶ [Select All] or “Ctrl+A”.

Notes

2-78
 2.Project

You can select the main object while holding down the “Ctrl” key on the multiple objects you have
selected.

When arranging multiple objects, they are arranged by the criteria by which the main object is
selected.
You can press the ESC key to deselect figures and objects you have already selected.

Selecting overlapped objects

When selecting one of the overlapped objects, right-click and select while pressing and holding the “Ctrl”
key. At this time, they are selected in the order of from top to bottom.

Notes

 When selecting the overlapped objects sequentially, they are selected sequentially within
the same group boundary.
 When selecting an object hidden by an object, drag with the mouse to select it while
pressing and holding the “Alt” key.

 If you click the overlapped area when other object was selected due to overlapped object,
the selected object is maintained.

2-79
 2.Project

Deselecting

To deselect, simply click an empty area of the screen or click anywhere on the screen while pressing
and holding the “Alt” key.

Group & Ungroup

You can edit several objects at once using the Group option.

1. Select multiple objects to group.

2. Select them, and then right-click to select [Group].

Ungrouping:

1. Select the grouped objects.

2. Select them, and then right-click to select [Ungroup].

2-80
 2.Project

Notes

 If you click the corresponding object for about 0.5 seconds and release the mouse button
while the group is selected to select one object from grouped objects, the corresponding
object is selected.

 If you select one object in a group, you can select another object in the same group as
well.

2-81
 2.Project

Select Lock & Release Select Lock

You select or deselect objects and figures.

Disabling object selection:

1. Create an object and a figure on the screen to which you will apply the Lock function.
2. Right-click to select [Select Lock].

Releasing Select Lock:

1. Right-click the objects and figures to which lock was applied.

2. Select [Release Select Lock] in the menu.

2-82
 2.Project

Notes

• This is a function which returns all objects and figures to which Select Lock was app
lied within the screen to the state where you can select again. Select [Edit] ▶ [Rele
ase All Selection Lock] in the toolbar.

• Click the Lock icon on the right in the Data Element window to select and release t
he Lock function.

• You cannot apply the Select Lock or Release Select Lock function for an individual o
bject in grouped objects. To apply the corresponding function to an individual object,
ungroup and use it.

2-83
 2.Project

MultiCopy
You can continue to copy an object with the same property for creating it.

1. Select multiple objects.

Notes

You can copy and paste with other objects at the same time.

2. Select [Edit] ▶ [MultiCopy] in the toolbar.

3. Specify the options you want as follows:

2-84
 2.Project

Items Description
Copy No. Set the number of a new object to copy and paste into the X axis and Y
axis. The maximum number of X column and Y column cannot exceed
the area displayed on the screen. [TOOL] ► [Options] ► [Edit Options]

Space You can set the horizontal/vertical spacing between objects.

Copy Direction Set the direction of a new object to copy and paste.

Caption Copy - Do Not Copy: An object is copied, but only address is copied without a
text used.
- Copy: The address of an object increases by the [Increase address]
value, and a text is copied without increase.
- Multi Copy: A text can be copied by the increment value as well. For
example, this function operates as below:
 If the text of an object you selected currently is a direct text:
Create and copy a text, which has increased by [Increment
value] in an entered text.
(Example: If the text is “bit 1” and [increment value] is 1, create
a text with “bit 2” and “bit 3” in sequence for copying.)
 If the text of an object you selected currently is a text table:
Increase and copy the selected text number by [Increment
value].
(Example: Select the text number 1, and if [Increment value] is
1, increase the number by 2, 3, 4… and copy it.)

Comment Copy Copy a comment of an object.

Offset Increase an address automatically by the number you set.

Apply All Apply Increase address to all new objects to be pasted.

Address You can apply the number of address increment differently by device.
increment one To paste to another address, set the address increment manually.
by one

2-85
 2.Project

4. Select [OK] to finish setting.

Notes

 If the number of X and Y you entered exceeds the maximum device count that can be increased, the
objects that exceed the range are not copied to the screen.
 For MultiCopy to a tagged object, it cannot be copied.

Alignment
You can arrange objects on the base screen or change the drawing order. The last object created is
displayed at the top.

Aligning objects:

1. Select multiple objects on the base screen.

2. Right-click.
3. Select [Align] ▶ alignment option in the menu.

2-86
 2.Project

Notes

 Upon aligning, there shall be more than two objects and figures to be aligned. If the object
was set to group before using the Align function, use it after ungrouping it.
 You can center every object on the screen. Select an object to align and select [Edit] ▶
[Align Center] ▶ [Horizontal] or [Vertical].

Changing the drawing order:

1. Right-click and select an object.

2. Select [Order] ▶ order option.

• The object order is changed.

2-87
 2.Project

Rotate or Flip
Rotate or flip an object in the desired direction.

Rotating an object:

1. Right-click to select an object.

2. Select [Rotate or Flip] ▶ rotate or flip option.

• The object is rotated or flipped symmetrically.

Object types Whether rotating and flipping

Switch (5 types) Both image and caption are rotated.
However, the caption is not symmetrical.

Lamp (3 types) Both image and caption are rotated.

However, the caption is not symmetrical.

Clock Both image and time are rotated.

However, the time is not symmetrical.

Message object (2 Both background image and message are rotated.

types) However, the message is not symmetrical.

Text and number Both background image and number are rotated.

2-88
 2.Project

Object types Whether rotating and flipping

objects However, the number text is not symmetrical.

Part, window object Part and window object do not support the Rotate or Flip function.

Animation object Animation object does not support the Rotate or Flip function.

Graph object (9 types) Only the background image is rotated, and the Rotate or Flip function
is not supported for the movement direction of the filling direction
trend.
As shown below, only the background image is rotated, and the
progression directions of the scale and trend are not changed.

View history alarm This does not support the Rotate or Flip function.

2-89
 2.Project

Changing position and scale

You can change the scale of a figure and an object or move it a specific position.

Changing scale or position:

1. Right-click to select an object.

2. Select [Position/Scale Change] in the menu.

3. Set a value of a new position or scale. You can move an object or rescale it precisely.

Notes

 Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move an object by one pixel.
 To increase or decrease the size of an object by one pixel, use the arrow keys on the
keyboard while holding down the Shift key.

2-90
 2.Project

 You can set object position movement and size adjustment to a predetermined value.
Select [TOOL] ▶ [Options] ▶ [Edit Options] from the Toolbar and adjust the Move/Resize
Pixel(X) and Move/Resize Pixel(Y) values.
- To move to a predetermined value, adjust it with the arrow keys on the keyboard while
pressing and holding the Ctrl key.
- To resize to a predetermined value, resize with the arrow keys on the keyboard while
pressing and holding the Ctrl + Shift keys.
• You cannot resize View logging, View data list, and window/part objects because their
sizes are fixed.

4. Select [OK] to finish adjustment.

Resizing multiple objects:

1. Select multiple objects to resize.

2. Select [EDIT] ▶ [Make Same Size] ▶ [Width], [Height], [Both] in the toolbar.

• All objects become the same size.

2-91
 2.Project

Spacing evenly between objects:

1. Select multiple objects.

2. Select [EDIT] ▶ [Space Evenly] ▶ [Across] or [Down] in the toolbar.

• All spacing between objects becomes even.

2-92
 2.Project

View options
You can set the View options as shown in the following table.

Items Description
Screen Thumbnail  You can see all the screens in a project on one screen. Double-click to select
a screen.
 Select [VIEW] ▶ [Screen Thumbnail]

Pan Window  You can view the currently selected screen in the Pan Window and scroll the
screen.
 Select [VIEW] ▶ [Pan Window].

Zoom  You can zoom in or out the current screen.

2-93
 2.Project

Items Description
 Click the magnifier icon in the toolbar. You can enter the zoom magnification
directly or select an already assigned zoom magnification in the drop-down
menu.

Property Information  This is a window that allows an user to easily check and change the current
Window screen (main, window, sub) information, object or figure property without
opening a dialog.
 Select [VIEW] ▶ [Property Information Window], and then select an object or
a figure.

You can set the following options on the base screen.

Items Description
Show Ruler  You can show or hide the ruler. Select [VIEW] ▶ [Show Ruler].
 The ruler is displayed in unit of pixel.

2-94
 2.Project

Items Description

Grid Setting  You set a grid on the edit screen to move or adjust objects or figure conveniently.
 You can show or hide the grid. Select [VIEW] ▶ [Grid].

 To set a grid color and horizontal/vertical grid spacing, select [VIEW] ▶ [Grid
Setting].

 You can make the grid mark position appear in front of or behind an object or
figure.

 To set Paste to a grid when moving or resizing an object or a figure, select [EDIT]
▶ [Snap to Grid].
 To disable or enable Paste grid function when moving or resizing an object or a
figure, do this while holding down the “Alt” key.

Margin Line  The margin line is a border on the Edit screen.

2-95
 2.Project

Items Description

 To show or hide the margin line, select [VIEW] ▶ [Margin Line].

 To set the size of the margin line, select the Edit option from [TOOL] ▶ [Option].

Auxiliary Line  This is used to place or align figures and objects with the border baseline.

 To show or hide the auxiliary line, select [VIEW] ▶ [Auxiliary Line].

2-96
 2.Project

Items Description
 If you place the mouse cursor over the border of the screen frame on the top and
left side of the screen, the cursor changes to a state where an auxiliary line can be
created.

 To free or unfreeze an auxiliary line, right-click the corresponding line, and then
select [Auxiliary Line] ▶ [Freeze Auxiliary Line] or [Freeze Auxiliary Line].
 To delete an auxiliary line, right-click the corresponding line, and then select
[Auxiliary Line] ▶ [Remove Auxiliary Line].

 To paste the object to an auxiliary line, select [Edit] ▶ [Paste to Auxiliary Line].
 To enable or disable the Paste to Auxiliary Line while moving or resizing an object
and a figure, do so while pressing and holding the Alt key.

Show Guide  When you move and resize an object on the screen, a guide line is displayed so
Line that you can align it with other objects.
 To show or hide the guide line, select [VIEW] ▶ [Show Guide].

Object ID  Every object has a unique ID.

2-97
 2.Project

Items Description

 To show or hide an ID, select [VIEW] ▶ [Object ID].

 You can check the object type by the object ID. For example, an ID starting with
“SD” is a word switch.

Object Address  To view the object address, select [VIEW] ▶ [Object Address].

Object On/Off  Before you download the corresponding project to XGT Panel, you can check the
status when a bit or word object is on/off in advance.

 To view the On/Off status, select [VIEW] ▶ [Object On/Off].

 <Bit Device>

• <Word Device>

Data Element  Data Element Window shows the object types, ID, position, and lock status. You
Window can select the items in the Data Element Window to copy, cut, and paste them.
You can click the Lock icon on the right for Select Lock or Release Select Lock.
 To open the Data Element Window, select [VIEW] ▶[Data Element Window].

2-98
 2.Project

Items Description

 For the grouped objects, the position displayed as a group in the Type is displayed
in the maximum rectangular coordinates of all grouped objects.

2-99
 2.Project

Set as base figure/object

This is a function with which a user can set the property of frequently or commonly used figures/objects
as defaults, and then create the corresponding property. For example, you can set as follows:

1. Register an object or a figure on the screen.

2. Set the property which a user uses frequently.

3. Set as base figure/object.

2-100
 2.Project

A bit switch created afterwards has the same property as the one set by the user.

Delete an object & figure

To delete one object or multiple objects, select the corresponding object and press the Delete key on the
keyboard.

Or, right-click to select an object and select [Delete] in the menu.

2-101
 2.Project

Undo Add Shape & Redo Add Shape

To undo, select [EDIT] ▶ [Undo Add Shape] in the Toolbar menu or press Ctrl+Z on the keyboard.

Undo the most recent changes.

To redo, select [EDIT] ▶ [Redo Add Shape] or press Ctrl+Y on the keyboard.

2-102
 2.Project

Object & figure text format

You can change the text property of one object or several objects at once.

The text formats that can be changed are as follows.

Notes

 For 5 types of switches and bit lamp, all text property corresponding to On/Off are applied.
 For word lamp/N-phase lamp, all text property corresponding to the number of registered
state/conditional statements are applied.
 For clock/view history alarm/view logging/, they are applied for the property of text items. However,
since the corresponding object does not have [Vertical Alignment], the corresponding property are not
reflected.
 The text property set in [Conditional Statement] are not applied. While the text properties are applied to
text format, and conditional statement properties are not applied. For example, for numeric
display/numeric input/text display/text input, they are applied only to the property of a text item.
 For bit messages/word messages, only font size and alignment are applied. However, if [Change
property selected in the text table] is set, the items set in the corresponding Toolbar are applied.

Object & figure text format

Layers can simplify complex process screen work into individual object processes by using the layer
display/hide function. The contents of the process screen can be distributed in up to 7 layers. By default,
all layers are visible and the active layer is layer 0. Objects are always added to the active layer, and you
can change the object's assignment to the layer using the pop-up menu. The set layer number of each
object can be checked through the [Data element window] window. If you need to move multiple objects
from different layers to a common layer, this can be done quickly using multi-selection. Objects assigned
to the layer can be shown/hidden using the layer palette.

2-103
 2.Project

2.3.6 Creating Tab Group

You can divide the base screen of a new tab group vertically or horizontally to create a tab group. You
can edit while viewing several screens at the same time. You can divide the screen into several tab
groups to edit the screen while viewing the screen between the tab groups at the same time, and you
can drag the screen freely between tab groups to move the screen.
Right-click one tab of several screens in the project to select [New Horizontal Tab Group] or [New
Vertical Tab Group].

You can group tabs or sort orders. You can move the screen freely in the tabs of the same group.

2-104
 2.Project

Notes

 You can use the drag-and-drop function of object in the Screen tab group. You can drag an object
between tab screens to copy and paste it.
 You can drag a screen tab to move it to different group, or right-click to use the options menu to edit or
arrange it.

2-105
 2.Project

2.3.7 Exporting/Installing Font

If you want to use a LXP-Designer project which uses a special font on other PC, a font error may occur.
In this case, you can install the font you are using on your PC to solve the problem.
Exporting/Installing Font:

1. Select [TOOL] ▶ [Export Font].

2. Select the path and folder to save the font.

3. Select [TOOL] ▶ [Install Font].

4. Select the path and folder to save the font.

2-106
 2.Project

2.3.8 Exporting/Importing Screen

The Export/Import Screen function is a function with which you can save the screen as a file and import it
from other project or LXP-Designer of another PC. In general, the difference from the function to add and
import the objects within a screen to the object library is that you can save the Export/Import Screen
functions and import them along with user images, text tables, and tag elements that are being used on
the screen.

The screen export procedure is as follows:

1. Select a screen to export in the screen window, right-click to select [Export].

2. If the file dialog shows up, select a folder for saving, enter a file name, and select [Save].
 If you export a screen, it is exported together with the following elements.
Items Description
Screen Data  All objects and figure in the screen

Text Table  Text table used by an object in the screen

Tag  Tag used by an object in the screen

User Image  User image used by an objects and a figure in the screen

2-107
 2.Project

Notes

• When exporting the screen, the file extension is ‘.XSCR’.

The following is how to import a screen:

1. Select the screen, and then right-click and select [Import].

2. When the [Import Screen] dialog appears as shown below, select the file to import.
3. Then, a list of screens in the file to import currently appears in the preview on the left.

4. Select the screen to add from the list on the left and then select [Add].

2-108
 2.Project

5. Then, the added screen is displayed on the right grid as shown below.

6. Change the screen number, name, tag/text table to a value you want.

2-109
 2.Project

7. If you select [OK], you can check that the selected screen and text table and tag related to the screen
are added into the project.

Notes

 When the same screen number exists on the screen or there are more than two same screen
numbers on the grid, the following message is displayed.

 You can drag the reference row on the grid to copy the (AutoFill) screen information. At this
time, the screen number increases by 1 when dragging downward based on the value of the
reference row, and decreases by 1 when dragging upward.

2-110
 2.Project

Import Screen Dialog Box

The following is the description of the Import Screen dialog box.

Items Description
Select File Select a file (.xscr) to import.

Screen Preview A list of screens, which exists in the selected file, appears.

Add If you select the screen you want to add to the project and click the “Add”
button, the screen information is added to the right grid screen.

List Mode If you check the List Mode, the Screen Preview mode is canceled and the
screen information is displayed in text.

Screen Number This displays the screen number information of a screen added via [Add]
button. You can edit this and enter it from 1 to 65534.

Screen Name This displays the screen name information of a screen added via [Add] button.
This can be edited.

Screen Type This displays the screen type information of a screen added through the [Add]
button. This cannot be edited.

Screen Change This is an option to change the screen number of the screen change switch on
Offset the corresponding screen when adding a project. The valid range is from 0 to
65534. This can be edited.

OK If you click [OK] button, the screen displayed on the grid as project is added to
the current project.

Cancel If you press [Cancel] button, no action occurs in the current project.

2-111
 2.Project

Screen Import Options Dialog Box:

Items Description
Tag Name This is an option for handling when a tag with the same tag name on the
Duplicated screen to add already exists in the project. There are 3 options, [Overwrite],
[Skip], and [Create], and default is [Overwrite].

Image This is an option for handling when a user image with the same category and
Category/Name name as the user image on the screen to be added already exists in the
Duplicated project There are 3 options, [Overwrite], [Skip], and [Create], and default is
[Overwrite].

TextTable Name This is an option for handling when the text table name and number on the
Duplicated screen to add are the same as those that already exist in the project. There
are 3 options, [Overwrite], [Skip], and [Create], and default is [Overwrite]. If an
item where the keyword has been edited and the text become different, a new
one is added.

Object/Figure on This is an option for whether to adjust the an object and a figure on the
Different Screen screen to fit the current project or keep the originals if the resolution of a
Resolution screen to add and the resolution of the current project are different. There are
two options, [Scale] and [Skip], and the default is [Scale].

Import Default Path Select a file to import from the default path.

2-112
 2.Project

Items Description

Replace Tag/Text Table Dialog Box:

Items Description
Tag  If you set a part of the tag name text as the replace text in the exported project when
importing a screen, it is changed to the corresponding text. The following is an example
of replacing a tag. Display a text to change in the tag is between '#' and '#'. Register an
object using the corresponding tag in the screen and export it.
[Setting in the project to export]

2-113
 2.Project

Items Description
 If you enter a text to replace as ‘Basic’, the result is as follows after importing a screen
from a new project. You can check that '#LOC#' has been replaced with 'Basic'. If the
same group name and number exist, they are added and created newly.

• [Import results]

Text If you set a part of the text table text as the replace text in the exported project when
Table importing a screen, it is changed to the corresponding text. The following is an example of
replacing a text table. Create a text table and display a text to change between '#' and '#'.
Register an object using the corresponding text table in the screen and export it.
[Setting in the project to export]

• If you enter a text to replace as ‘01’, the result is as follows after importing a screen from
a new project. You can check that '#NO#’has been replaced with 'Basic'. If the same text
table name and number exist, they are added and created newly.

[Import results]

2-114
 2.Project

2.3.9 Project Print

You can save detailed project information as a document in Excel format.
Save project information in an Excel file:

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Project Print].

2. Select Print item on the Item tab.

2-115
 2.Project

Notes

• You can rearrange the order of selected print items.

• Even if Excel is not installed, they are saved in the Excel format.
• When you check the Open item in Excel if Excel is installed, a document in Excel format
opens automatically.
• In an environment where Excel is not installed, a folder, in which documents in Excel
format are included, opens.

3. Specify the options of the header or footer on the Header/Footer tab and select [OK].

 The selected project data opens automatically on the PC screen in Excel format.

2-116
 2.Project

2-117
 2.Project

2.3.10 Rename tag and add it as a new tag

This is a function to rename the tags that exist on the screen, and add them to the tag list.
Procedure to rename tag and register it as a new tag:

1. Place an object on the screen, register a tag named ‘TagOld’, and connect it with a specific device
within the object.

2. Select [TOOL] ▶ [Replace Tag Name and Register as a New Tag]

3. Enter the text within the tag to find and the text within the tag to replace in the Dialog which showed
up.

2-118
 2.Project

Notes

• The added tag is registered in the same group as the tag searched by default. If yo
u want to add a tag to a specific group, select a new group or enter a new group n
ame.
• The area to find and replace a tag is checked as All by default. If you want to limit
the area, click the area to change and specify the area again.
• A text within the tag to replace shall be a valid text. If there is no name, the first let
ter is a number, or the name includes control characters or device addresses, the fol
lowing message is displayed.

• If the text to replace already exists in the tag, the following message shows up, and
if you select ‘Yes’, replace the tag within the screen with the existing tag. And, If yo
u select ‘No’, stop replacement. However, even if the name is the same when chang
ing it, when the device type is different, skip the corresponding tag without changing
the name.

4. If you select [OK], ‘TagNew’ is registered on the tag screen, and the tag name of the object is
changed from ‘TagOld’ to ‘TagNew’.

2-119
 2.Project

2.3.11 Print
This is a function that you can print the contents of the screen.

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Print].

2. Select the print on the Print screen, and then select [OK].

3. The figure below shows the result of selecting and [Microsoft Print to PDF] item and outputting to the
printer. The base screen, window screen, sub screen, and HDMI screen created in the project are all

2-120
 2.Project

outputted. If the screen size is larger than the print paper size, it is adjusted to fit the paper size and
printed.

4. If you set the orientation to landscape on the Print screen, it is output in landscape format.

2-121
2.Project

2-122
 2.Project

2.3.12 Print Preview

This is a function to preview the print layout of the screen contents.

1. Select [PROJECT] ▶ [Print Preview].

2. The print preview screen is displayed. The base screen, window screen, sub screen, and HDMI
screen created in the project are all displayed. If the screen size is larger than the print paper size, it
is adjusted to fit the paper size and displayed.

2-123
 2.Project

3. If you set the orientation to landscape in [Print Setting], the preview screen is displayed in landscape
format.

4. If you select [Print] button, the screen is outputted to the printer with the same screen setting as the
[Print] function.

2-124
 2.Project

2.4 Library Management

2.4.1 Graphic library management

Various images have been registered in the graphic library by type, so they can be used as screen
background and object image in various ways. The library is divided into system graphic library and user
graphic library. A user can set the property for frequently used objects and register them with the object
library so that he or she can edit objects.

Items Details

System Graphic The system graphic library provides about 8,000 images in 40 categories, and a
Library user cannot edit them arbitrarily. Depending on XGT Panel model, you can select
256-color raster images or 65,535-color vector images. The following table
describes raster and vector images.
Items Description

Raster It is expressed in pixels of bit image.

The image is distorted when zooming in and out.
When used as the background image of an object, you
cannot change the color or pattern.

Vector It is expressed by a connected line.

The image remains the same when zooming in and out.
Do not use a vector image as background image of an
object. If you use a lot of vector images, the operation
speed of XGT Panel may be reduced.

User Graphic A user can register, edit, or delete an image arbitrarily. The image is not saved in
Library the graphic library, but in the project you are using. You can import or export the
user graphic library of another project from the project you are using now.

To open the Graphic Library window, select [VIEW] ▶ [Graphic Library Window] to open the Graphic
Library window as shown in the following figure.

2-125
 2.Project

Drag the image selected in the Graphic Library window to the Edit screen to create it.

Notes

 If you place the mouse cursor over an image in the Graphic Library, the information about the name
and size is displayed at the same time the corresponding enlarged image is displayed (maximum 320
x 320 px).

2-126
 2.Project

 You can find an image easily via the drop-down filter search at the top of the Graphic Library window.
You can set image color, image type, color type (256 or 65,536), On/Off status image, image shape
and so on in the image category and sub-category.

 You can select a zoom factor from the drop-down list to zoom out or zoom in the image.
 There are two types of images: vector and raster. A vector image remains as it is even when it is
resized. If you zoom out and zoom in a raster image, the image can be distorted.
 The vector image is classified into Vector 1 and Vector 2. Vector1 is a vector image provided by XP-
Builder (old version), and Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.
 An image created by dragging on the Edit screen has a default size, but you can change this size.

2-127
 2.Project

Creating user graphic library

A user can create an image in the graphic library.

Creating a library:

1. Select the User tab in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Enter a library name and select the icon. If you enter the name of the category and then check,
a new image category is created.

3. Right-click the Graphic Library Window to select [Insert Image] or icon.

2-128
 2.Project

4. Select an image file in the Windows navigation window, then select [Open] from the menu.

 The image is added to the new graphic library.

Notes

 To delete an image, right-click to select an image, and then select [Delete Image] from the menu.

2-129
 2.Project

 To delete all pictures in the current category, right-click on an empty space in the Graphic Library
Window and select [Delete All Images] from the menu.

2-130
 2.Project

Notes

Adding to the figure library:

1. Right-click and select the shape to save.
2. Select [Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library].

An image in the EMF format is added to the library.

2-131
 2.Project

Exporting user graphic library

You can share a library between projects. Export a library a user creates, and then you can use it in
another project.

Exporting from graphic library:

1. Select the User tab in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Select a library to export from the drop-down list and then select the icon.

3. Enter a file name and set a path of the file.

4. Select [Save].

Notes

 The library you export is saved as a file with a '.xpg' extension.

 You can right-click an empty space in the Graphic Library Window to export the corresponding
library.

2-132
 2.Project

2-133
 2.Project

Importing user graphic library

You can import a new library into the project or only import images to an existing user graphic library.

Importing a new library:

1. Select the User tab in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Select the icon.

3. Select the file with the '.xpg' extension and then select [Open].

 A new library is added to the graphic library list.

2-134
 2.Project

Importing an image into the library:

1. Select the name of the user Graphic Library in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Right-click an empty space in the Graphic Library Window to select [Insert Image] or icon in the
menu.

3. Select an image file in the Windows navigation window, then select [Open]. The selected image is
added to the library.

Notes

• If there is already the same file name in the Graphic Library, a pop-up window asking for a new name
is displayed. Enter another new name and select OK.

2-135
 2.Project

Editing user graphic library

Renaming a library:

1. Select a library from the drop-down list.

2. Enter a name to change in the window, which shows up after selecting the icon, and click OK.

 The library is renamed from “Library_001” to “Library_001A.”

Notes

 User graphic library names are arranged in an ascending order.

 You cannot change the system graphic library name.
 BMP, JPEG, GIF, EMF, SVG, TGA, PNG, TIF, ICO and PCX image types are supported.
 MS PowerPoint image format (.EMF) is supported and you can paste the clipboard.

2-136
 2.Project

 The list number of the user graphic library can create 2047 categories from 2094 to 4095. If the limit
number of categories is exceeded, an error message is displayed as follows:

 You can have 500 images per category. If the limit number of images within a category is exceeded,
an error message is displayed as follows:

2-137
 2.Project

Deleting a library:

1. Select the User tab in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Select a library from the drop-down list and then select the icon.

2-138
 2.Project

Applying options to an image

There are several options, such as applying a transparent color which you can use when editing an
image, and saving an image in the WMF format to maintain the resolution even when you zoom in the
image.

You can right-click an image you want to change to set the following options.

Items Description
As Background Set the background image for the current screen.
Image
Setting the background image:
1 Select a category from the graphic library.
2 Select an image with right-click, and then select [As Background Image] in
the menu.

See the next section for details on the background image.

<2.3.2.4 Change screen property>

Deleting the background image:

1 Right-click the background image, which is currently set.

2-139
 2.Project

Items Description

2 Select [Screen property] ▶ [Background].

3 Disable the Use background image setting.

Delete Image Delete an image in the Graphic Library.

Rename Change the image name.

Replace image Replace an image, which exist already, with a new image file specified by a user.

Save As File Save an image with a different file name.

Apply To apply a transparent color image, proceed as follows:

Transparent
Color Setting to apply transparent color:
1 Open a picture file you want to use in Paint. Change the part you want to
appear transparent in the picture to RGB(255, 0, 255) using the Fill function
and save it.

2-140
 2.Project

Items Description

2 Register the corresponding image in the Graphic Library.

3 Right-click to select the corresponding image and select [Apply Transparent
Color].

4 Register the image on the screen and check whether the part to which
RGB(255,0,255) is applied appears transparent.

Select In order to apply transparent to a specific color of an already created image,

Transparent proceed as follows:
Color
Applying transparent to an already registered image:
1 Right-click to select an image, and select [Select Transparent Color].

2-141
 2.Project

Items Description

2 If you select a position where you want to apply the transparent color and
press OK, the RGB value is changed to the transparent color.

Image dithering You can change the color image value to a 256 color image to reduce the file size.
with 256 colors
Image dithering with 256 colors:
1 Add a picture to your user image library.

2 Right-click to select [Image dithering with 256 colors].

2-142
 2.Project

Items Description
3 Select [OK]. After an image is dithered, it cannot be restored to the original
image.
Notes

 After an image is dithered only once, it cannot be restored to the

original image.

Notes

 The default value of the transparent color is RGB(255, 0, 255).

 The transparent color setting is not the default option.
 You can select several images at the same time to apply the transparent color. However, if the
property are not the same or if an image with WMF or its own transparent color is selected, Apply
Transparent Color menu is disabled.
 The image dithering function is available only for XGT Panel color model project, and TGA and JPG
images are converted to BMP after dithering and saved.
 The image dithering function replaces the palette with 256 colors to reduce the image capacity and
color.

2-143
 2.Project

2.4.2 Object library management

This section describes how to use the object library. You can use both the system object library and the
user object library, but you can edit only the user object library such as adding an object. For details on
adding an edited object, refer to the next section. <2.3.4.4 Creating an object from the object
library>, <2.3.5 Edit object>

Items Description
System object library The library consists of 7 categories: Alarm and Logging, Keypad, Lamp,
Pushdown_Switch, Rotary_Switch, Slide_Switch, and Toggle_Switch. A
system object cannot be edited.

User Graphic Library An object can be registered or deleted. An object is not saved in the object
library but in the project in use. You can import or export the user object
library of another project from the project currently in use.

To open the Object Library window, select [VIEW] ▶ [Object Library Window] in the toolbar menu. The
Object Library window appears as follows:

Notes

 You can find an object easily via the drop-down filter search at the top of the Object Library window.
Select an object category you want to view.

 You can select a zoom factor from the drop-down list to zoom out or zoom in the image.

2-144
 2.Project

 If you place the mouse cursor over an image in the object library, the corresponding enlarged detail
image and object information is displayed.

 To change the object property, double-click the created object or select the object and press Enter on
the keyboard or right-click to select [Object property] in the menu.
 An object created by dragging on the Edit screen has a default size, but you can change this size.

2-145
 2.Project

Creating user object library

Creating a user library:

1. Select the User tab in the Object Library Window.

2. If you enter a category name and select the icon, a new object category is created.

3. Drag an object from the Edit screen and drag it to the Object Library Window. You can register
multiple objects or figures as one object.

4. You can right-click to select an object, and then select [Rename] to rename the object.

2-146
 2.Project

Notes

To delete an object, right-click and select [Delete] from the menu. To delete all objects, right-click an
empty space in the Object Library Window and select [Delete All Objects].

2-147
 2.Project

Exporting user object library

Exporting a user-created library from user object library:

1. Select the User tab in the Object Library Window.

2. Select a library to export from the drop-down list and then select the icon.

3. Enter a file name and set a path of the file.

4. Select [Save].
Notes

 The library you export is saved as a file with a '.xpo' extension.

 You can right-click an empty space in the Object Library Window to export the corresponding library.

2-148
 2.Project

2-149
 2.Project

Importing user object library

You can import a new library into the project or only import objects to an existing user object library.

Importing a new library:

1. Select the User tab in the Object Library Window.

2. Select the icon.

3. Select the file with the '.xpo' extension and then select [Open].

 A new library is added to the object library list.

2-150
 2.Project

Importing an object into the library:

1. Select the name of the Object Library in the Object Library Window.
2. Right-click an empty space in the Object Library Window to select [Import] in the menu.

3. Select the file with the ‘.xpo’ extension and then select [Open]. The library file selected within the
library is added.

Notes

 The list number of the user graphic library can create 57343 categories from 8193 to 65535. If the limit
number of categories is exceeded, an error message is displayed as follows:

 You can have 500 images per category. If the limit number of images within a category is exceeded,
an error message is displayed.
 The user object libraries and object names in the libraries are sorted in an ascending order.

2-151
 2.Project

Editing user object library

Renaming a library:

1. Select a library from the drop-down list.

2. Enter a new name and select the icon to save it.

 The name is changed from object library “object08195” to “Library_002.”

2-152
 2.Project

Deleting a library:

1. Select the User tab in the Graphic Library Window.

2. Select Live from the drop-down list and then select the icon.

2-153
 2.Project

2.5 Controller Connection Settings

To set XGT Panel and controller, set them in the project property menu and connection property menu to
the Project Properties menu. To connect a controller to XGT Panel, you can connect it by Ethernet or
serial method. There are RS-232C, RS-485, and RS-422 for serial connection methods. This section
describes the communication connection method. For details on XGT Panel setting, refer to the next
section. <2.2.2.2 XGT Panel Settings>

2.5.1 Ethernet connection

Connect XGT Panel and the controller with an Ethernet cable.

Setting Ethernet:

1. Select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [XGT Panel Settings] in the Toolbar menu.

2. Select XGT Panel series and model type.

2-154
 2.Project

3. In the Controller Settings, select a maker and a controller product you want to connect with XGT
Panel. Select the product marked with Ethernet in the product name.

4. Select Ethernet for the connection method.

5. Enter the IP in the detailed connection settings and select [OK].

6. Finish additional connection setting in the Connection Property, and select [OK].

2-155
 2.Project

2.5.2 Serial port connection

Connect XGT Panel and the controller through the serial port. You can select RS-232C, RS-485, and
RS-422.

RS-232C connection

1. Select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [XGT Panel Settings] in the Toolbar menu.

2. Select XGT Panel series and model type.

3. In the Controller Settings, select a maker and a controller product you want to connect with XGT
Panel. Select the product marked with LINK in the product name.

2-156
 2.Project

4. Select RS-232C for Protocol.

5. Set the serial in Detail Settings and select [OK].

2-157
 2.Project

Notes

 The baud rate set in the controller shall be the same as the setting in XGT Panel. To set
the baud rate in XGT Panel, touch [Controller Setting] ▶ [Communication Setting] in the
main menu.
 The corresponding station number is that of the controller to be connected. When you
enter the HMI station number, this is applicable only when setting RS-485 N:1
communication.

6. Finish additional connection setting, and select [OK].

2-158
 2.Project

RS-485/RS-422 connection

1. Select [Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [XGT Panel Settings] in the Toolbar menu.

2. Select XGT Panel series and model type.

3. In the Controller Settings, select a maker and a controller product you want to connect with XGT
Panel. Select the product marked with LINK in the product name.

2-159
 2.Project

4. Select RS485 or RS422 for Protocol.

5. Select Detail Settings, finish the setting, and click [OK].

2-160
 2.Project

Notes

 The baud rate set in the controller shall be the same as the setting in XGT Panel. To set
the baud rate in XGT Panel, touch [Controller Setting] ▶ [Communication Setting] in the
main menu.
 The corresponding station number is that of the controller to be connected. When you
enter the HMI station number, this is applicable only when setting RS-485 N:1
communication.

6. Finish additional connection setting, and select [OK].

2-161
 2.Project

2.6 Simulation & debugging

Before you transfer the edited data on the screen of LXP-Designer editor to XGT Panel, you can perform
a simulation test on the PC and check its operation. In LXP-Designer, you can debug a project with
various functions such as data check, device map, and script cross-reference, including simulation
function.

2.6.1 Simulation configuration

Before you transfer the edited data on the screen of LXP-Designer editor to XGT Panel, you can perform
a simulation test on the PC and check its operation. The simulation function is capable of preventing an
invalid action in advance.

Running a simulation:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Simulation] in the Toolbar menu.

Notes

 The resolution of the simulation window is expressed the same as the resolution in the
actual XGT Panel except for LXP-Designer Toolbar menu and Title.

2-162
 2.Project

 The simulation function is capable of running only one screen. While the simulation is
running, you cannot run the simulation of other screen.
 The size of the simulation window is different depending on the screen size of XGT Panel.
 You can move the mouse while clicking the corner of the simulation window, but the
resolution is maintained. Therefore, a margin can be created on the screen depending on
the situation.

 A simulator is not supported for OPC UA Client and OMRON NX/NJ Ethernet/IP.

2. You can execute the actions of objects displayed on the simulation screen for checking. This is an
example where you enter a random value through the monitoring of the device in the simulation to
check an action.

2-163
 2.Project

2.6.2 Start device monitoring

Describes how to check the process by creating simulation data and changing a value.

Device monitoring
You can create sample data using the simulation to monitor and operate a device.

1. Drag the mouse down while pressing and holding the top of the simulator for about 1 second.

2. The simulator menu bar shows up and select [Device Monitor].

 The simulation data is displayed on the Device Monitor Window.

2-164
 2.Project

Items List
Prev. Next Using the Prev and Next buttons, you can monitor objects when specifying
the screen number you want to monitor in the screen number combo box.
However, you cannot monitor the Common Device data.

User Device List (User) You can enter a device value directly to simulate a project.
You can add or delete a device to monitor using the Add or Del button.

Common Device List A list of common data such as history alarm, recipe, flow alarm is
(Common) displayed.

Screen Device List An object that can be edited is displayed among the objects on the base
(Screen) screen.

Connection PLC Type The set controller type is displayed. When monitoring the built-in device, it
(Controller) is displayed as INTERNAL MEMORY.

Device Type The set device type is displayed as follows:

- Bit: BIT
- 16 bits (word): INT16, UINT16

2-165
 2.Project

Items List
- 32 bits (double-word): INT32, UINT32, FLOAT

Display Type You can change the display format of the set device. Select the display
type box of a device to monitor to select the display type to change from
the list of pop-up windows.

Device Address The set device address is displayed.

Device Value The currently set device value is displayed. You can select the device
value box to change it to a value you want.

Notes

You can resize the Controller, Tag, Address, Device Type, Display Type, and Value columns of the
device monitor using the boundary between each column.

2-166
 2.Project

Changing device value

Set device information or value on the device list. If you click the place that corresponds to [Value], you
can set the bit device to On or Off. If you double-click the place corresponding to [Value] in the Word
Device, you can enter a value directly. Whenever you change a value, it is immediately applied to the
simulation.

2-167
 2.Project

2.6.3 Run Data Check

The data check function enables checking an error and points to its location before transferring the error
a project to XGT Panel for modification. You can check number of erased images, tags, number of
display, address of existing device, specific error, etc. Refer to the next section for details on a message
displayed when running Verify data. <3. Error and warning code and message>

To run Verify data, select [TOOL] ► [Data check] in the Toolbar menu. The number of errors that
occurred and their descriptions are displayed in the output window.

Notes

If you double-click the error message displayed on the output window with the mouse, it will go to the
corresponding error location so that you can edit it with ease. For details, refer to the next section.
<3.1 Error code displayed in the result window>

2-168
 2.Project

2.6.4 View device map

The device map shows the location of a device with device address or tag name within a project.

Viewing device map:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Device Map Information Window] in the toolbar menu.

2. Select the device type (bit or word) in the drop-down list.

3. Enter a device address directly or select the keypad icon on the right to select a device address.

2-169
 2.Project

Items Description
a. Device Type Set the device type to search
(bit or word).

b. Device Address Enter a device address you want to search and press the Enter
key.

c. Device Map The device address in use is displayed.

d. Device Reference The currently selected device and location are displayed.

e. Address/Tag Tab Displays the information with a device address or a tag.

f. Tag List Each device registered with a tag is displayed.

2-170
 2.Project

2.6.5 Memory usage status

When the project file is transmitted to XGT Panel, it is saved and transmitted in the .hmi file format.
Since the size of the HMI file shall not exceed the limited capacity provided by XGT Panel, it is important
to know the HMI file size of the current project and the size of each component.

Checking the project capacity:

1. Create a project. Refer to <2. Project> .

2. Select [TOOL] ► [Memory Statistics] in the Toolbar menu. The memory size displayed in each item
includes the entire screen and common data of a project.

Notes

 The screen memory usage does not include an image, only figure and object information is
displayed in the usage. The images and font show the overall usage of a project. If an image is
duplicated on several screens, only one image information is transmitted to XGT Panel.
 If the memory usage of image, project, sound, recipe data and so on is large, you can specify it to
be saved in the external storage connected to XGT Panel.
 The additional information includes the size of the communication driver module.

2-171
 2.Project

2.6.6 Finding & replacing device

This is a function that allows you to find the addresses of objects used in a project or change them to
new device addresses in the objects as needed.

Finding & replacing device in screen

Finding or replacing device in screen:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find in Active Screen] in the toolbar menu. An object address is displayed in the
Find Device window.

2. Select [Find Next] to find an object with the same device address.
3. To change the device address, select [Replace]. The device you want to replace is displayed.

4. You can enter a new address in the item of the device you want to replace or click the right keypad
icon to specify a device address.

5. Enter a new device address and select [Close].

2-172
 2.Project

Notes

 You can select [TOOL] ► [Replace in Active Screen] in the Toolbar menu to immediately run in
Change Device Address mode as well.
 If you check Find all address/tag directly in addition to the method to enter an address directly and
the method to enter a tag in the method to find/replace a device, you can directly find or replace all
devices entered with an address and a tag.
 If you use Device Count option, you can find or replace all addresses within the input range, starting
from the address you want to find or replace. The default is set to 1; in this case, find one device
address.

Finding and replacing all devices

Finding all devices in use for a specific object:

1. Click the object you selected, an then select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Device] in the toolbar
menu. The device address of the selected object is displayed in the Find All window.

2. Click the Device Type and enter the device address to find in Find what. By default, find it within the
entire project range.

2-173
 2.Project

 If you select [Find All], the search results are displayed in the Output/Find Result List. If you
double-click an object item to check, you can view the corresponding object.

2-174
 2.Project

Replacing all objects within the device address range:

1. Click the object you selected, an then select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Device] in the toolbar
menu. The address of the selected object is displayed in the Find All window.

2. Select [Replace].
3. Enter the original device address in device item to find and enter a new device address in device item
to replace.

4. Select [Replace All].

5. Select [Yes] to execute the replacement. The changed device address is displayed in the Output
window.

Notes

To change an address within the range, set Device count. The device address is changed within the
specified range. For example, if the input device is P0 and the device count is set to 7, 7 devices
including P0 are changed starting from P0.

2-175
 2.Project

Finding and replacing all fonts

Finding all fonts used in a project:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Font] in the menu. The Find/Replace Font window opens.

2. Select the font you want to find in the drop-down menu. Basically, it finds in the entire project.

3. If you select [Find All], the search results are displayed in the Output/Find Result List. If you double-
click an object item to check, you can view the corresponding object.

2-176
 2.Project

Replacing all fonts within the search area range:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [Font] in the Toolbar menu. The Find/Replace Font window
opens.

2. Select the fonts you want to find and replace in the drop-down menu.

3. Select [Replace All].

4. Select [Yes] to execute the replacement. The changed device count is displayed in the Output
window.

Finding and replacing all strings

Finding all strings:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [String] in the menu.

2. Enter the string to find. If there is no object selected by default, find it in the entire project. By default,
all strings including a text to find are found, and no description is included.

2-177
 2.Project

3. If you select [Find All], the search results are displayed in the Output/Find Result List. If you double-
click an object item to check, you can view the corresponding object.

Replacing all strings:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find/Replace All] ► [String] in the toolbar menu, and enter the text to find and the
text to replace in the dialog box that appears.

2. Select [Replace All] and select [OK] in the message below to execute the replacement.

2-178
 2.Project

3. The number of changed strings is displayed in the Output window.

Notes

• If you check "In Text Table” in Find and Replace Text, you can find or replace strings in units of text. If
you check "In Text Table Block Unit”, you can find or replace strings in units of text. For example, you
can change the elements of the project, which use “Text Table_01” as shown below, while
maintaining the number in the block with “Text Table_02”.

2-179
 2.Project

Finding and replacing each device font

Finding or replacing the device of a specific item used in the project:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find a Item/Replace] ► [Device] in the toolbar menu.

2. Select a specific item you want to search for in the left window.

3. Select the device before and after change.

4. Enter an address directly or click the right keypad to specify the address to enter.

2-180
 2.Project

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 and select OK when you finish entering.

Notes

• To search the device address of an object you select on the screen, specify the selected object. If
there is an object selected on the screen, the “selected objects” are automatically checked in the
search area.

2-181
 2.Project

Finding or replacing the font of a specific item used in the project:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find a Item/Replace] ► [Font] in the toolbar menu.

2. Select a specific item you want to search for in the left window.
3. Select the device before and after change.
4. Select a font in the drop-down list.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 and select OK when you finish entering.

2-182
 2.Project

Finding or replacing the device of a specific item using a tag in the project:

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find a Item/Replace] ► [Tag Address] in the toolbar menu.

2. Select a specific item you want to search for in the left window.
3. Select ‘After Device’ of an item you want to change.
4. Enter an address directly or click the right keypad to specify the address to enter.

5. When you finish entering, select OK.

Notes

2-183
 2.Project

• An item that does not use a tag can be outputted and can be selected. Unlike the existing
[TOOL] ► [Find a Item/Replace] ► [Device] menu, which shows the item when there is one
item using the same duplicated device value and can be changed, you can edit items that
have the same device in ‘Tag Address’ menu individually.
• When you drag the “After Device” item from top to bottom with the mouse, the devi
ce value is automatically entered as a value which increases by 1 based on the devi
ce value of the first item, whereas you drag from bottom to top, it is entered as a v
alue that decreases by 1.
• If you double-click “Tag”, “Before Device”, and “After Device” in the first row, the ite
ms are arranged in ascending order and descending order each time you double-click
the corresponding value.
• If you double-click the right end of the first line item, the width of the column is adj
usted for the longest text among items belonging to the corresponding column.
• You can change the horizontal/vertical length of the window if you move the window
while pressing the edge of the window with the mouse.

2-184
 2.Project

Viewing cross reference

You can check all information such as device, tag, script and so on used in the project at once by using
cross reference. To use the cross reference, select [TOOL] ► [Cross Reference] in the Toolbar menu,
and then select [Device] or [Font], or [Script]. Device address, tag name, location, object type,
description, and so on are displayed in the Output window. If you double-click a specific row, the screen
and object with the corresponding address are enabled.

Viewing cross reference in active screen

You can check all information such as device, tag, script and so on used in the screen at once by using
cross reference in active screen. To use the cross reference in active screen, select [TOOL] ► [Cross
Reference In Active screen] in the toolbar menu, and then select [Device] or [Font], or [Script]. Device
address, tag name, location, object type, description, and so on are displayed in the Output window. If
you double-click a specific row, the object with the corresponding address in the screen are enabled.

2-185
 2.Project

Viewing cross reference in active screen

1. Select [TOOL] ► [Find Object] in the toolbar menu.

2. 2. In the [Find Object] window, select the search area and object type to find..
3. The search results are displayed in the output window. Double-click the object to check to view the
object.

2.6.7 Moving a screen tab

You can move the project screen with ease using the next screen/previous screen function. If you use
this function, you can switch (move) the screens sequentially. To move the project screen, select [TOOL]
► [Previous Screen/Next Screen] in Toolbar menu. Or, you can click the icon in the toolbar to use the
screen (Next Screen , Previous Screen ).

2-186
 2.Project

2.7 Project management

This describes the function to transmit a project to XGT Panel or an external storage and to receive data
from XGT Panel.

2.7.1 Sending a project

Send a project created in LXP-Designer to XGT Panel. There are two methods of sending: sending the
entire project and sending only the modified part. Basically, LXP-Designer checks the version of the
project and sends the entire project or only the modified part according to the settings. If necessary, you
can force the entire project to be exported as well.

Before sending the project, you shall set the connection method. There are two connection methods:
Ethernet and USB. Depending on a XGT Panel model, the provided connection method may be different.

Sending a project:

1. Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] or select the ( ) download icon in the Toolbar menu.

2. Set the following options:

Items Description
Project data transfer option
Select the Project data transfer option. You can select the
button to change the transfer option.

2-187
 2.Project

Items Description

• :
Set the device and PC connection method to Ethernet. You
can enter the IP of the device to which you transfer the project
data.

• : Set the
device and PC connection method to USB. You can install the
USB driver manually.

• :
Save the project data as a file. You can press the folder shape
button to set the storage path and file name. You can save a
file in an external storage connected to the PC. For details,
refer to the next section.
<2.8.2 Sending to external storage>

Include Designer project file Set whether to include Designer project in project data. Since
(.xpe) the .xpe file shall exist when uploading a project from XGT Panel
to LXP-Designer, check the corresponding option and then
download it to XGT Panel.

Delete All monitoring After the project data is downloaded, delete all monitoring data
data(logging, alarm, recipe) (logging, alarm, recipe) in NVRAM of the device.

Notes

When setting is changed, all monitor data is deleted

regardless of the check.

Close dialog if success If the project transfer to XGT Panel is completed, close the
window. If you do not check the option, keep the window without
closing after sending is completed. If you click the Resend button
while the window is opened, the window is refreshed.

Synchronize Time of Runtime When transferring a project, time of XGT Panel is changed with
with time of PC time of PC.

Force XGT Panel Update When transferring a project, the runtime of XGT Panel is forcibly
updated regardless of the version.

Write Write the project data.

Close Close the Project Transfer window.

2-188
 2.Project

Items Description
Output This refers to data such as recipe, logging, history alarm and so
on which are detailed in NVRAM of XGT Panel. If this option is
set, the device deletes the NVRAM data when the download
starts.

Error List Outputs warning and error result messages after project build.

• Warning : Shows warning items occurred during project build.

• Error:
• Shows the items of errors occurred during project build and
runtime communication.
• if you double-click an error item related to project build, the
focus moves to the item where the error occurred.
• Filtering: Filtering is available in each item. Items other than
Type are filtered based on text.
• Message: Outputs error and warning messages.
• Error number: Outputs error and warning numbers. (Only
items related project build are outputted.)
• Position: Outputs the position where error and warning
occurred. (Only items related project build are outputted.)

Object ID: Outputs the object ID where error and warning

occurred. (Only items related project build are outputted.)

Build File List Outputs a list of files and information of the files. The output
items are as follows:

• File: file name

• Description: description of a file
• Storage: position saved in the device
• File Size: file size (Kb)
• Flash usage: project data size compared to total device
memory capacity (FlashDisk)

2-189
 2.Project

Notes

• Current operation status

Provides a UI which shows the operation progress for performing data writing operation. This
shows icons for the item for current operation in progress, successful operation, and failed
operation.

- : an icon displayed when an operation is in progress

- : an icon displayed when an operation is successful

- : an icon displayed when an operation is failed

Te progress bar is displayed in the progress bar in XP-Runtime update, project build, and project
write steps.

3. You can change the connection method.

2-190
 2.Project

4. Check XGT Panel and PC connection settings, and then select [Write].

5. You can check that the project write operation has been performed normally.

2-191
 2.Project

Notes

• Viewing the storable memory status before downloading a project

You can check the memory usage status before executing the project download in order to perform
project download normally. Compare the flash/SD/extended memory capacity and the project size
before downloading a project as shown in the table below.
Items Case Description

Flash memory Sending the entire Compare the size of a project with the
project available memory capacity because it is
necessary to secure a storage space in the
memory.

Sending the modified Compare the available memory capacity with

parts only the project size.

SD/extended Compare the available external memory capacity with the project size.
memory

• Sending the entire project

When the capacity of flash memory or external memory is greater than or equal to the project size,
you can export the entire project.

Notes

• The cases where only the modified part of a project is not sent in LXP-Designer are as follows:
- When sending a project to XGT Panel for the first time
- When the entire project is affected due to changes in the project property setting
- When a project ID is deleted due to communication error (Project IDs in PC and XGT Panel
cannot be compared.)
• In case of downloading failure, check the XP Runtime versions of LXP-Designer and XGT
Panel. If the LXP-Designer version is higher than the XP Runtime version, update the version
and run the download again.

2-192
 2.Project

Ethernet connection
Describes how to connect with LXP using Ethernet.

Connecting Ethernet:

1 Connect XGT Panel and PC to the network through an Ethernet cable. If the network is not
supported, you can use a cross cable to connect them. You shall set XGT Panel and PC of an IP
address with the same subnet mask.

2 Close all programs of XGT Panel.

3 Enter the XGT Panel main menu.

4 Touch [Control Panel] ► [Ethernet].

5 Set IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.

6 Touch the button to return to the main screen.

7 Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] ► [Ethernet] connection method in LXP-Designer Toolbar

menu.

8 Select the button to search the network. The IP address of XGT Panel to which Ethernet
communication is connected is outputted as a result of search.

2-193
 2.Project

Items Description
Seach Network You can set the band for which you search. Outputs a list of
network interfaces which exist in the PC.
- All Network: Performs a search in the band of all network
devices.

Refresh Performs search.

IP Address Displays the IP address of a device.

Main Unit Displays the model name of the device's main unit.

Display Unit Displays the model name of the display unit of the device.

Runtime Version Displays the runtime version of a device.

OS Version Displays the OS version of a device.

Mac Address Displays the MAC address of a device.

Alias Displays the alias set on a device.

S/N Displays the serial number of a device.

OK Enters the IP of an item you selected.

Cancel Closes the Connection Settings window.

2-194
 2.Project

Notes

 LXP-Designer provides the function to automatically search XGT Panel connected to the network.
UDP IP method is used as the protocol to search XGT Panel. A broadcast message sent from LXP-
Designer is sent to the address 255.255.255.255. This search is only available within the local
network. If there is a gateway between the PC where LXP-Designer runs and XGT Panel and the
gateway blocks a Broadcast message, search may not be available.
 You will have the last set address until you change the connection setting manually or search for
XGT Panel IP.

2-195
 2.Project

Connecting USB:

1 Run LXP-Designer, create a project, and send it.

2 Connect PC and XGT Panel with Ethernet or serial.

3 Click [COMMUNICATION] ► [XGT Panel Information], and then select the USB option as the
connection method. Click Install USB Driver to download the USB driver to XGT Panel.

4 Connect the USB cable (XPO-USBC) to each port in the PC and XGT Panel.

5 Open the download screen in [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send].

6 Select [USB] as the connection method.

2-196
 2.Project

Notes

• If Install/update XGT Panel USB driver is initially downloaded to a device, USB download is
possible without installing a USB driver separately.

2-197
 2.Project

USB cable connection

You can use a mini USB cable of USB 2.0. The following is how to set cable connection.

1 If the USB cable has been properly connected, run LXP-Designer.

2 Create a project to send.

3 To open the Send Project window, select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] in the Toolbar menu.

4 Select [USB] as the connection method.

Notes

 The OTG cable connected to XGT Panel shall be USB 2.0 or higher.
 When installing LXP-Designer, the RNDIS driver is automatically installed, so you do not
need to reinstall the driver unless you delete it intentionally.

2-198
 2.Project

2.7.2 Sending to external storage

You can download or update a project to an external storage with ease.

Sending a project to external storage:

1 Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Send] or select the Send icon ( ) in the toolbar menu.

2 Select File as the connection method.

3 Specify the path of an external storage. Press the folder shape button to set the storage path and file
name. A project is saved as a single file (.xpez) with the file name set in the selected storage path of
a removable storage device. If there is no storage path does or the file name is not set, export fails.

4 Select [Write].

2-199
 2.Project

5 You can check that the data write operation has been performed normally.

Notes

• Check that the external storage has enough capacity to store project files. If capacity of the
external storage is insufficient when sending a project, sending fails.

2-200
 2.Project

2.7.3 Receiving a project file

You can transfer a project file or a project data to the PC from XGT Panel.

Receiving a project file:

1 Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Receive] or click the Receive icon ( ) in the toolbar menu.

2 You can select communication connection method as Ethernet or USB.

3 Select [LXP-Designer Project(.xpe)].

4 Select to change the path to save a project file. If you do not specify a save path, you
cannot receive a project file from XGT Panel.

5 Select [Read].

2-201
 2.Project

6 If the operation of Receive project file is performed normally, the window is automatically closed.

Notes

If you do not set the option to include LXP-Designer project (.xpe) when sending a project to XGT
Panel, you cannot upload (receive) the project file from XGT Panel.

2-202
 2.Project

Receiving project data:

1 Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Receive] or click the Receive icon ( ) in the toolbar menu.

2 You can select communication connection method as Ethernet or USB.

3 Select [XP-Runtime project (xpez)].

4 Select to change the path to save a project data. If you do not specify a save path, you
cannot receive a project data from XGT Panel.

5 Select [Read].

2-203
 2.Project

6 If the operation of receiving project data is performed normally, the window is automatically closed.

2-204
 2.Project

2.7.4 Receiving backup data

You can receive the backup data of an external storage connected to XGT Panel from the PC. The
backup data includes logging, alarm, recipe, captured image, memo, and operation log.

Data backup:

1 Select [COMMUNICATION] ► [Receive] or select the Receive icon ( ) in the toolbar menu.

2 You can select communication connection method as Ethernet or USB.

3 Select [Backup Data]. Receive the backup data list from XGT Panel.

2-205
 2.Project

4 Select to change the path to save a backup file. If you do not specify a save path, you
cannot receive a backup data from XGT Panel.

5 Select the data type to transfer in the Backup file checkbox list.

2-206
 2.Project

6 Select [Read].

2-207
 2.Project

7 You can check that the operation of receiving backup file has been performed normally.

Notes

The data such as logging, alarm, operation log, and recipe are saved in CSV file format. Memos
and captured images are saved in BMP file format.

2-208
 2.Project

2.7.5 Converting a XP-Builder project

LXP-Designer provides a function to convert a XP-Builder project to a LXP-Designer project. If you
open a XP-Builder project, it is automatically converted to the LXP series model, and the screen size
is adjusted to 1024*768.

You cannot convert the corresponding model to a model other than the LXP series, and you shall
saved as an LXP-Designer project (“xpe”) in order to download it.

Converting a project:

1 Open the saved project in XP-Builder.

2 The XP series model and screen resolution are displayed.

The project is closed upon [Cancel].

3 If you select [OK], the model is converted to the LXP series and the screen resolution is automatically
adjusted.

2-209
 2.Project

4 Click [Save Project] or [Save As Project] to save a project. If you save a project, it is saved as an
LXP-Designer project (extension, “.xpe”).

Notes

1. LXP-Designer does not provide the XP project upload.

2. If there is a controller which is not supported, a [Warning window] shows up, and if the
controller is not changed, the project is closed.

3. You shall delete controller 3 or change it to a supported controller in the controller setting
dialog.

2-210
 2.Project

4. An unsupported object in LXP series is displayed as follows, and property cannot be edited.

An unsupported object is as follows:

 Bit part/word part
 Memo pad
 View data list
 Alarm explorer

2-211
 2.Project

 Data list editor

 File recipe editor
 FTP client
 View PDF
 View VNC
 File recipe explorer, base recipe explorer, Extended file recipe explorer
 Slider
 Explorer

The following functions of the special switch are not provided:

 Special switch related to memo pad
 Special switch related to alarm explorer
 Special switch related to data list editor
 Special switch related to file receipt editor
 Special switch related to FTP client
 Special switch related to viewing PDF
 Special switch related to viewing VNC
 Special switch related to file recipe explorer, base recipe explorer, and extended file
recipe explorer
 Multimedia special switch
 [Others]-[Update]
 [Others]-[XP-Remote]
 [Others]-[Program Monitoring]
 [Others]-[External Program Execution]

2-212
 2.Project

2.7.6 Controller setting synchronization function

In LXP-Designer, when writing a project, if the following conditions are satisfied, the communication
setting synchronization function can be used.

1 Write the project to the XGT Panel once.

2 Change any value of connection property in [Project property]-[XGT Panel setting] in the project
where writing was performed. Or arbitrarily change the value of the controller connection property in
the [Controller Setting] menu in XGT Panel.

3 Write the project again.

4 The controller setting synchronization dialog is displayed on the screen as shown below.

• It shows the controller name set in each project data of LXP-Designer and XGT Panel and whether
it is modified.

• It is possible to select whether or not to synchronize controller settings only for controllers whose
connection property values have been modified.

• Import: Apply the controller connection property of XGT Panel to the controller connection property
value of the LXP-Designer project only for the controller selected by the user and write the project.

• Not import: Apply the controller connection property value set in LXP-Designer to XGT Panel.

• Cancel: Cancel the project write operation.

Notes

2-213
 2.Project

1. If the controller type or the number of controllers is changed, it is displayed on the controller
setting synchronization dialog screen as shown below.
2. When the controller type or the number of controllers is changed When the number of
controllers is changed, the controller synchronization function cannot be used, and only whether
or not to write a project can be selected.

• Shows the controller name set in each project data of LXP-Designer and XGT Panel and
whether it is modified.
• Items with different controller types or different numbers of controllers are displayed in
red letters.
• Yes: Write project.
• Cancel: Cancel writing the project.

2-214
 2.Project

2.8 Communication connection settings (Advanced)

LXP-Designer supports various communication types by setting the controller and XGT Panel. This
section describes the communication types supported by XGT Panel.

You can monitor or control several controllers from one XGT Panel. LXP series supports up to 4 (0-3)
different protocol connections and up to 16 (0-15) different protocol (RS-232C, RS-422/485, Ethernet)
connections.

2.8.1 1:N communication connection of multiple protocols

When setting 1:N communication of multiple protocols, you can connect with various types controllers
via other protocol. RS-485/422 that supports multi-drop can connect XGT Panel and several controllers.
Ethernet connection is capable of connecting several controllers as well.

You can connect with up to 16 different protocols. You can configure 1:N communication of multi-
channel as shown in the figure below (LXP series).

Notes

 When connecting with controller only with RS-232C, you can connect up to two controllers.
 When connecting with controller only with Ethernet, you can connect up to 16 controllers.

2-215
 2.Project

1:N communication connection:

1 Select [Common] ► [Project property] ►[XGT Panel Settings] ►[Add Controller] in the toolbar menu.

2 Select the maker of a controller and a product in the drop-down list. If necessary, select [Detail
Settings] to change the property.

Notes

To delete an added controller, select the controller to delete and click [Delete Controller].

2-216
 2.Project

2.8.2 RS-485 1:N communication connection

When setting RS-485 and 1:N communication, multiple controllers can be connected for the same type
of controller. In RS-485 connection, you can specify an unique station number of each controller through
detailed connection setting in Project Property to refer to the same device for each controller. You can
configure 1:N multi-drop settings as shown in the figure below.

1:N connection:

1 Select [Common] ► [Project property] ► [XGT Panel Settings] in Toolbar menu.

2 Specify RS485 in Protocol.

2-217
 2.Project

3 Place an object to which you want to specify a station number and click this icon in the base
device settings of object property.

4 Select Custom Setting in checkbox.

5 Specify the Station No.

2-218
 2.Project

2.8.3 Viewing communication manual

Describes how to view the communication manual. There are 3 methods to view the communication
manual as follows.

Method 1: Viewing communication manual in Help:

1. Click [HELP] ► [PLC/Controller Manual] ► [Controller] in the toolbar menu.

Method 2: Viewing communication manual in the Project Property window:

1. Select [Common] ► [Project Property] ► [XGT Panel Settings] in the toolbar menu.
2. Click [Refer to manual...].

2-219
 2.Project

Method 3: Viewing communication manual while editing device:

1. Open device dialog you are editing

2. Click “?” and then click anywhere inside the device dialog.
Or, press “F1” key on the keyboard to view the communication manual.

2-220
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

3. Error, Warning Code, and Message

The LXP-Designer error codes are displayed in the Result window or as a pop-up window message. In
this case, find the solution corresponding to the error code and take an appropriate action.

3.1 Error code displayed in the Result window

The table below is a list of error codes displayed in the Result window. To solve this problem, the errors
and their solutions are listed in code number sequence.

Codes Error and warning message Solutions for errors and warnings
1000 There is no background image. A set background image does not exist. Set the
background image.

1001 There is an object or a picture which An object or a picture was out of the screen area.
gets out of the screen area. Move into the screen area.

1003 You have selected unset script X. The selected script does not exist. Set a script or
X: script name create and register a new script.

1004 You cannot insert more than 8 You cannot register more than 8 windows on the
window objects in one screen. screen but more than 8 windows have been
registered. Delete a window object whose
registration has been exceeded.

1005 The size of the window screen The window screen cannot be larger than the size of
exceeded the maximum size of the the screen provided for each XGT Panel product.
HMI screen. Adjust the window size to the maximum size allowed
by an XGT Panel product.

2000 The information on the set image is The specified image has been deleted or the file
invalid. name is invalid. Set another image or select the
image type provided.

2001 XX screen and X number are Screen change switch, bit window, word window, bit
invalid. part, word part, etc. do not exist in the set screen.
(XX: screen type, X: screen number) Change the screen type and number of the
corresponding object.

2002 The address of the device is invalid. The device type is invalid or the device address is
not set. Set or change the device address.

2004 You have used a deleted text table A set text table does not exist. Set a different text
or an invalid text table. table.

2005 You selected an unset script. A set script does not exist. Set other script.

3-1

Codes Error and warning message
2007 The selected XX font cannot
express all the headers set in XXX.
(XX: font name, XXX: header
contents)
2008 There is an object or a picture that is
out of the screen area.
2009 The font XX you specified has not
been installed in the system.
(XX: font name)
2011 The specified image is an image
format you cannot use.
2012 The reference device exists within
the XXX you specified. An
unexpected result may occur.
(XXX: script name)
2013 The specified list of history alarms to
print does not exist.
2014 For row count X and column count
XX, the maximum device range is
exceeded.
(X: row count, XX: column count)
2015 X device is a read-only device.
(X: device name)
2016 The conditions of the lamp you
created do not exist. It is expressed
as a default value.
2017 The key pad position you set is out
of the screen area.
2018 The corresponding logging group
number does not exist.
2019 Check that there are the
corresponding object and an object
with the same cursor input group ID
3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Solutions for errors and warnings
The font you have selected cannot be found, or is a
font that cannot express the header.
Select a font that can express the header to reinstall
it or change the header.
An object is out of the window area. Move an object
into the window area or resize the object.
The font you selected cannot not be found. Reinstall
the font.
The specified image format is not supported. Delete
an image or select an image in the format provided.
The variable type set in the script is invalid. If you
display the operation result without writing a value to
the reference device, change the variable to a
temporary variable.
The list of history alarms on the special switch or
multiple-switch has been deleted. Set to another
history alarm list.
The column count and row count have exceeded the
maximum device range. Adjust the column count
and row count within the maximum device range.
You set a read-only device for writing. Change to the
writing device.
The conditions created in the word lamp do not
exist. Add conditions to the word lamp.
The keypad position is out of the window area.
Move into the window area.
The specified logging group does not exist. Register
the corresponding logging group in the Project
window.
There is an object with the same group number or
input order of the automatic cursor set in the
numeric input or text input. Correct or delete the
3-2
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Codes Error and warning message
and input sequence number.
2021 The connection device you set is a
device which is incapable of ladder
monitoring.
2022 Do not set the program monitoring.
Check whether to use ladder
monitoring in [Common]-[Project
property]-[XGT Panel Settings].
2023 You cannot express the real number
format with the corresponding
logging target device.
2024 More than one list shall exist.
2025 There is an object or a picture that is
out of the screen area.
2026 The group number can be from 1 to
253 only.
2027 You can use only internal devices.
2028 The font for the multi-language you
have set is not set. Set in
[Common]-[Project Property]-
[Language].
2029 The execution path is invalid.
2030 The selected object or function is
not supported by the current model.
3-3
Solutions for errors and warnings
object so that the same numbers are not duplicated.
This device does not support ladder monitoring.
Change the function of the special switch or set it to
a device which supports ladder monitoring.
The program monitoring function was not set in the
object. Modify special switch function or check
program monitor in Communication Settings.
The specified device does not logging. Change the
display of Logging Viewer object or set it to a
different device.
This is a case for registration without adding a list in
objects such as trend, logging trend, and scatter
chart. Delete the corresponding object or add a list.
An object or an image position is out of the window
area. Move into the window area.
The specified number was out of the allowed group
number range. Set the number to a value between 1
and 253.
The PLC device was set to a function which is
capable of using only internal devices. Change to
the internal device.
There is no specified font for the selected language.
Set the font in Language.
The path and file name of the external program are
invalid. Enter a correct path and file name.
This occurs when you select a function which is not
supported, such as when using the View PDF object
in XP series. Therefore, disable or delete the use of
the corresponding function.
This occurs when you select a function which is not
supported, such as when using the View PDF object
in XP series. Therefore, disable or delete the use of
the corresponding function.
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Codes Error and warning message Solutions for errors and warnings
•

2031 The corresponding external device This occurs when an external device which is not
is not supported by the current supported is used, such as when you set an
model. external device to SD in XP series. Change the
external path.

2032 The number of characters is 1-4. This occurs when the number of characters exceeds
(16bits: 1-2, 32bits: 1-4) the range after setting [ASCII] in the [View
Logging] object. Change the number of
characters.

2034 It has exceeded the maximum This occurs when the caption length exceeds 255,
number of characters ([0~255]). as with [Switch] and [Lamp]. Shorten the caption
length.

2036 Possible only in multi-language When using the Korean keypad in [Text Input], set
settings. Initialize keypad settings. [Text]-[Multi-language Display]-[Korean].
Check [Text]-[Multi-language
Settings] and [Keypad] settings.

2037 The language you have set is This occurs when you select the language switch in
invalid. [Special Switch], [Multiple Switch] and then the
corresponding language is deleted. Check [Project
Property]-[Language]-[Runtime Language] or
change the language selection.

3000 Initial screen setting X is invalid. The set initial screen does not exist. Create an
(X: screen number) existing screen or create a new screen and set it as
the initial screen.

3002 The key window X is not correct. The specified key window does not exist. Create an
(X: screen number) existing window or create a new window and set it as
the key window.

3003 The device for base screen The device for screen switching has not been
switching is not correct. specified. Set the device in Project Property.

3004 The device for Window 1 The device for Window 1 switching has not been
switching is not correct. specified. Set the device in Project Property.

3005 The device for Window 2 The device for Window 2 switching has not been
switching is not correct. specified. Set the device in Project Property.

4000 The logging start device of logging The device has not been specified. Set the device in
X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

3-4
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Codes Error and warning message Solutions for errors and warnings
4001 The logging target device setting The device has not been specified. Set the device in
of logging x are not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4002 The display device during logging The device has not been specified. Set the device in
of logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4003 The logging stop display device of The device has not been specified. Set the device in
logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4004 The logging area pool device of The device has not been specified. Set the device in
logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4005 The logging area delete device of The device has not been specified. Set the device in
logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4006 The logging backup device of The device has not been specified. Set the device in
logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4007 The completed logging backup The device has not been specified. Set the device in
device of logging X is not correct. Logging Settings.
(X: logging number)

4008 The logging area settings are The logging storage area has not been set. Set the
incorrect. storage area among logging areas.

4009 The maximum size of logging area The sum of the specified storage areas exceeded the
has been exceeded (X KB). maximum size of logging area. Adjust the storage area
(X: maximum size of the logging to the maximum size.
area)

4010 The logging area has not been The logging storage area has not been set. Set the
set. storage area among logging areas.

4014 You have not specified a The logging backup area has not been set. Specify
destination path to back up the the backup path in Logging Settings.
logging.

4015 The logging target device settings The maximum number of logging target devices has
are not correct. The maximum been exceeded. Reduce the device count within the
device size, which can be set by maximum range.

3-5
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Codes Error and warning message Solutions for errors and warnings
target count, has been exceeded.

4016 Duplicate settings were found The two logging control devices have the same
among the control devices of number. Change to another number.
logging X. The duplication of
control devices is not allowed. (X:
logging number)

5000 The setting of the device to store The device has not been set. Specify a device in the
the number of alarms is not Alarm Settings window.
correct.

5001 The flow alarm monitoring target If you have not specified all required devices or the
device settings are not correct or device address is not correct. Specify a device in the
not set for all registered alarms. Flow Alarm Setting window or check the specified
device.

5002 The devices whose flow alarms Numbers of the two flow alarm devices are the same.
are to be monitored have been set Change to another number.
to duplicate each other.

5003 The alarm message setting of There is no selected alarm message. Select an alarm
[Flow Alarm X] is not correct. message.
(X: alarm number)

7000 The non-recoverable alarm count A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
storage setting is not correct. the History Alarm Settings window.

7001 Device settings for deleting alarm A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
history are not correct. the History Alarm Settings window.

7002 Device settings for starting alarm A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
printing are not correct. the History Alarm Settings window.

7003 Device settings for ending alarm A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
printing are not correct. the History Alarm Settings window.

7004 Cycle settings for acquiring history There is an error in the specified historical alarm
alarm data are not correct. acquisition cycle. Check the cycle in the History Alarm
Setting window.

7005 There is no display text content for An alarm group display text has not been selected.
alarm group X. Select Text in the Alarm Group property window.
(X: alarm group name)

7006 The text table settings of alarm list There is no text selected in the alarm list. Select a text
X are not correct. table from the alarm list or create a new text table and

3-6
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Codes Error and warning message
(X: alarm list name)
7007 Device settings for monitoring of
alarm list X are not correct.
7008 Range settings for alarms of alarm
list X are not correct.
7009 Number settings for the detailed
screen of alarm list X are not
correct.
(X: alarm list name)
7010 Message settings for the alarm of
alarm list X are not correct.
(X: alarm list name)
7011 The alarm list X and XX are set to
monitor the same device.
(X, XX: alarm list name)
7012 All alarm target devices in alarm
list X shall be set.
(X: alarm list name)
7013 The monitoring target device in
alarm list X is duplicated.
(X: alarm list name)
7014 Information settings for the
monitoring target device word
conditions of alarm list X are not
correct.
(X: alarm list name)
8000 Device settings for starting writing
are not correct.
8001 Device settings for starting
reading are not correct.
8002 Device settings for backup are not
correct.
8003 Device settings for assigning the
3-7
Solutions for errors and warnings
then specify it.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Alarm List Setting window.
There is an error in the alarm conditional expression in
the alarm list. Check the conditional expression in the
Alarm List Settings window.
There is an error in the detailed alarm list screen.
Check the settings in the Alarm List Settings window.
There is no set alarm message. Select a text at the
text table in the alarm list using the alarm message.
Two historical alarms have been set to monitor the
same device. Specify one of the alarms to other
device or delete it.
Some devices in the alarm list have not been
specified. All devices in the alarm list shall be
specified.
Two historical alarms have been set to monitor the
same device. Specify one of the alarms to other
device or delete it.
There is an error in the alarm conditional expression in
the alarm list. Check the conditional expression in the
Alarm List Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in

Codes Error and warning message
recipe number are not correct.
8004 Device settings for assigning the
recipe block number are not
correct.
8005 Device settings for the recipe data
transfer completion signal are not
correct.
8006 Device settings for the recipe data
transfer error display are not
correct.
8007 Device settings for the recipe are
not correct.
8008 The maximum size of the recipe
settings (63KByte) has been
exceeded.
8009 You have not specified a
destination path to back up the
recipe.
8010 Device settings for the recipe are
not correct. Check if the maximum
size of device settings has been
exceeded by the recipe device
count.
9000 The download data size (X Byte)
exceeded the maximum size (XX
Byte).
9001 The font (X) used in the project is
not the font installed in the
system. Change to the font
installed in the system. If you do
not change it, the text display may
not appear. (X: font name)
11000 Font X file cannot be found. (X:
font file name)
3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Solutions for errors and warnings
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
A device has not been specified. Specify a device in
the Recipe Settings window.
The maximum size of the recipe settings exceeded
the maximum memory size. Adjust the number of data
blocks in the recipe.
Set the backup path in the Recipe Settings window.
The device has not been specified or the device count
exceeded the maximum allowed number. Check the
device specified in the Recipe Input window.
The total size of the selected data exceeded the
maximum downloadable memory of XGT Panel.
Disable the item and then try again in order to reduce
the total data size.
The font you specified has not been installed in the
system. Install the font in the system or specify other
font in the Project Settings window.
The specified font cannot be found or is not installed
in the system. Restart LXP-Designer. If the problem
occurs again, install the font in the system or specify
other font in the Project Settings window.
3-8
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Codes Error and warning message Solutions for errors and warnings
11001 Includes characters which cannot The font you have selected is not capable of
be printed with font X. Check if the displaying special symbols. Please select other font
characters which do not match which is capable of displaying special symbols.
with the selected font among the
text table or screen contents is
used. (X: font name)

13001 The selected script as operation The selected script does not exist. Specify other script
does not exist. or create a new one.

16001 A write-protected device within the You have used a read-only device in a place where
script was used for writing. you shall use a write device. Specify it as a write
device in the script.

3-9
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

3.2 Solution method to display an error message in a pop-up

window
The following table describes how to solve the error messages displayed in the window, which pops up
in LXP-Designer. This error message is displayed only as a text without an error code.

Error message Error solution method

You cannot specify XX as an interval. Set the interval between scale and graph within 0 to 10 in
The scale interval is from 0 to 10. the graph object.
(XX: interval between graph and scale)

You cannot specify XX as an the Set the number of scales within 0 to 255 in the graph
number of scales. You can enter the object.
number of scales in 0 ~ 255.
(XX: interval between graph and scale)

XX is not a 16-bit BCD data type. Enter When the device size and shape are 16-bit BCD, set it
a value between 0 and 9999. within 0 to 9999.
(XX: number entered)

XX is not a 16-bit signed data type. When the device size and shape are 16-bit signed data
Enter a value between -32768 and type, set it within -32768 to 32767.
32767.
(XX: number entered)

XX is not a 16-bit unsigned data type. When the device size and shape are 16-bit unsigned data
Enter a value between 0 and 65535. type, set it within 0 to 65535.
(XX: number entered)

XX is not a 32-bit BCD data type. Enter When the device size and shape are 32-bit BCD, set it
a value between 0 and 99999999. between 0 and 99999999.
(XX: number entered)

XX is not a 32-bit signed data type. When the device size and shape are 32-bit signed data
Enter a value between -2147483648 type, set it between -2147483648 and 2147483647.
and 2147483647.
(XX: number entered)

XX is not a 32-bit unsigned data type. When the device size and shape are 32-bit unsigned data
Enter a value between 0 and type, set it between 0 and 4294967295.
4294967295. (XX: number entered)

You can select only a moving GIF Select a GIF image file.
image.

Since the temporary directory is a You cannot save or open a file in the temporary directory.
place to save XGT temporary files, you

3-10
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Error message
cannot save or open files here.
You cannot display all of entered XXXX
captions with the currently set XX font.
Select a font that matches with the
input content. (XX: set font name,
XXXX: types of captions such as On,
Off, conditional statement number, etc.)
Changed in an indirect way. Deletes all
expressions of written conditional
statements.
Communication connection failed.
The connection password is invalid.
The connection has been lost. Try
again after connecting.
This is a read-only device. You cannot
use the write device.
File transfer error
It has failed to load the graphic library.
You cannot download more than 10M.
There is no response for a long time or
the connection failed.
It has failed to load the object library.
3-11
Error solution method
Save it in other location.
Change the font or the caption.
This is a message created when changing the word
message, word part, message of word window, or screen
selection method from [Status] to [Condition].
There is no connected XGT Panel. Check XGT Panel
connection status and communication settings.
If there is a connection password when connecting to XGT
Panel, enter a password matched with the message
displayed when a user enters the password incorrectly.
This is an error occurred when XGT Panel is disconnected.
Check the communication setting, and then connect
between PC and XGT Panel.
When an object does not provide the write function, device
input is not possible. There is an object which supports
read/write, but the ramp are read-only. An objects such as
switch, numeric input, and character input device shall use
a write device. For details on object, refer to <4.3 Object>.
You cannot read a transferred file due to a file error, and an
error message occurs at this time.
Download the project file from XGT Panel again. Refer to
<2.8.1 Sending a project>.
The graphic library has been corrupted. Create and use a
new library.
Some XGT Panel products are not capable of sending a file
of more than 10MB.
An error has occurred during data transfer. Check the
connection between PC and XGT Panel as well as the XGT
Panel power cable.
The object library has been corrupted. Create and use a
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Error message Error solution method

new library.

It has failed to set the password. It cannot be set with a new password. Check XGT Panel
connection and communication settings.

There is a problem with the data. An error occurred when incorrect data is included upon
transferring. Send the data again.

Save the file. Enter a file name and save the project file.

Save the project file first. An error occurred when you try to transfer a project without
saving. Save the project and try again.

Move to update mode in XGT Panel. This is an error that occurs when trying to update XP-
Runtime during operating XGT Panel. Try to update in
Update mode in the XGT Panel menu.

The X number of columns you set It occurs when the column count set in the object exceeds
exceeds the maximum screen range. the width length of the entire screen. Adjust the column
(X: column count) count.

The X number of rows you set exceeds It occurs when the number of rows set in the object
the maximum screen range. exceeds the width length of the entire screen. Adjust the
(X: number of rows) number of rows.

There is no backup file you want to There is no backup file in XGT Panel.
download in XGT Panel.

The specified backup path is not The font or image file path is not correct It is necessary to
correct. check the status of the backup device such as USB
memory or SD inserted into XGT Panel, and correct the
download path of the project property information.

A user library whose color is larger The currently connected XGT Panel does not support
than the number of colors which the colors. Change the color of the connected XGT Panel in the
current XGT model can have. Project property.

There is no project file in XGT Panel. An error has occurred when there is no upload file in XGT
Panel. Include the upload file when transferring a project to
XGT Panel. Refer to <2.8.1 Sending a project>.

The executable file in the device and The executable file has been modified. Send the entire
the executable file you want to send project file to XGT Panel.
are not the same.

The file already exists. Do you want to A message is displayed when a file with the same name
overwrite? exists in the directory.

3-12
 3.Error, Warning Code, and Message

Error message Error solution method

The project file has already opened. The download file is locked. It occurs when a project file is
being accessed from other PC connected to the network.

Check the memory. An error occurs when XGT Panel memory is insufficient.
Check the available memory capacity of XGT Panel.

The maximum value shall be greater Set the maximum value to be greater than the minimum
than the minimum value. value.

You can display only an even number Only an even number of characters is allowed in the
of characters. character display device and character input device. Set the
number of characters to an even number.

The number of X-axis displays you can You can set the number of X-axis displays from 3 to 120 in
select is from 3 to 120. Check and the trend graph [Display] item.
enter it again.

Passwords do not match. Enter the correct password.

There is no previous version project There is no previous version project in XGT Panel. Send
information available. the entire project to XGT Panel. Refer to <2.8.1 Sending a
project>.

The print template file does not exist. The Excel template file for printing does not exist. Reinstall
it.

The project header information is not The project header information is corrupted or not correct.
correct.

The project ID is incorrect. The projects ID in LXP-Designer and XGT Panel are
different. Send the entire project to XGT Panel. Refer to
<2.8.1 Sending a project>.

The number of screens you can select Set the screen number of the screen to be switched or
is from 1 to 4095. Check and enter it called part between 1 and 4095.
again.

The simulator cannot be run. The simulator file does not exist. Reinstall it.

The total digits shall be greater than Specify the number of digits to be greater than the number
the number of decimals. of decimals in the object which sets digits and decimal
points.

It cannot be saved because the upload A message is displayed if a file has been transferred via
file is same as opened project file. Do upload and copied to the same location as opened file.
you want to specify another directory?

3-13

Error message
The XGT Panel model type is not the
same.
There is no executable file in the
device. First, send the entire XGT file.
There is an error in this project. Check
the Tools-Data.
[Working]/[Engine connection status is
in the initial state.] Please try again.
It is an invalid screen number.
It is an XGT INI file open error.
XGT model type is not the same.
XGT Panel is not ready to receive.
You can select only a moving GIF
image.
3.Error, Warning Code, and Message
Error solution method
Displayed if you want to download a project file whose XGT
Panel model is not the same. Change XGT Panel model
type in Project Property or send a file whose model
matches. Refer to <2.2.2 Setting project properties>.
If the executable file is not in the device, partial download or
modified download is performed. So, proceed with the full
download first.
Please check the data verification and error information
before downloading the project.
This is an error that occurs when trying to update XP-
Runtime during operating XGT Panel. Try to update in
Update mode in the XGT Panel menu.
It is displayed when a screen with the same number exists
or when out of screen number range. Change the screen
number.
If you open the file to send the initialization file when
sending XP-Runtime, a problem has occurred in opening
the file.
The initialization file for sending XP-Runtime has been
corrupted or is in use. Check that the initialization file is not
in use, and then send the project file again.
Change XGT Panel model in the Project property or
transfer the project file to the product which matches the
model.
XGT Panel is performing other operation. Please wait a few
minutes and try again
Select only moving GIF image files.
3-14
 4.Editing common data

4. Editing common data

4.1 Common data
Common data refers to the data which is commonly used in the entire project.
The table below provides the description and limitations of common data.
Type Description Limitations
Tag A function register frequently used Number of tags: 10,000
device addresses and types in (No limited number of tag groups)
advance to manage devices.

Text table A function which registers frequently Number of strings (per table): 10,001
used strings in the text table and Text table count: 255
brings and use the corresponding text
when necessary.

Logging It is a function to record and keep the Number of loggings: 32

data being monitored in a file. Bit: 64, Word: 100

Recipe It is used to write or read the value set Number of device recipes: 10,000
according to the condition set by a Number of base recipes: 255
user. Number of file recipes: 5,000

Flow alarm It is a function to display the contents Number of flow alarms: 10,000
corresponding to the conditions with a
text flowing on the screen when the
conditions a user specifies are met.

History alarm It performs an action to save a device Number of history alarms: 10,000
value when the conditions a user • It supports up to 9 history alarms at the
specifies are met. You can perform this upper level of the alarm group.
function while interoperating with a • It can create them up to 4 lower levels
special switch. in the upper alarm group.
• It can create up to 8 alarm lists in the
lower of the alarm group.
Scheduler It performs the action set at a specified Scheduler: 32
time.

Script It is a function capable of controlling an N/A

object and a function using a program
command.

Sound It performs a sound action in your 512

4-1
 4.Editing common data

Type Description Limitations

device using a sound file.

4-2
 4.Editing common data

4.1.1 Tag
A tag can be used in all objects where you enter a device address.
In addition, if you change a registered tag value, you can change all address values to which the
corresponding tag value is applied in the same way.
You can enter a tag value in the device address input box or use the device setting keypad on the right
side of the input box to register a tag.
When entering manually, if you enter “=” in the device address input box and then enter the registered
tag name, the “T” icon on the left is enabled to notify that tag input is completed.

Tag registration:

1 If you select [Tag] is selected in Project Setting tab on the left side of Project screen, the Tag
registration window is enabled.

2 Select the [Default] group in the tag group tree. (You cannot edit the system tag group.)

3 Set tag name, device address, and tag description in the tag group.

Type Description

Number You cannot register the first character of a tag name as a number
(Example: “3ABCD”).

Special Character To use special characters in a tag name, you can use “,” “%”, “$”,
“#”, “@”, “&”, and “*” characters together after entering “_
(underscore).

Space Character You can use a space character before or after a tag name, and
the space character is recognized as name.

Device Name You cannot use the device address expression of the connection
PLC as a name (Example: D0012, %MW123).

Hexadecimal Number You cannot use a hexadecimal expression as name

(Example: H234).

4-3
 4.Editing common data

Notes

There are several restrictions for registering tag names, and the table above describes the rest
rictions.
• You can register a tag only in one table. If modify the tag later when you register a device us
ing a tag in an object, all objects using the tag will be affected.
• If specify a device address with a tag, the continuous copy operation is not applied.
• If you double-click the title column, the text table is arranged in ascending or descending order
based on the corresponding column.
• You cannot use “:” (colon), which is a separator between “Group Name” and “Tag Name” in T
ag Name.
• You can insert a row by pressing Enter key in the name cell of the last row or by using the
pop-up menu/drag and drop.

• You can delete a row through the pop-up menu displayed when you right-click, and you canno
t delete if the tag is in use.

4-4
 4.Editing common data

Tags are classified into two types, system tag and user-defined tag, and the following table describes the
system tag you can use in LXP-Designer.

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_NVRAM_Low_Battery BIT HS0950.0 The battery voltage of XGT Panel
is low.
_NVRAM_Invalid_Data BIT HS0950.1 The SRAM memory of XGT Panel
has been corrupted.
_No_Logging_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.0 There is no logging backup
external memory.
_No_Recipe_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.1 There is no recipe backup
external memory.
_No_Screen_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.2 There is no project backup
external memory.
_No_Printer BIT HS0951.4 There is no printer connected.
_USB_Over_Current_Warning BIT HS0950.8 An overcurrent is drawn from the
connected USB device.
_No_Alarm_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.3 There is no alarm backup external
memory.
_ON BIT HS0000.0 Has a value of ON always.
_OFF BIT HS0000.1 Has a value of OFF always.
_T200MS BIT HS0000.6 Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
200ms.
_T1S BIT HS0000.7 Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
1 second.
_T2S BIT HS0000.8 Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
2 seconds.
_T5S BIT HS0000.9 Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
5 seconds.
_T10S BIT HS0000.A Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
10 seconds.
_T30S BIT HS0000.B Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
30 seconds.
_T60S BIT HS0000.C Repeats ON and OFF at a cycle of
60 seconds.

4-5
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_SPDEV_RETRY_ABNORMAL_ST BIT HS0517.0 Retry communication for the
ATION abnormal station number where
the communication error occurred.
_SPDEV_COMM00_STATION_CO WORD HS2000 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 0 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
Example: For HS2000.0=1, station
number, 0 communication error
status.
(HS2000: Station no. 0~15
HS2001: Station no. 16~31
HS2002: Station no. 32~47
HS2003: Station no. 48~63
HS2004: Station no. 64~79
HS2005: Station no. 80~95
HS2006: Station no. 96~111
HS2007: Station no. 112~127
HS2008: Station no. 128~143
HS2009: Station no. 144~159
HS2010: Station no. 160~175
HS2011: Station no. 176~191
HS2012: Station no. 192~207
HS2013: Station no. 208~223
HS2014: Station no. 224~239
HS2015: Station no. 240~255)
_SPDEV_COMM01_STATION_CO WORD HS2016 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 1 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM02_STATION_CO WORD HS2032 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 2 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM03_STATION_CO WORD HS2048 Communication status by

4-6
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 3 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM04_STATION_CO WORD HS2064 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 4 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM05_STATION_CO WORD HS2080 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 5 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM06_STATION_CO WORD HS2096 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 6 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM07_STATION_CO WORD HS2112 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 7 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM08_STATION_CO WORD HS2128 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 8 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM09_STATION_CO WORD HS2144 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 9 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM10_STATION_CO WORD HS2160 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 10 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.

4-7
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_SPDEV_COMM11_STATION_CO WORD HS2176 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 11 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM12_STATION_CO WORD HS2192 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 12 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM13_STATION_CO WORD HS2208 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 13 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM14_STATION_CO WORD HS2224 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 14 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_SPDEV_COMM15_STATION_CO WORD HS2240 Communication status by
MM_STATUS_00 controller No. 15 and station
numbers 00~15 upon XGT Cnet
Link and OMRON Link
communications.
_OSVER_MAJ WORD HS0001 Displays the OS version
information (Major) of XGT Panel.
_OSVER_MIN WORD HS0002 Displays the OS version
information (Minor) of XGT Panel.
_YEAR WORD HS0004 XGT Panel time information [year]
_MON WORD HS0005 XGT Panel time information
[month]
_DAY WORD HS0006 XGT Panel time information [day]
_HOUR WORD HS0007 XGT Panel time information [hour]
_MIN WORD HS0008 XGT Panel time information
[minute]

4-8
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_SEC WORD HS0009 XGT Panel time information
[second]
_BASESCREEN_NO WORD HS0010 Displays the current base window
screen number.
_GLOBALWNG1_NO WORD HS0011 Displays the current global window
#1 screen number.

_GLOBALWNG2_NO WORD HS0012 Displays the current global window

#2 screen number.
_SECURITY_NO WORD HS0013 Displays the currently selected
security level.
_ZERO WORD HS0014 It always has the value of 0.
_C500MS WORD HS0015 The value increases by 1 in a
cycle of 500 msec.
_C1S WORD HS0016 The value increases by 1 in a
cycle of 1 second.
_C2S WORD HS0017 The value increases by 1 in a
cycle of 2 seconds.
_C5S WORD HS0018 The value increases by 1 in a
cycle of 5 seconds.
_C10S WORD HS0019 The value increases by 1 in a
cycle of 10 seconds.
_Change_to_Screen WORD HS0500 System default screen change
device [Operation in change
screen device mode]
_DAY_OF_WEEK WORD HS0003 XGT Panel time information [Day],
Sunday (0) ~ Saturday (6)
_T50MS BIT HS0000.4 Repeats ON and OFF in a cycle of
50msec.
_T100MS BIT HS0000.5 Repeats ON and OFF in a cycle of
100msec.
_T500ms BIT HS0000.F Repeats ON and OFF in a cycle of
500msec.

4-9
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_No_Memo_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.5 There is no memo backup external
memory.
_XPLinkParam_Load_Error BIT HS0100.2 Failed to open the parameter sent
from XP-Manager.
_XP_VNC_Sever_ON BIT HS0100.1 XP-VNC server is running.
_Web_Sever_ON BIT HS0100.2 Web server is running.
_Size_All_Flash_Low WORD HS0027 Total flash memory capacity Low-
order double word
_Size_All_Flash_High WORD HS0029 Total flash memory capacity High-
order double word
_Size_Available_Flash_Low WORD HS0031 Total flash memory capacity Low-
order double word
_Size_Available_Flash_High WORD HS0033 Total flash memory capacity High-
order double word
_Size_All_USB_Low WORD HS0035 Total USB memory capacity Low-
order double word
_Size_All_USB_High WORD HS0037 Total USB memory capacity High-
order double word
_Size_Available_USB_Low WORD HS0039 Available USB memory capacity
Low-order double word
_Size_Available_USB_High WORD HS0041 Available USB memory capacity
High-order double word
_Size_All_Extended_Storage_Low WORD HS0043 Total expanded memory capacity
Low-order double word
_Size_All_Extended_Storage_High WORD HS0045 Total expanded memory capacity
High-order double word
_Size_Available_Extended_Storag WORD HS0047 Available expanded memory
e_Low capacity Low-order double word
_Size_Available_Extended_Storag WORD HS0049 Available expanded memory
e_High capacity High-order double word
_USB_Attatched BIT HS0051.0 Displays whether USB memory is
installed.
_Extended_Storage_Attatched BIT HS0051.1 Displays whether extended

4-10
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

_N1_Token
_N1_Token_Hold
_N1_Token_Station
_IDLE_TIME_COUNTER
_XP_VNC_INTERLOCK
_N1_Token_Count
_N1_Station
_1_ON
_Enable_XP_Remote
_Has_Ctrl_Right
_XP_Remote_Count
_Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_ID
_Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_IP
_RS232C_Over_Current_Warning
Address
memory is installed.
BIT HS0070.0 In N:1 communication, you are
communicating with a token.
BIT HS0501.0 The N:1 token is fixed so that you
do not pass the token to other
nodes and communicate alone.
WORD HS0071 Displays the station number of the
node which has a token in current
N:1 communication.
WORD HS0502 If a user does not touch or use the
mouse, the count increases in the
unit of 1 second.
BIT HS0503.0 When turned on, a user connected
with XP-VNC cannot operate with
mouse or keyboard.
WORD HS0072 Displays the times N:1 tokens
have been acquired.
WORD HS0073 Displays the N:1 station number of
XGT Panel.
BIT HS0000.D Since XGT Panel starts
monitoring, only the first scan
turns ON and displays OFF.
BIT HS0504.0 Displays whether operation by XP-
Remote is allowed.
BIT HS0075.0 Displays whether XGT Panel owns
the operation right.
OFF if XP-Remote has the
operation right.
WORD HS0076 Displays the number of XP-
Remote connected to XGT Panel.
WORD HS0077 Displays the ID of XP-Remote
which owns the operation right.
DWORD HS0078 Displays the IP address of XP-
Remote which owns the operation
right.
BIT HS0950.9 Overcurrent flows in from the

4-11
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
device connected to XGT Panel
via RS-232C.
_VM_Mod_Over_Current_Warning BIT HS0950.A Overcurrent flows in from the VM
module connected to XGT Panel.
_EXT_Mod_Over_Current_Warning BIT HS0950.B Overcurrent flows in from the
extended module connected to
XGT Panel.
_No_Movie_Backup_Storage BIT HS0951.6 There is no video storage external
memory.
_No_Movie_Still_Image_Backup_S BIT HS0951.7 There is no video capture external
torage memory.
_No_Sound_File_Storage BIT HS0951.8 There is no sound file storage
external memory.
_No_Recipe_Storage BIT HS0951.9 There is no recipe storage external
memory.
_SD_Attatched BIT HS0051.2 Displays whether SD card is
installed.
_Size_All_SD_Low WORD HS0058 Total SD memory capacity Low-
order double word
_Size_All_SD_High WORD HS0060 Total SD memory capacity High-
order double word
_Size_Available_SD_Low WORD HS0062 Available SD memory capacity
Low-order double word
_Size_Available_SD_High WORD HS0064 Available SD memory capacity
High-order double word
_Alarm_Norecovery_Device_Num WORD HS0093 Device which displays the number
of unrecovered alarm
Alarm_Norconfirm_Device_Num WORD HS0094 Device which displays the number
of unchecked alarm
_BARCODE_SAVEIN_KEYCODE BIT HS0501.2 Save keyboard input in barcode
device.
_BARCODE_INITIAL_TIME WORD HS0507 Wait timeout period when saving
keyboard input data
_XP_VNC_Server_Control BIT HS0503.1 VNC Server Control

4-12
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_CONTROLLER0_IP_LOWER WORD HS0944 Controller0 IP lower address
_CONTROLLER0_IP_UPPER WORD HS0945 Controller0 IP upper address
_HMI_LAN0_IP_LOWER WORD HS0140 HMI LAN0 IP lower address
_HMI_LAN0_IP_UPPER WORD HS0141 HMI LAN0 IP upper address
_HMI_LAN1_IP_LOWER WORD HS0142 HMI LAN1 IP lower address
_HMI_LAN1_IP_UPPER WORD HS0143 HMI LAN1 IP upper address
_SPDEV_START_RUN_TIME_GS BIT HS0501.1 Whether to use the global script
CRIPT debug function
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_ALL_GSCRI WORD HS0253 Global script condition check and
PT execution Maximum execution
time for 1 scan
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0221 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 1
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0222 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 2
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_3 WORD HS0223 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 3
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_4 WORD HS0224 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 4
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_5 WORD HS0225 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 5
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_6 WORD HS0226 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 6
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_7 WORD HS0227 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 7
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_8 WORD HS0228 Script Maximum Execution Time
for Global Script No. 8

_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_9 WORD HS0229 Script Maximum Execution Time

for Global Script No. 9
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0230 Script Maximum Execution Time
0 for Global Script No. 10
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0231 Script Maximum Execution Time

4-13
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
1 for Global Script No. 11
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0232 Script Maximum Execution Time
2 for Global Script No. 12
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0233 Script Maximum Execution Time
3 for Global Script No. 13
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0234 Script Maximum Execution Time
4 for Global Script No. 14
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0235 Script Maximum Execution Time
5 for Global Script No. 15
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0236 Script Maximum Execution Time
6 for Global Script No. 16
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0237 Script Maximum Execution Time
7 for Global Script No. 17
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0238 Script Maximum Execution Time
8 for Global Script No. 18
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_1 WORD HS0239 Script Maximum Execution Time
9 for Global Script No. 19
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0240 Script Maximum Execution Time
0 for Global Script No. 20
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0241 Script Maximum Execution Time
1 for Global Script No. 21
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0242 Script Maximum Execution Time
2 for Global Script No. 22
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0243 Script Maximum Execution Time
3 for Global Script No. 23
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0244 Script Maximum Execution Time
4 for Global Script No. 24
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0245 Script Maximum Execution Time
5 for Global Script No. 25
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0246 Script Maximum Execution Time
6 for Global Script No. 26
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0247 Script Maximum Execution Time
7 for Global Script No. 27

4-14
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0248 Script Maximum Execution Time
8 for Global Script No. 28
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_2 WORD HS0249 Script Maximum Execution Time
9 for Global Script No. 29
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_3 WORD HS0250 Script Maximum Execution Time
0 for Global Script No. 30
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_3 WORD HS0251 Script Maximum Execution Time
1 for Global Script No. 31
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_GSCRIPT_3 WORD HS0252 Script Maximum Execution Time
2 for Global Script No. 32
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0261 Script Maximum Execution Time
_1 for Screen Script No. 1
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0262 Script Maximum Execution Time
_2 for Screen Script No. 2
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0263 Script Maximum Execution Time
_3 for Screen Script No. 3
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0264 Script Maximum Execution Time
_4 for Screen Script No. 4
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0265 Script Maximum Execution Time
_5 for Screen Script No. 5
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0266 Script Maximum Execution Time
_6 for Screen Script No. 6
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0267 Script Maximum Execution Time
_7 for Screen Script No. 7
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0268 Script Maximum Execution Time
_8 for Screen Script No. 8
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0269 Script Maximum Execution Time
_9 for Screen Script No. 9
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0270 Script Maximum Execution Time
_10 for Screen Script No. 10
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0271 Script Maximum Execution Time
_11 for Screen Script No. 11
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0272 Script Maximum Execution Time
_12

4-15
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
for Screen Script No. 12
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0273 Script Maximum Execution Time
_13 for Screen Script No. 13
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0274 Script Maximum Execution Time
_14 for Screen Script No. 14
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0275 Script Maximum Execution Time
_15 for Screen Script No. 15
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0276 Script Maximum Execution Time
_16 for Screen Script No. 16
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0277 Script Maximum Execution Time
_17 for Screen Script No. 17
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0278 Script Maximum Execution Time
_18 for Screen Script No. 18
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0279 Script Maximum Execution Time
_19 for Screen Script No. 19
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0280 Script Maximum Execution Time
_20 for Screen Script No. 20
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0281 Script Maximum Execution Time
_21 for Screen Script No. 21
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0282 Script Maximum Execution Time
_22 for Screen Script No. 22
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0283 Script Maximum Execution Time
_23 for Screen Script No. 23
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0284 Script Maximum Execution Time
_24 for Screen Script No. 24
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0285 Script Maximum Execution Time
_25 for Screen Script No. 25
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0286 Script Maximum Execution Time
_26 for Screen Script No. 26
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0287 Script Maximum Execution Time
_27 for Screen Script No. 27
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0288 Script Maximum Execution Time
_28 for Screen Script No. 28

4-16
 4.Editing common data

Device name Type Device Description

Address
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0289 Script Maximum Execution Time
_29 for Screen Script No. 29
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0290 Script Maximum Execution Time
_30 for Screen Script No. 30
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0291 Script Maximum Execution Time
_31 for Screen Script No. 31
_SPDEV_RUN_TIME_SC_SCRIPT WORD HS0292 Script Maximum Execution Time
_32 for Screen Script No. 32
_SPDEV_START_RUN_TIME_SC_ BIT HS0501.3 Whether to use the screen debug
SCRIPT function

Tag input method:

1. Select the device address setting keypad.

2. You can enter a tag value in the device address input box or use the device setting keypad on the
right side of the input box to register a tag. When entering manually, if you enter “=” in the device
address input box and then enter the registered tag name, the “T” icon on the left is enabled to notify
that tag input is completed

3. Click the tag checkbox at the top.

4-17
 4.Editing common data

4. Select the tag group and tag. A list of available tags can be displayed.

5. Press the [OK] button. The tag, which a user selects, is entered in the Device Input window.

4-18
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• When registering a new tag, if you enter “=” in before the tag name to register and then enter in the
Device Address window, you can register a new tag. If the group of the tag is not “Default” or
“System”, you shall enter a group name like “Group Name” + “:” + “Tag Name” in the Address
window.

• An error may occur when you change the tag type.

• You can change the tag address in Edit box at the bottom of Tag dialog.
The address is changed when the focus of the cursor in Edit box is released.

Deleting tag:

1. Select the area to delete.

2. Select the Delete key on your keyboard to delete it.

4-19
 4.Editing common data

However, if the corresponding tag is used in the project, the following message appears and it cannot
be deleted. In this case, you need to find used objects or elements within the system via Find
All/Replace All to delete or change the tag for deleting the tag.

You can export the variables used in XG5000 project and import them into LXP-Designer, and the
method is as follows:

Importing XG5000 variable:

1. Right-click in the Tag Group window.

2. Select [Import XG5000 Variable] in the menu.

3. Select the varibale file (*.csv) and click Open button.

4. Select Open button.

4-20
 4.Editing common data

• As the group name called NewPLC, a tag is added as shown below.

Notes

• Exporting variable from XG5000:

1. Run XG5000 with version 3.0 or higher.
2. Select [Project]-[Save As Variable/Description File].
3. Select a variable to save, and then press OK to save the file.

• An error occurs if the PLC type is different when importing data.

• Importing is not done properly except for bit and word devices.

4-21
 4.Editing common data

4.1.2 Text table

You can store strings you use frequently and strings, which require language, change in the text table
and use them. The advantage of the text table is that you can bring up strings used within the project to
use them anywhere. For example, you can use the table as object caption, and set color size and other
font properties in the text table. In addition, if you need to change the language of the text, you can add
and register a language column to set a multilingual interface.

Depending on the device state, you can set the strings of bit and word message differently, and the
following is an example data.

비트 메시지: On

M0001 = On

비트 메시지: Off

M0001 = Off

<Bit message>

워드 메시지: #1

M0001 = 1

워드 메시지: #2
M0001 = 2

M0001 = 5
워드 메시지: #5

<Word message>

4-22
 4.Editing common data

Creating text table:

1. Right-click [Text Table] in Project tab.

2. Select [Insert].

3. Enter a text and set a property such as font color and typeface.

Notes

• Screen title
If you use the screen title as text table, font size, color, and other text style are not reflected. In
addition, the size of the text table (Italic, bold, underline, etc.) is fixed to 15 and displayed.
• Text table arrangement
If you double-click the title column except for the color column, the text table is arranged in an
ascending or descending order based on the corresponding column.

• If you enter a text in the text table, the text language is displayed in the language set in the
corresponding project property.

4-23
 4.Editing common data

Setting text table language:

1. Create a text table in Project tab, and then select the corresponding text table.
2. Right-click text box and select [Property].

3. If the Property window is enabled, select a language you want to use in the language list and then
select the OK button, you can check that the corresponding language list has been added to the text
table.

4. Enter a text to be translated in added language text.

4-24
 4.Editing common data

• If you select [Edit Languages] on the LXP-Designer toolbar and select a language to change, the
language is translated. If you add a list of supported languages to [Edit Languages], refer to
<2.2.2.6 Language>.

Notes

When using multiple languages, you shall use a language that is supported by the operating system of
the PC you are using now so that a normal text can be displayed.

4-25
 4.Editing common data

Setting text table:

1. Create an object which is capable of setting a text table. (Refer to the following table.)
2. Select [Text] in the corresponding Object Property window. If you want to specify the texts of flow
alarm and history alarm, insert and create a text table. And then, you shall select the text table name
in the flow alarm edit area and the text table in the history alarm edit area so that you can use them.

3. Select a text to add from the text table.

Type Description
Bit message Select [On] or [Off] ▶ [Text Table].

Word message Select a message to output on the Default tab.

[Message Device]: device to select the message number to display in
the text table
- Indirect: Displays the message of the number corresponding to the
device value in the text table.
- Conditional statement: Displays messages which meet the conditions
set in the Text tab.
- Fixed value: Displays the message of the number corresponding to
the set value.
[TextTable Num]: Select the text table with a message to display.
- Fixed: Displays the message of the selected text table.

- Device: Select the text table corresponding to the device value.

4-26
 4.Editing common data

Type Description

Bit switch Select [Use Caption] in Setting window, check [From Text Table], and
Word switch then select [Text Table].
Screen change switch
Special switch
Multi switch
Bit lamp
Word lamp
N-phase lamp

View history alarm If you select [Header] ▶[Edit Header] ▶[From Header Text] in View
history alarm object and double-click the Header Setting window, you can
add a text table.

4. Select a text.

Notes

You can set the text display depending on the device value.

4-27
 4.Editing common data

Registering text value in text table automatically:

1. Create an object that has a text value.

2. Select [TOOL] ▶ [Register object caption to TextTable automatically].

3. If the Setting window is enabled, create a text table name, select the edit language, and press the OK
button, a text to add is created as a new text table.

• After this, if you select the added text table, you can check that the text values have been registered
automatically.

Notes

4-28
 4.Editing common data

• You can register up to 10,001 texts in the text table. In order to enter more than 10,001 values, you
shall create a new text table.
• You can create a total of 255 text pages in the text table, you can change ID and name on the tree. ID
is between 1 and 65534. (1 to 255 for the economic type)
• If the following message appears when you delete the text table page from the tree or change ID, the
corresponding text table is used within a project. In this case, you shall first find and delete the
elements used through Find/Replace All Texts or change them to a text table with a different ID.

4-29
 4.Editing common data

4.1.3 Logging
Logging performs the action of writing the specified device value in a file when the condition specified by
a user is met. In addition, you can measure the change in device values through the stored data and
express values using viewing logging and logging trend graph. For details, refer to <4.3.11 Logging
view object>.

Type Description
Periodic logging (hour) When the time set by a user comes, it operates by the specified number of
times in a certain period. If the repeat timer reaches the specified limit
value, the specified device value is saved as a file.
The following example shows three logging data, which operate at 10-
minute interval.

Periodic logging (bit When the specified logging device (bit) operates (ON or OFF), you can
device) perform logging operation and specify the cycle and times of logging.

Conditional logging (bit When the specified logging device (bit) operates (ON or OFF), perform
device) logging operation and carry out the operation only once when the device
value is changed. (not logged periodically)

4-30
 4.Editing common data

Creating logging:

1. Select [Logging] in the Project window to enable the Logging window.

2. Double-click a cell in the enabled Logging window to enable the Logging Setting window.
 Logging Device:

Type Description
Number It refers to logging number.

4-31
 4.Editing common data

Type Description
Target device It specifies the device you want to log.
Enter a device directly or a device using the keypad on the right
side of Input window.

Device count It reads devices continuously as many as the number specified from
the start device.
- If the target device is Bit: You can set up to 64.
- If the target device is Word: You can set up to 100.

Description Enter the logging state which a user set.

4-32
 4.Editing common data

 Logging setting:

Type Description

Period It specifies the period for logging.

You can make a setting a user wants such as hourly, daily, weekly,
monthly, yearly, and once.
For example, if a user selects “hourly”, you can check and save the
value every hour for a specific device.

Device(BIT) [Periodic Enter a specific bit device, and then record the corresponding device
logging] value for the set operation (rising or falling edge).

Repeat by Start logging and then specify the number of recording. (maximum of
255 times)

4-33
 4.Editing common data

Type Description

Repeat period When the periodic logging condition is met, repeat logging at the
corresponding time interval.

Device(BIT) Enter the bit device, which is to perform conditional logging operation,
[Conditional logging] and record the corresponding device value in the file upon set
operation (rising or falling edge, upon change).

Logging progress It is a function to display the progress of logging.

(ON state until completion of 1 cycle)

Stop logging It is a function used to stop the logging operation in progress. After
using the corresponding function, the Repeat setting function does not
operate. (The corresponding function operates at the rising edge.)

Logging area full When the logging data storage area (NVRAM) is full, the
corresponding device performs ‘ON’operation.

Clear logging area Deletion is performed when the corresponding device turns on.

Area clear complete When data in the logging data storage space (NVRAM) has been
deleted, the corresponding device is set to “ON”.

Notes

• When set to periodic logging, you can start a logging at the time set by a user and repeat it the
specified number of times, and you can repeat it up to 100 times to use it.
• When you set a periodic logging using a bit device, you can set the logging by number of ti
mes specified in time.
Eg.: Periodic logging repeat 4

Logging start timer On

Logging start
timer On

Repeat timer
On

Operating
logging

logging

Repeat cycle

4-34
 4.Editing common data

• Storage area/logging backup/CSV format

Type Description
Storage for backup data You can set the logging backup data storage location.
For details on how to save a backup file, refer to <4.7.1.1 Path structure
when backing up logging>.

4-35
 4.Editing common data

Type Description

Use ring buffer If you set the corresponding function, new data is saved while the old
data is deleted first when the storage space is full.
The storage
location is moved
and logging data is Logging data 1

Logging data 2
recorded in the
first space.
Logging data 3

Logging data 4

Logging data 5

.
.
.
.
.
Logging data n

You cannot use this function with the [Auto backup if area full] function at
the same time.

Do not clear log area at If a user uses the logging backup function, the logging data is deleted
backup while the logging data is moved to the backup storage. However, if you set
this option, logging data will not be deleted even if it is backed up. If you
use this option when using the logging trend graph, you can view the
logging history.

Auto backup When the logging area is used all, specify the saved data to the specified
if area full storage medium. You cannot use with [Use Storage Area Circulation
Buffer ] function at the same time.
Logging Data 1 Logging Data 1
Logging Data 2
Logging Data3
.
Logging Data n

Logging area full Delete after Write first logging

bit on logging backup data

Backup Device Performs the function to back up the data stored in the logging data
storage area (NVRAM) to the specified storage medium.

Send E-mail after If logging data backup is completed, this performs the function to send by

4-36
 4.Editing common data

backup done email.

Complete device If the backup to the specified storage medium is completed, the device
turns “ON”.

Setting CSV file format The corresponding function is used when you change the format of the
CSV file to be backed up. For details, refer to <Common logging
settings>.

File type Select a backup file format (CSV, encrypted CSV, CSV+PDF).
You can open a CSV file using applications such as Notepad or MS Excel.
You can convert encrypted CSV files using a CSV file converter ( [TOOL]
▶ [CSV File Converter] ). For details, refer to <4.6 Use CSV File
Converter>.

File name device It performs the function to specify the file name of a backup data. It converts
4 device values from the specified word device into character a text and
specifies them as file names. If you fail to read the file name device data via
communication or there is no text value in the read data, it is saved as a
“noname.CSV” file.

BYTE swap of file name If you use the file name device, determines whether to use BYTE Swap of
text value.

File name length Set the length (in bytes) of a file name.

Append data to CSV file When logging is backed up to a CSV file, only the content is appended to
the end of the previously backed up file to back up the file.
For a logging that is appended to the end of a CSV file to be backed up,
save the file without creating a date folder in the logging folder by default. If
you check [Create file in date folder structure],
a date folder structure is created and files are backed up. The date folder
structure method refers to the method described in <4.7 File Backup
Using External Storage>.

Maximum Backup Data Set the number of logging to be saved in a CSV file (Max. 65,000).
in CSV

Create Logging No. When logging, a number directory is created and a backup is done under
Directory it. If you disable this function, a backup file is created without creating a
number directory.
However, you can create and disable only one of several loggings.

4-37
 4.Editing common data

 CSV + PDF file backup function

Type Description
File type Select a backup file format (CSV, encrypted CSV, CSV+PDF).
You can open a CSV file using applications such as Notepad or MS
Excel. You can convert encrypted CSV files using a CSV file
converter ( [TOOL] ▶ [CSV File Converter] ). For details, refer to
<4.6 Use CSV File Converter>.

Backup device If the file type is set to “CSV + PDF file”CSV file: Saves the data
stored in the logging data storage area (NVRAM) to the specified
storage medium.
• PDF file: Appends the CSV file content to the template file (.xls
format) entered by a user and backs up it in a PDF file. The PDF

4-38
 4.Editing common data

Type Description
file name and path are the same as the CSV file, and the
extension is PDF.
If the “Auto backup if area full” option is set, CSV file backup is
performed, and PDF files are backed up as well.

Complete device It is turned on if both CSV file and PDF file backup to the speci
fied storage medium are successful.

Setting CSV file format It is used to change the format of the CSV file to be backed u
p. For details, refer to <Common logging setting>.

File name device It performs the function to specify the file name of a backup dat
a. It converts 4 device values from the specified word device int
o character a text and specifies them as file names. If you fail t
o read the file name device data via communication or there is
no text value in the read data, it is saved as a “noname.CSV” fil
e.

File name length Set the length (in bytes) of a file name.

BYTE swap of file name If you use the file name device, determines whether to use BYT
E swap of the text value.

PDF Report - Device in It displays the backup status of a PDF file. If PDF file backup is
Progress of Backup in progress, the device turns “ON”. If completed, it turns “OFF”.
Unlike CSV backup, you cannot back up a PDF file in several fil
es at the same time, and the next PDF backup is performed onl
y after the previous PDF backup is completed. Therefore, if the
device turns “ON” during backup when you request a PDF file b
ackup, the PDF backup function is not performed.

PDF Report - Template File A format file to output the content backed up in a CSV file. For
the template file format, only.xls (97-2003 excel) format is suppor
ted. A user can output the data they want to output in the templ
ate file as a PDF file in a way to enter data as abbreviation in
a template file.
- List of available reserved words

Reserved w Input value Required o

ord r not

#FILEDATE Creation date of a PDF file X

#NUMBER Total number of logging X

(value of num. log in CSV file)

4-39
 4.Editing common data

Type Description

#DATE Logging time (the value of Date row in C X

SV file)

#STATUS Logging success or not (Status row value X

in CSV file)

#DATA0, Logging data O

DATA1, … (Example: #DATA0 => Logging value of in
dex 0)

- Import (…): performs [Import] for template file into a project. If

re-edit or change a template file you set, you shall perform [Im
port] again so that it can be applied to the project. The date a
nd time of the last application of the corresponding template file
is displayed on the screen when you perform [Import].
- Export: A user can [Export] the template file set/saved in the p
roject to the path to which he or she wants to save.

PDF Report - Font Name
It sets the font used when backing up PDFs. You can set only
one font regardless of the number of CSV + PDF file backups.
Whether Korean, English, or multi-language are supported is diffe
rent depending on the font. If the set font does not support the
language in the template file,
the characters may be broken or invisible.

Delete file if disk is full If the “Delete old file if disk is full” option is set in the logging d
ata area, the oldest CSV and PDF files are deleted.

Models supporting PDF The PDF backup function supports only the following models.
backup - iXP, iXP2, LXP series

Notes

• Template file
- You shall enter all reserved words (#NUMBER, #DATE, #STATUS, #DATA0, #DATA…, etc.)
which output CSV file data in the template file in the same row.
- You can convert only the first sheet of the template file into PDF.
• PDF size and data printing size
- The converted PDF size is A4 size, and the orientation is based on that of the template file
(.xls). (You can modify it in print setting)
- The maximum number of 255 columns can be printed. If the row exceeds A4 size, it is print
ed on the next page continuously.

4-40
 4.Editing common data

- Text and image width and so on in cells printed on PDF are determined according to the rat
io compared to the fixed size (based on A4).
• Font name
- Some Korean fonts are not compatible with the PDF conversion function, so that Korean text
may not be printed properly in PDF. At this time, use compatible fonts such as the ones belo
w.
- Fonts compatible with Korean: Arial, Batang, Dotum, Segoe UI, GungSuh
• Items that can be converted to PDF
- Some of the character formats (letter color, fill color, etc.) are supported, but character styles
such as Bold and Italic are not supported.
- They support merged cells.
- They support image files (bmp, png, gif, jpg formats).
- Data such as function, chart, graphs, and so on other than text and image is not converted t
o PDF.

4-41
 4.Editing common data

 Common logging setting:

Set the sizes of all logging areas not to exceed the maximum size of each logging.

b
a

Type Setting
a. Logging Common It sets the size of the data storage area for each logging.
Property

b. Logging Area Size You can try to calculate the size of the area required for storing
logging data.
• Bit: [(Repeat count) * Device count + 44] + 40.
The storage size that occurs at once is fixed as 24 bytes 4 words:
[(Repeat count 40) * (Device count *2 + 44)] + 40.
For word, one 16 byte header is recorded before logging.
• Double word: [(Repeat count) * (Device count *4 + 44)] + 40

Notes

• The maximum size of logging space is 510 KB.

4-42
 4.Editing common data

Setting a storage medium for logging data backup

1 Select [Project Tab] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [Storage Settings].

2 Set the backup location for logging data.

Backup data display format:

1 Select [Logging] in the Project tab.

2 The logging window is enabled.
3 Select [Backup Area/Buffer Manage/Backup CSV Format].

4-43
 4.Editing common data

4 Specify a backup data storage location.

5 Select [Setting CSV file format].
6 You can set the following options.

4-44
 4.Editing common data

Type Description
User Defined Data You can specify the number of data columns, the start index, and the
Column/Start Index/Size size.
Setting

Add Date/Time By default, the Date/Time display column exists, but this is an option for
a user who wants to separate and use the date and time columns.

BYTE Swap Use of String If you check ‘BYTE Swap Use of String Data’when the display format is
Data a text, the Byte Swap is processed when saving text data.

From Text Table It sets to import the header information from the text table.

Header It sets the header of the backup file. If a user selects [Refer from text
table], he or she can select [Header] to select a text.

Data format You can set the time and data display format.

Digits You can select the number of digits of the data to be displayed.
If the display format is text, it indicates the number of bytes to read data
with.

4-45
 4.Editing common data

Type Description
Decimal digits Enter the display number of decimals of the data.

Zero fill Depending on the data type, fill with 0s according to the digits.

Apply all the logging You can change the backup format as set content in all loggings by the
current user.

Close It saves the setting content and close the Setting window.

Data information The number of data that you can view varies according to the number
of logging devices in [Basic Logging Setting]. However, the number of
data columns is changed to the set number of data columns while
[User Defined Data Column/Start Index/Size Setting] is checked.

Number of data columns You can only enter while [User Defined Data Column/Start Index/Size
Setting] is checked, and the number of data columns is changed to the
number of entered columns.

Language Select a language when saving the logging file.

If you specify the display format of logging data as text or specify the
text type of the report header as indirect when backing up the logging,
the data is interpreted as a Unicode value and saved as a text. When a
text is stored on the device, it is stored in multibyte format, and when
you convert this multibyte format into Unicode format, a conversion
table, that is, code page is required. The code page differs depending
on a language, such as whether the corresponding multibyte value
stores Korean, Chinese, or Japanese. Therefore, it specifies a
language when setting logging backup.
You can select this language as one of the languages added in [Project
Properties] - [Language] - [Default runtime language]. Therefore, in
order to display logging data in Korean upon logging backup, you shall
first specify Korean and a font to display Korean in [Project Properties]
- [Language] - [Default runtime language]. And, when setting the
logging backup, you shall select the language as ‘Korean’.
For details, refer to <2.2.2.6 Language>.

Header Row No. It specifies the row count related to string information to display at the
front of the page in report format. If you press the ‘Apply Row/Column’
button on the right, the header row is displayed in the corresponding

4-46
 4.Editing common data

Type Description
count on the grid.

Header Column No. It specifies the column count related to string information to display at
the front of the page in report format. If you press the ‘Apply
Row/Column’ button on the right, the header column is displayed in the
corresponding count on the grid.

Report header string Set the string information to display at the front of the page in report
information format. If you click a cell, the dialog below where you can set the string
shows up. You can set direct or indirect type. For direct, enter the string
to display, and for indirect, specify the string device to read and the
string size.

4-47
 4.Editing common data

4.1.4 Recipe
Use the recipe function to store or reuse process data. You can read or write data from consecutive
many devices. Set to read and write the device to run a recipe.
There are two types of recipes (basic and extended file recipes).

Item Description
Default It outputs data from non-volatile memory or external memory in XGT Panel.
When XGT Panel power goes out, the latest data is saved in NVRAM. The
saved data is used for read and write functions when device monitoring is
resumed.

File The data is saved as a CSV file. You can save a file to external devices such as
USB memory, expanded memory, or SD card.
The file recipe name is created as below.
• /USB1/XP_RecipeExt/XPREX00000.CSV
• /Storage Card/XP_RecipeExt/XPREX00000.CSV
• /USB Storaget/XP_RecipeExt/XPREX00000.CSV

For the CSV file creation method and precautions, refer to [Creating the exte
nded file recipe data file]

4-48
 4.Editing common data

Basic recipe
The following is an example to explain the read and write functions using the base recipe.

Read device function:

Read device reads data from the start device specified in [Basic Recipe Number Device] to multiple
devices specified at the rising edge or falling edge.

4-49
 4.Editing common data

Recipe 1, Block 2

Operation before Operation after

4-50
 4.Editing common data

Write device function:

Write device writes the data stored in [Block number device] from the start device specified in [Basic
recipe number device] to the specified multiple devices at the rising or falling edge.

4-51
 4.Editing common data

Recipe 1, Block 2

Operation before Operation after

4-52
 4.Editing common data

Creating basic recipe:

1 Right-click [Basic Recipe] in the Project window.

2 Click [Insert].

3 Set the following properties.

Items Description
Name Recipe name. You can set up to 255. (1~255)
If you want to change the name, select the recipe name in Project window
and click [Rename].

Device Specify the device address to send the recipe data.

Data type It displays the device data type. When you put a value in a data block, the
value changes according to the data type.

Description Enter the recipe description.

count Specify the device count. The recipe data is continuously sent from many
devices you specified.

Block count Specify the data block count. Possible maximum count is 255 (0-254).

a. Device It displays a list of device. The recipe uses continuous data and each device
address cannot be specified.

b. Data The block number starts at 0 and cannot be changed. If you shorten the block
number, the data of the largest block number is deleted first.

Setting Method Continuous: Designates device addresses consecutively.

4-53
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Each: Designate the device address individually. In this case, the device type
can also be specified individually.

Block Name Set the block name

Recipes can be written/read by block number or block name.
The block name setting method is as follows.
Direct: Write the block name directly.
Indirect: Select a block name from the text table.

Notes

You cannot read and write at the same time. When read/write devices are in the same condition at the
same time, write is performed first.

4-54
 4.Editing common data

Update and maintenance of initial value recipe data

The recipe data file is saved in the non-volatile memory of XGT Panel or an external storage. The most
recently saved data is retained even when the power is turned off. When you start monitoring the device
after power on again, the last saved data is used for subsequent read and write operation.

If recipe data is specified to be saved in an external storage other than NVRAM, the recipe data is
recorded in the storage in a file format when you start monitoring. The file content is updated when the
Read recipe data function is performed. Changes are retained in the storage as a file for a long time, and
the file is created again when the storage is removed or other storage is connected. At this time, the
previously updated data is not maintained and the recipe data is initialized to the content set initially in
LXP-Designer.

Recipe data is not deleted when you download partially or change the project for download. However,
the saved recipe data is deleted if you select [Delete all existing monitor data] function upon all
download.

4-55
 4.Editing common data

Initial recipe data backup and recovery

Initial recipe data is backed up in CSV file format. One backup file is created for each recipe. To recover
the initial recipe data from the selected file, select [Explorer and Editor]  [Browse and send basic
recipe] among the special switch types, and select a backup file in the Explorer object.

For detailed information on saving recipe backup files, refer to <4.7.1.2 Path structure when backing
up a recipe>.

The initial recipe data recovery may fail in the following situations. For information on data transfer error,
see [Error Device].

• If the recipe backup file selected in the file explorer is a backup file created in a project different from
the current one
• If the recipe setting has been changed since the time the backup file selected in the file explorer was
created.
• If a user modified the recipe backup file arbitrarily, or a file was broken due to a problem with the
storage

Recipe backup device

Touch [Recover basic recipe] of the

special switch for the selected backup file
In the [File Explorer].

4-56
 4.Editing common data

Setting basic recipe properties:

1 Double-click [Recipe Property] in the Project window. The Recipe Property tab opens in Edit window
area.

2 Set the following properties:

• <Recipe Common Settings>
Items Description
Trigger device to write Specify a device to write data. Set the condition to trigger an action (rising
edge or falling edge). Enter the device address manually or press the
keypad button to the right of the device input area.

Trigger device to read Specify a device to read data. Set the condition to trigger an action (rising
edge or falling edge). Enter the device address manually or press the
keypad button to the right of the device input area.

4-57
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Recipe type device Specify a device to select the recipe type. If the least significant bit of the
device is 0, the base recipe is executed. If the least significant bit is 2, the
extended file recipe is executed. Enter the device address manually or
press the keypad button to the right of the device input area.

Read/Write complete When the transfer is completed, this bit device turns on. Enter the device
device address manually or press the keypad button to the right of the device
input area.

Base recipe storage path Specify the location to save the base recipe.
(flash, expanded memory, USB, SD card)
You can set the storage location in the storage setting of the Project
Property window.

Error device When a problem occurs during data transfer, the bit device turns on. Enter
the device address manually or press the keypad button to the right of the
device input area.

Error No. device If a problem occurs during data transfer, a defined error number is saved
in the device. A list of error numbers is as follows:
Number Description
1 Damaged data exists.

2 The data does not match the current transfer

conditions.

3 The number of data exceeded the number

specified by the transfer condition.

4 The decimal point position used within the data

exceeded the decimal point position specified by
the transfer condition.

5 The data value exceeded the maximum value of

the format specified by the transfer condition.

6 The data value has not reached the minimum

value of the format specified by the transfer
condition.

11 The number of the initial recipe cannot be read.

12 There is no recipe that corresponds to the

currently specified number.

13 The number of blocks of the initial recipe cannot

4-58
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

be read.

14 There is no recipe block that corresponds to the

currently specified number.

15 The transfer condition number of the file recipe

cannot be read.

16 There is no file recipe transfer condition that

corresponds to the currently specified number.

17 The file number of the file recipe cannot be read.

18 There is no file recipe file that corresponds to

the currently specified number.

19 The data of the file recipe is invalid.

20 The total number of data in the file recipe is less

than the number of data specified by the transfer
condition.

21 No file recipe data has been recorded.

22 The specified initial recipe backup file is a

backup file created by other project.

23 The contents of specified initial recipe backup

file are invalid.

24 The specified initial recipe backup file number is

invalid.

25 The block size of specified initial recipe backup

file is invalid.

26 The block status of specified initial recipe

backup file is not normal.

27 The contents of the specified initial recipe

backup file were not created in the data area.

28 The memory of the specified initial recipe has

not been assigned.

4-59
 4.Editing common data

• <Base Recipe Settings>

Items Description
Recipe No. device Specify the base recipe number device to execute a recipe when the
condition is met. It reads the word value (unsigned 16 bits) of the device
to execute a recipe. Enter the device address manually or press the
keypad button to the right of the device input area.

Block No. device Specify the block number device to execute a recipe when the condition is
met. It reads the word value (unsigned 16 bits) of the device to execute a
recipe. You can use this function only in the base recipe. Enter the device
address manually or press the keypad button to the right of the device
input area.

Backup trigger device Specify a device for backing up the recipe data stored in storage media
such as USB memory, SD card, and expanded memory. Set the
conditions (rising edge or falling edge) for backing up data.

Backup complete device When the backup is completed, the bit device turns on.

Backup storage path Specify the backup path of the initial data. You can set the backup path in
[Storage Usage Settings] of the project property as well. For details on
saving the backup file, refer to <4.7.1.2 Path structure when backing up
a recipe>.

Base recipe storage Specify the path to save the initial recipe. If you select NVRAM memory,
data is saved in XGT Panel. If you select other path, it is saved in the
installed external storage.

4-60
 4.Editing common data

Extended File Recipe

Edit the extended file recipe condition and data individually. For data, LXP-Designer does not
provide the edit function, and a user shall write in CSV format and use it. The following [Creating the
extended file recipe data file] section describes how to create CSV file and precautions in detail. If the
device specified in [Recipe type device] among recipe common settings is 2, the extended file recipe
operates. The following describes the read/write operation for the extended file recipe.

Read device operation

When [Use read start device] device turns on, start extended file recipe read operation. The procedure
for reading the extended file recipe is as follows: You cannot perform read and write operations at the
same time. When the recipe read and write conditions are met at the same time, the read operation is
executed first. The Read data procedure is as follows:

4-61
 4.Editing common data

Example for reading extended file recipe:

[Settings Item]

(1) [Recipe Type Device] : 2 ( 0: Base recipe, 1: File recipe, 2: extended file recipe)

(2) Extended file recipe [Condition Number Device] : 2

(3) Extended file recipe [File Number/Name Device] : 3

(4) extended file recipe [Block Number Device] : 4

(5) Extended file recipe [Number of Blocks Device] : 3

(6) Extended file recipe save path : USB memory

For setting as above, if the device set in [Use read start device] in Recipe Property turns on, read 3 data
from HW00100 set in condition no. 2 and update in the 4th block of the XPREX003.csv file of the USB
memory as shown below.

[Data Format Setting]

Set the data format setting of condition number 2 as follows: Set unsigned DEC/real number/string for
a total of 14Byte data in a display format and set other formats as follows:

[CSV Data File Setting]

Set CSV data file up as follows: (For details, refer to [Creating the extended file recipe data file].) For
extended file recipe, the file storage location is <storage root path>\XP_RecipeExt\, and the file name

4-62
 4.Editing common data

rules are the same as XPREX001.csv, XPREX002.csv ~ XPREX999.csv. Since the file number device
is 3 in this example, the value of the XPREX003.csv file is updated.

You must specify the first row as header string. The second row is the actual data, and the first row is
treated as block 0, the second row as block 1, and the third row as block 2. Therefore, in the figure
below, row 6 is treated as block 4 and the value is updated. If the number of blocks is 3, the values in
rows 6 through 8 corresponding to blocks 4, 5, and 6 in the figure below are updated.

If the XPREX003.csv file does not exist, the rows corresponding to blocks 0 to 3 are inserted into
blank rows and the value is written onto the location of block 4.

For details on saving recipe backup files, refer to <4.7.1.2 Path structure when backing up a
recipe>.

4-63
 4.Editing common data

Write device operation

When the [Use write start device] device is set to On (rising edge) or Off (falling edge) during recipe
common setting, writing of extended file recipe data starts.

The Write data procedure is as follows:

4-64
 4.Editing common data

Example for writing extended file recipe:

[Settings Item]

(1) [Recipe Type Device] : 2 ( 0: Base recipe, 1: File recipe, 2: extended file recipe)

(2) Extended file recipe [Condition Number Device] : 2

(3) Extended file recipe [File Number/Name Device] : 3

(4) extended file recipe [Block Number Device] : 4

(5) Extended file recipe [Number of Blocks Device] : 3

(6) Extended file recipe save path : USB memory

If set as above, when the device set in [Trigger device to write] in the recipe property turns on, 3 data of
block 4 in row 6 of USB memory XPREX003.csv file is updated in HW100 specified as the device of the
extended file recipe condition no. 2.

[Data Format Setting]

Set the data format setting of condition number 2 as follows: Set unsigned DEC/real number/string for
a total of 14Byte data in a display format and set other formats as follows:

[CSV Data File Setting]

Set the CSV data file as follows: (For details, refer to [Creating the extended file recipe data file].) For
extended file recipe, the file storage location is <Storage device root path>\XP_RecipeExt\, and the file

4-65
 4.Editing common data

name rules are the same as XPREX001.csv, XPREX002.csv ~ XPREX999.csv. Since the file number
device is 3 in this example, the value of the XPREX003.csv file is written.

A header string must be entered in the first row. The second row is the actual data, and the first row is
treated as block 0, the second row as block 1, and the third row as block 2. Therefore, in the figure
below, row 6 is treated as block 4 to read the value in row 6 in the figure below, and convert it into
binary data, and writing the value to the specified conditional device. If the number of blocks is 3, read
the values from rows 6 to 8 corresponding to blocks 4, 5, and 6 in the figure below, convert the data,
and write the value to the specified condition device.

If the XPREX003.csv file does not exist, there is no file to read data from. Therefore, the write
operation fails.

For details on saving recipe backup files, refer to <4.7.1.2 Path structure when backing up a
recipe>.

4-66
 4.Editing common data

Setting extended file recipe property:

1. Double-click [Recipe Property] in the Project window. The Recipe Property tab is displayed in the Edit
Window area.

2. Set the following properties.

For detailed description of <Recipe Common Settings>, refer to File Recipe.
The following is a description of the items related to the extended file recipe.
Items Description
Condition No. device Specify a word device to save the extended file recipe condition
number.

File No./Name device Specify a word device to save the extended file recipe file number.
Basically, it is used as a file number device, but if you check “Use as
file name device”, it is recognized as name device and you can specify
a recipe file by saving the file name as many bytes as you specify.

4-67
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Block No. device Specify a word device to save the extended file recipe block number.
Block count device If you use the block count device, you can read or write a recipe from
the block number stored in the block number device by the number of
blocks stored in the block number device. The block count device is not
used by default, which means that one block specified in the block
number device is read or written.

File recipe storage path Specify the location to save the extended file recipe data. (extended
memory, USB memory, SD card)

Viewing Extended File Recipe Condition screen:

Select [Recipe]▶[Extended File Recipe]▶[Extended File Recipe Condition] in Project window.

Items Description
Condition No. Enter an extended file recipe condition number. It is valid from 1 to 100.

Device Enter an extended file recipe condition device. The read/write operation
writes data read from this device to a file or writes data read from a file to a
conditional device. Enter a word device.

Data Format Setting It specifies the data format of a device individually.

Name Enter a file name.

Comment Enter a comment.

4-68
 4.Editing common data

The following is a description of the setting window which shows up when you click the data format
setting button.

Items Description
No. The checkbox in the number means skip row.
This means that if you uncheck, the data in the corresponding column is
skipped to be read or written. The data in all columns are read or written by
default.

Data size Select 16 bits or 32 bits.

Display format Specify a format to convert the device value to a text.

You can specify unsigned real number/signed real number/real
number/hexadecimal/binary/BCD/real number/text.

Digits Specify the digits of a value.

If the specified digits is exceeded, ‘*’ is displayed.

Decimal digits Specify the number of decimals of the data.

Zero fill Fill in the blank of the data digit with ‘0’.

String length(Bytes) It can be entered only when the display format is text in bytes.
You can enter from 1 to 255.

Data separator You can specify the characters which separate the data.
You can select the character among , ; :.

4-69
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• Valid extended file recipe numbers are 1 – 100.

• When setting the data format, the total device capacity cannot exceed 2048 bytes.
• Valid number count is 1 - 64.
• Valid decimal digits are 0 - 63.
• Decimals digit setting cannot be greater than the number count.

Creating extended file recipe data file:

While a CSV file is normal text files, it is separated by commas (,). Therefore, you can create it with a
basic text editor program such as general Notepad or Notepad++, but you can create it in Microsoft
Excel. However, when saving the content, it shall be saved in other name as shown below.

The name rules for extended file recipe are as follows, and you can use a total of 999 extended file
recipe files from 001 to 999. The location path of the file is <Storage device root path>\XP_RecipeExt\.

XPREX 001. CSV

File Name

File No.: 001~999

File Extender: CSV

The figure below is an example for setting extended file recipe condition.

4-70
 4.Editing common data

Assuming that the extended file recipe condition is are set as above, you can create the extended file
recipe data file (CSV file) as follows: However, you need to pay attention to the blank cells in the
example below.

If the display format is specified as text, it can be left as blank cell. In this case, it is treated as a NULL-
text. However, if the display format is specified as a numeric such as decimal/hexadecimal/real number,
it is treated as an (undefined) error because you cannot determine the value cannot be set if left blank.
Other than this, there are the following precautions when you create an extended file recipe data file.

Notes

• You can set and enter up to 255 data in one block.

• You can enter up to 999 blocks in one file.
• One file size can be up to 1 MB.
• The number of characters in one data cannot exceed 100 characters.
• The number of characters in one data block cannot exceed 10240 characters.
• If the number count becomes too many when you edit data in Microsoft Excel, they can be divided
into exponent part and mantissa automatically, such as 1.11E+29, to be displayed. In this case, you
shall specify the display format of the cell as text and edit, and then save it.

4-71
 4.Editing common data

An error may occur if the data does not comply with the restrictions specified in [Notes], if the data in the
CSV file does not match the settings edited in LXP-Designer, or if the pre-conditions are not met when
operating in other devices. In this case, the following error number is displayed in [Error No. device].

Error Summary Notes

Number
1 Null data
2 Inappropriate data
3 Exceeded digits
4 Exceeded decimals digits
Value is greater than the
5 maximum value of the display
format
Value is less than the minimum
6 the maximum value of the specified display
value of the display format
Exceeded the maximum block
29
number of an extended file recipe
If the display format is number, you shall not
leave the cells in the data file as blank, but this
is the case.
This is a case where you cannot convert a
value into the specified display format. For
example, you convert 12F into an unsigned
DEC.
This is a case where you specified the total
number of digits as 5, but the actual number is
6 digits.
This is a case where you specified decimals
digit as 3, the actual number is more than that.
This is a case for a value which is greater than
the maximum value of the specified display
format.
This is a case for a value which is less than
format.
If the block data recording direction is
horizontal, the block count cannot exceed
1000.

4-72
 4.Editing common data

Error Summary Notes

Number
Exceeded the maximum count of
30
data of an extended file recipe
Exceeded the maximum count of
31
an extended file recipe block string
Exceeded the maximum count of
32 an extended file recipe value
string
Exceeded the maximum size per
33
extended file recipe file
An extended file recipe file does
34
not exist.
Cannot access an extended file
35
recipe file.
Cannot create an extended file
36
recipe file.
Cannot occupy an extended file
37
recipe storage.
Failed to read the 'recipe number’
38
of the extended file recipe
Wrong 'recipe number’ of the
39
extended file recipe
Failed to read the 'Block number’
40
of the extended file recipe
If the block data recording direction is
horizontal, the data count in one block cannot
exceed 255.
The character count in one block data cannot
exceed 10*1024 char.
The character count in one data cannot
exceed 100 char.
The size of one recipe data file cannot exceed
1MB.
If the recipe data file cannot be found or if the
directory and storage containing the file cannot
be found upon the recipe write operation.
If there is a recipe data file, but the file is
already occupied by the system and cannot be
accessed.
A recipe data file object shall be created upon
a recipe write or read operation, but this failed
If the recipe file is occupied once while the
extended file recipe is operating, the
occupancy status is not cleared until
monitoring is finished. When you touch the
safety removal switch, the occupied state is
cleared. However, when this recipe data file is
occupied, it occupies the storage first, but at
this time it failed
If you fail to read the extended file recipe
condition number or file number device value
If reading the extended file recipe condition
number or file number device value was
successful, but the corresponding file does not
exist or corresponding condition does not exist
If you fail to read the extended file recipe
'Block number device value

When writing the extended file recipe, the

Wrong 'block number’ of the
41 value shall be read from the recipe data file. At
extended file recipe
this time, reading the block number device

4-73
 4.Editing common data

Error Summary Notes

Number
value was successful, but the block does not
exist.

The internal buffer is operated in several

The buffer is insufficient during
42
extended file recipe serialization.
The number of extended file
43
recipe data does not match
Cannot interpret the extended file
44
recipe entity number.
Buffer size does not match during
45 the extended file recipe writing
operation.
Cannot interpret the extended file
46
recipe data.
There is no data in the extended
47
file recipe file.
places to provide the extended file recipe
function, and the size of this buffer is
insufficient.
When reading the extended file recipe, data is
written to the recipe data file, but the number
of data does not match with the existing data.
When reading and writing the extended file
recipe, the block number cannot be interpreted
in the setting that uses the block number
column of the recipe data.
When writing extended file recipe, the text in
the recipe data file is read and converted into
binary data. However, the buffer size used at
this time is not correct.
If the data in the recipe data file does not
match the display format defined by the user in
LXP-Designer
If the recipe data file exists but there is no data
in the corresponding file

4-74
 4.Editing common data

4.1.5 Flow alarm

As shown in the figure below, you can use a flow alarm with a text displayed at the bottom of
XGT Panel screen under certain condition.

[Example: flow alarm by multi-bit condition]

4-75
 4.Editing common data

Creating a flow alarm:

1 Double-click [Flow Alarm] in Project window.

2 Set the following setting items.

Items Description
Device count Set the number of alarm devices to monitor.

Alarm Device Select Continuous or Single.

No. of alarm occurred Set a word device to save the number of alarm. Displays the total
number of alarms that have occurred.

Background color Set the background color of the flow alarm area.

Flow alarm location Set the flow alarm message location.

Specify screen bottom, screen center, screen top, Y axis (Pixel).
If you specify the Y axis, the Y axisis the axis when the first pixel at
the top is 0.

Display Mode Set the flow alarm display method.

• Redraw at occurred A new message is redrawn when an alarm
occurs.
• After current display list: When an alarm occurs, the flow alarm
is displayed after all the currently displayed alarms are displayed.

4-76
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Flow speed Set the flow alarm speed in 2-1000ms. The smaller the number, the
faster the flow alarm moves.

Move pixel Set the movement unit in 1-50 pixels. The higher the number, the
faster the message moves.

Font size Set the flow alarm message font size.

Message Space You can specify the interval between messages.

Blink You can set the blink of the flow alarm.

Device Specify a device to monitor. You can use only bit devices in flow
alarm.

Data Type Since you can use only bit devices, you cannot set the flow alarm
device type.

Bit Condition Set the alarm occurrence condition. (On/Off)

TextTable Name Specify the text table where you refer to the flow alarm message.

Text Index Specify the text index in a text table to use.

Preview Shows the flow alarm message in advance.

Notes

• The base setting displays the flow alarms on all screens when XGT Panel is operating.
• You can register up to 10,000 flow alarms.
• The specified bit device continues to be monitored by the flow alarm. When the bit is On, an alarm
occurs. When the bit is Off, the alarm is cleared.
• If two or more flow alarms occur at the same time, the messages are displayed sequentially at the
bottom of the screen.
• A flow alarm message is displayed in the language specified in the Project Setting window. If a text
exists in another language in the text table, a message is displayed in the other language.

4-77
 4.Editing common data

• You can set on each screen not to display a specific alarm.

• A value entered when setting the interval between messages means the number of space characters
inserted between a message and other message. The size of the space character may vary
depending on the set font, and may vary depending on the size of the font as well.
• If there is no text in the set text number, “N/A” is displayed.

4-78
 4.Editing common data

Not displaying the flow alarm in a specific XGT Panel screen:

1 Right-click anywhere on the screen.

2 Select [Screen property].

3 Uncheck [Show Flow Alarm] in Etc.

You can set the flow alarm message in the text table and is referred to in the flow alarm setting screen.
You can set properties such as color and italic in the text table. The flow alarm message is displayed on
the screen in the characteristics set in the text table, and the size is set in the flow alarm setting window.
If you set a background color, the flow alarm area is filled with the background color.
The following is an example where an alarm occurs when the flow alarm #1 (%MX1000) device is On.

4-79
 4.Editing common data

You can check that the flow alarm is displayed in black, italic, and bold text depending on the settings in
the text table.

4-80
 4.Editing common data

4.1.6 History alarm

You can use the history alarm to monitor the device state or display data. You can view or manage
history alarms in View History Alarm or History Alarm Explorer Object. View History Alarm Object
enables you to display and manage occurred alarms in a list. You can use the explorer to view a list of
alarms that have occurred. If there are many alarms, you can select them from the alarm group list and
view them.

The history alarm consists of Alarm list and Alarm group. The time the alarm occurred or cleared, device
address, and details of the alarm are stored in the non-volatile memory.

One alarm group includes alarm groups or alarm lists.

You cannot create a sub-alarm list in the alarm list.

You cannot create an alarm list in parent node.

If you select alarm group 2 in step 2 in Alarm view, the alarms corresponding to alarm list 1 are
displayed. If you select alarm group 1, alarm list 1 and alarms corresponding to alarm list 1 are
displayed.

4-81
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• You can create up to 8 alarm groups in step 1.

• You can create up to 8 alarm groups and alarm lists from each group set in step 1.
• The maximum alarm group is possible up to step 4.

Setting history alarm in general:

1 If you double-click [History Alarm] in Project window, an editable History Alarm Property tab is
displayed.

2 Set the following properties.

4-82
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Backup storage path Specify a path for history alarm backup.
Detailed information about saving the backup file is described in < 4.7.1
Path structure when backing up file >.

Clear alarm area device Specify the history alarm area initialization device in NVRAM.

Clear alarm complete Specify the device where the history alarm area in NVRAM displays the
device initialization complete status.

Alarm count device Specify a device to store the number of alarm occurrence.
(except recover)

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm memory full device This device turns On when the history alarm area is insufficient. Specify a
device.

Non-recoverable alarm Specify a device which shows non-recovered alarms among the alarms
device after powering on occurred after power on

Alarm backup Click the checkbox to configure backup/backup complete device.

Backup start device Specify a device which starts the backup of alarm data. If the backup path
in Project property is set to one of USB memory, extended memory, or SD
card, perform the backup.

Backup complete device When the backup of the alarm data is completed, this device turns on.

4-83
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
File type Select the backup file type (CSV file or encrypted CSV file). Open the
CSV file in S/W such as memo pad and MS Excel. An encrypted CSV file
(extended CSVE file) can be converted to a CSV file using the CSV
converter ([TOOL]-[CSV File Converter]). <4.6 Use CSV file converter>
describes this in detail.

File name device You can change the backup file name. If you put a text in the device, you
can use it as file name.

BYTE swap of file name Function to swap between bytes when saving a file. For example, when
the value stored in the device is ‘H12345678’, it is displayed as
‘H21436587’ in the state where bytes have been swapped.

File name length Specify the number of characters of a file name.

Send E-mail after backup Specify to send an E-mail when the alarm data has been backed up. To
complete use this function, you shall specify a backup device and a backup
complete device. Specify an E-mail address in [Project Property]-[Other
Setting]-[E-Mail Function Setting].

Remove restored alarm Set to delete an alarm from NVRAM after backup is completed.
after backup complete

Automatic backup when If the alarm storage area is insufficient, the alarm is automatically backed
memory full (Remove up.
restored alarm)

Append/Modify data to The alarm backup is added to the last saved CSV file.
backup CSV file

Alarm entry count of Specify the maximum number of alarms in the backup file.
CSV file

Always backup even if A backup file is created even when there is no history alarm.
there were no Alarm log

Do not backup removed The alarms deleted within the history alarm are not included in the alarm
Alarm backup.

Alarm print Set to print history alarm data.

Print start device Specify the device to start printing the history alarm data.

Print complete device The device turns on when history alarm data printing is completed.

Top margin, Bottom Set the space to print history alarm data.
margin, Left margin,

4-84
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Right margin

Acquisition Time Table Set the cycle to acquire history alarm data.

Notes

About the acquisition time table:

Device data moves

Alarm list 0 : Acquisition time 1 second between PLC<->HMI.
Alarm list 1 : Acquisition time 3 seconds

The device value is registered in the alarm list and read from the connected
controller.

• Set up to 10 different sampling times to acquire history alarm data.

• You can set the sampling time from 1 second to 10 seconds, and the interval is at least 0.1 second
unit.
• You can select a sampling time within the alarm list to allow for a flexible acquisition cycle for
different types of devices.
• XGT Panel checks both the alarm list and acquisition cycle. Therefore, a large acquisition cycle of a
project can cause degradation.

4-85
 4.Editing common data

Adding alarm group:

1 Right-click [History Alarm] in the Project window.

2 Click [Insert]. The Alarm Group tab is displayed in the Edit window.

3 Alarm group property is set as follows:

Items Description
Group name Alarm group name

Group ID Alarm group ID number

Display Name You can select a text from the text table or enter it directly in the input
window. If you use the name in the text table, check the correct text in
the text table, and then select a text number. The group name is
displayed in Preview. If you check [Input manually], it is updated to the
alarm group name displayed in Project window.

4-86
 4.Editing common data

Setting history alarm:

1 Right-click the history alarm group in the Project window.

2 Click [Insert]. Alarm List tab is displayed in the Edit window.

3 Set the alarm list as follows:

Items Description
Name Alarm list name

Data type Set the device type. (bit/word)

No. of alarm Set the number of alarms. (up to 10,000)

Text table Select a text table.

Sampling time Select an acquisition cycle in the alarm condition (1-10 seconds).

Alarm list Basically, when you select [Delete all existing monitor data] during partial or full
backup download of the project file, the history alarm data is initialized.
You shall select [Alarm List Backup] to save history alarm data in NVRAM. The
[Alarm List Backup] function saves alarm data in a CSV file when the alarm
backup device turns on.
If the alarm is not restored after an alarm occurs when power turns on again,
you cannot search in View history alarm, and if you save the alarm history as a
CSV file, it is displayed as an “Untraceable”item.

When alarm list backup When alarm list backup turns

ff

4-87
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

Alarm Alarm

Show current It is a function to save the number specified in the alarm list in the selected
selected alarm alarm display device when selecting the alarm displayed in the history alarm
view object. Specify the word device.

Send E-mail Check this function if you want to send history alarm notifications (on
occurrence/upon recovery/all) via e-mail. Details on e-mail settings are
mentioned in <2.2.2.9 Other settings>.
The following is the content displayed in e-mail when an alarm occurs and is
recovered.

4-88
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

* History alarm Information

[Device Alias]
...
[Alarm group name]
...
[Alarm message]
...
[Alarm State]
Occurred

E-mail notification function for alarm is backed up as follows:

* Alarm data has saved as CSV.

[Device alias]
.....

[File Path]

Assign alarm Select a method for specifying the alarm device.

device

Text table index Select a method for specifying the text.

Show detail Set whether to display detailed information in the specified window (Window
window Number Setting: Continuous/Each)

Save alarm Set whether to use the device to store the number of alarms (Device Setting:
count Continuous/Each)

Count of Set the reference device count between 0 and 10.

reference

Parameter Set whether to use a parameter. If you check this item, a parameter can be
edited in the alarm list. If this is executed by the external program set in the
special switch, the stored parameters are sent to an external program. For
details, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special switch>.
When you select a parameter, you shall set the following functions.
• Save at: Set the device so that an input parameter is saved when the history
alarm record is selected in the history alarm view object.
• Type: Set the parameter type (file name, text, number) and the device to save
parameters. If you select 'File Name', you can select a location where the file
is to be saved in the external storage.

4-89
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
• Position: Set a user input parameter to save a file in USB memory, extended
memory, or SD card. (External storage media supported by each XGT Panel
model is different.)
• Text: Set user input parameters saved in the string format in the history alarm
list.
• Number: The user input parameters in the history alarm list are changed to
the numbers in a number type selected by a user. At this time, they are saved
in the storage. Select among unsigned 16-bit, signed 16-bit, unsigned 32-bit,
and signed 32-bit.
Device Enter an alarm device address.

Alarm Condition Set the alarm condition. For bit device, the condition is On or Off. The word
device is a conditional expression.

Window No. When you select the detailed window view, you can enter a window number

Text Index Enter the text number to refer to in the text table.

Alarm Count When you select Save alarm count, you can enter the device for saving the
Device number of times.

Reference Specify the reference device number.

Device

Preview Shows the content of a selected text.

4-90
 4.Editing common data

Setting the occurrence range condition of the history alarm:

1 Specify the data types other than bit in the data type, and then select the alarm condition.

2 Specify the following settings to define the range at which the alarm occurs.

Symbol Function Description

a Style Select an expression style. Each style is shown in the

example below.
• A B (2 Terms): 0 < 0
• A B C (3 Terms, And): 0 ≤ device value < 100
• A B C (3 Terms, Or): 10 > device value or device valu
e >100

b Preview Displays the preview of a conditional statement.

conditional
statement

c Edit conditional Set the operand and operator.

statement

4-91
 4.Editing common data

Symbol Function Description

d Constant Set the fixed value and operand styles.

e $V(Pivot Used as the current alarm monitoring device in the operand

Device) of the conditional statements.
Shown as $V in the preview.

f $(Other Device) Specify a different device value in the operand of the

conditional statement.

Notes

If the word device is set as an alarm monitoring device, an alarm condition is required. The
alarm condition is a single conditional statement with 2 terms or 3 terms composed of
AND/OR.

The conditional statement shall comply with the following requirements:

• Each term is separated by a space.
• The reference device address is displayed as ‘$V’. If you enter ‘$V’, it is automatically
recognized as a reference device when a project file is sent to XGT Panel. At least one of
the current alarm monitoring devices shall be included in conditional statements.
• Each conditional expression shall include at least one direct variable.
• The possible operators are as follows: <, >, <=, >=, =, !=

When the device to be monitored is detected by an alarm condition (bit device: On/Off, word device:
conditional expression), a history alarm occurs, and the alarm time and content are displayed in the
history alarm view object. If the device to be monitored detects that the alarm condition has been
cleared, the time for clearing is displayed in the history alarm view object.

4-92
 4.Editing common data

Monitoring device:

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm clear

Monitoring device:

Alarm

Alarm

A history alarm is saved in the occurrence item. If the same alarm occurs additionally several times, the
number of occurrences is stored in the number of occurrences device.
Since the acquisition time of the same history alarm and the number of registered devices do not match,
the alarm occurrence time will be different.

4-93
 4.Editing common data

Alarm Alarm clear

Condition
determinatio
n after data
transmission Alarm Alarm

The history alarm view object displays what has occurred in the alarm list. If many alarms occur and you
want to know the exact alarm group, you can select an alarm group you want from the alarm explorer
object and view it.
If you want to view alarm details, add a window.

4-94
 4.Editing common data

How to add a window:

1 Check Show detail window in the alarm list.

2 Enter a window number in each alarm.

3 Edit the window in the Project window.

4 Select the detail window view from the history alarm list view among the special switch items.

4-95
 4.Editing common data

5 Select an alarm in the alarm view object, and then press the special switch to launch the detail
window.

Notes

Refer to the history alarm messages from the text table. You can set characteristics such as
font color in the text table.

You can connect to a USB printer, and then print the history alarm using a special switch. For details,
refer to <4.3.2.4 Special switch>.

4-96
 4.Editing common data

4-97
 4.Editing common data

4.1.7 Scheduler
You can use the scheduler function with which you can specify a task in advance. The available
functions include are Bit On, Bit Off, Word value setting, and script execution. You can set up to 32
schedulers, and you can set up to 8 functions for each scheduler.
The example below shows how to use the scheduler.

[You can turn on the device with the Bit On function.]

[You can turn off the device with the Bit Off function.]

4-98
 4.Editing common data

[You can write a value to the word device at the reserved time with WORD Set function.]

[The script function runs a specified script at the reserved time.]

4-99
 4.Editing common data

Creating a scheduler:

1 Click the edit area of the object.

2 Double-click [Scheduler] in the Project window. The Scheduler tab in the edit area opens.
3 Double-click anywhere on the Scheduler tab to open the setting window.

4 Specify the following settings:

Items Description
Condition Set the operation cycle (Every minute/Every hour/Every day/Every week/Every
month/Every year/Once).

Detail Set detailed operation time based on operation cycle (second, minute, hour,
Condition day, week, days of the week, etc.).

Description Add a description of the scheduler.

Function To add a function to the scheduler, select a function and press [>>]. To remove
a function registered in the scheduler, select a function and press [<<]. You can
specify up to eight functions in the scheduler.

4-100
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

• Device: Set a bit or word (16-bit or 32-bit) device to input a value.

• Data type: Select a type of data you want to input in the device.
• Value: Set a value to input in the device.

Up/down Click [Up] or [Down] to assign sequential actions by priority.

4-101
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

4-102
 4.Editing common data

4.1.8 Sound
WAV or MP3 files are executed when the conditions are met, and you can specify up to 512 files. To use
the sound function, you shall connect a speaker to the sound output port.
The following is an example for how to use the sound function.

When the bit

device is same Sound is
as the output.
condition

When the bit

Sound is
device is same
output.
as the
condition

To create a sound setup:

1 Double-click [Sound] in the Project window. The sound tab is displayed in the edit area.

2 Specify the following conditions.

Items Description
External Storage Select a storage location to save a sound file. You can specify a
storage location in the Project Settings window as well.

4-103
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Data Type Enter a data type such as 16-bit sign.

Device Enter a device to run a sound file.

Condition Enter the condition to operate a sound file. Select On/Off for bit
device and enter conditional expressions for other device types.

File No. Enter a sound file number.

Play Select the play mode of the sound file.

/ Run or stop the sound file.

Size The size of a sound file is displayed (KB/MB).

Sound File You shall select a sound file to run in the navigation window. The
file path and file name for the selected file are displayed.

Notes

• If the sound codec is not supported by the PC, the MP3 file does not run. Install the appropriate
codec to run a sound file.
• A MP3 file shall be produced with the following characteristics. MPEG 1, Layer III, Sample rate:
32-48 KHz, Bit rate: 32-320 kbps.
• A WAV file shall be produced with the following characteristics. Raw PCM Audio, 8/16bit,
signed/unsigned, Stereo/Mono.
• A sound file shall not exceed 10MB.

4-104
 4.Editing common data

4.1.9 OPC UA Server

OPC UA is an industry standard protocol for secure and reliable information exchange. OPC UA server
can be configured to configure as a development platform in HMI.

To set OPC UA server:

1 Double-click [OPC UA Server] ▶ [OPC UA Server Settings] in the project window to display the
[Basic Settings] properties dialog box where you can edit the server.

2 Set the following properties.

Items Description
IP Adderess Set the IP address or name of the OPC UA server.

Port Set the port number of OPC UA server.(1~65535)

502 or ranges from 2002 to 2040 are excluded as they are
separately assigned ports.

Node ID Type Set the OPC UA node ID type.

4-105
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

Numeric (integer): The ID identifier is in the form of an integer.

Example ("nsu=http://test.org/UA/Data/ ;i=10853");
String: The ID identifier is in the form of a string.
Example ( "nsu=http://test.org/UA/Data/ ;s=someIdentifier");

Notes

• If the OPC UA node ID type is a number, [NodeId] in [opc_ua_server_objvar_setting.xml]

downloaded from the [Group & variable setting] screen is given as a number, and if it is a string,
[NodeId] is automatically given as a string. That number or string is uniquely assigned.

3 If you click [OPC UA Server] ▶ [OPC UA Server Settings] ▶ [Secure Channel] in the project
window, you can set security-related items.

4 Set the following properties.

Items Description
Server Certificate Name Set the certificate to be used by the OPC UA server.
You can manage multiple server certificates.
Only one server certificate can be registered.

4-106
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Security Policies Available Set the security policy of the OPC UA server.
on the Server The setting items are as follows.
• No security
• Basic128Rsa15
• Basic256
• Basic256Sha256

Auto-accept All Client Select when there is no certificate of the client trying to connect or
Certificates when all clients are to be authenticated automatically.

Trusted Client Register certificates for trusted clients connecting to the OPC UA
server. If [Auto-accept All Client Certificates] is unchecked, you can
enter the file.
Up to 16 client certificates can be registered.
Client certificates can be added/removed.

Server Certificate Click the [Browse] button to display the certificate selection screen.

On the [Choose a Certification] screen, click the [Generate

Certificate] button to create a server certificate, and the [Generate
Certificate] screen is displayed.
After entering the certificate name, signature certification,
expiration date, URI, IP address, and DNS, click the [OK] button to
generate the server certificate.

4-107
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

In the [Choose a Certification] screen, click the [Add] button to add

an existing server certificate and select a valid server certificate file
to be added to the server certificate list and displayed.

If you click the [Delete] button to delete the certificate selected

from the server certificate list on the [Choose a Certification]
screen, it will be deleted from the server certificate list.

4-108
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
After selecting the certificate to be selected as the server certificate
name, click the [OK] button to set the server certificate name.

5 If you click [OPC UA Server] ▶ [OPC UA Server Settings] ▶ [Authentication] in the project window,
you can set authentication-related items.

6 Set the following properties.

Items Description
Allow Annonymous Access Anyone can access the OPC UA server.

Allow User/Password Add a user and password to access the OPC UA server.
Access Up to 16 can be added.
If you click the [Add] button to add a user on the [Authentication]
screen, the user screen is displayed. After entering the user and
password, click the [OK] button to add to the user list.
Select a user to delete and click the [Delete] button to delete the
selected user from the user list.

4-109
 4.Editing common data

To set up OPC UA groups & parameters::

1 Double-click [OPC UA Server] ▶ [Object & Variable] in the Project tab to activate the [Object &
Variable] registration window.

2 Edit group: Variables can be registered under groups.

To register a variable, one or more groups must be registered except for [Server]. Groups can be
registered under [Server] or other groups.

After selecting [Server] or another group to register the group, click the [Add Group] button. After
entering a new name and description on the [Group] screen, click the [OK] button to add the group to
the tree on the left.

Notes

• Special characters (.) cannot be used in group names.

• When adding a group, it cannot be added with the same name that exists in the same tree level.
• Up to 10 groups can be added under [Server].
• To edit a group, select the edited group from the group tree and then select [Property Setting]
from the pop-up menu.
• To delete a group, select the group to be deleted from the group tree and select [Delete] from the
pop-up menu.
• When deleting a group, groups and variables included under the group are deleted together.
• Editing contents related to groups are not undo/redoed.

3 Group Copy & Paste

After selecting the group to be copied from the group tree on the left, select the [Copy Group] button at
the top or [Copy] from the pop-up menu.

4-110
 4.Editing common data

After selecting a group to paste, select the [Paste Group] button at the top or the [Paste] in the pop-up
menu to copy the group.

Notes

• When copying, all groups of the selected group and its children and variables belonging to the
group are included and copied.
• When pasting, if the same group exists at the same level as the top group name of the copy
target, the group name is automatically changed and added. The automatically assigned group
name consists of the existing group name + “_number” format. For example, if duplicated with
[New Group1], [New Group1_1], [New Group1_2] are automatically given.

4 Import & Export

All [Group & Variable] data is saved for use in the form of a CSV file. After selecting [Server] in the
tree on the left, select [Export] in the pop-up menu to save as a CSV file.

4-111
 4.Editing common data

After selecting [Server] in the tree on the left, select [Import] in the pop-up menu to import the [Group
& Variable] data values from the CSV file. For duplicate items, you can select [Overwrite], [Skip], or
[Create] options. The option for duplicates is for variables only and ignores duplicate groups.

Notes

• If you select Create in the options for duplicate items, the variable name is automatically changed
and added. The automatically assigned variable name consists of “copy_” + existing variable
name or copy_existing variable name + “(number)” format. For example, if duplicated with
[NewVar1], [Copy_NewVar1], [Copy_NewVar1 (2)] will be given automatically.

4-112
 4.Editing common data

5 Edit Mode & View All

To understand the overall structure of groups and variables, click the [View All] button at the top. On
the left, the structure of groups and variables is displayed in tree form, and on the right, variables
belonging to groups are displayed in list form. However, editing is not allowed.

Click the [Edit Mode] button at the top. The structure of the entire group is displayed in a tree form on
the left side, and the variables belonging to the group are displayed in a list form on the right side.
Groups and variables can be edited.

4-113
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• When editing a group, you cannot edit [Server] at the top node of the group tree.
• If you select a group in the group tree, variables belonging to that group are displayed in the
variable list on the right. However, variables belonging to sub-groups and daily groups are
ignored.
• If [Server] is selected in the group tree, variables belonging to all groups are displayed in the
variable list on the right. However, variable editing is not possible.

6 Add variable
In the group tree, select the group to add the variable to.

Enter a variable name in the name cell of the last empty row of the variable list window on the right,
and press the [Enter] or [Tab] key to add a variable.

The variable setting items are as follows.

Items Description
Name The name of the variable. Duplicate names within the same group
are not allowed.

Data Type The data type type is as follows.

• Boolean
• Bytes
• Int16
• Int32
• UInt16
• UInt32
• Float
• String
However, arrays and structures are currently not supported.

Device Set the direct address of the device PLC controller.

4-114
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Size(bytes) If the size data type is string, the length of the string can be set to
byte.

Description Description of the explanatory variable.

Notes

• Enter a variable name in the name cell of the last empty row of the variable list window and click
the background without a row to add the variable.
• A variable is added by double-clicking the name cell in the last empty row of the variable list
window. The variable name is automatically given and added, and is in the format of “NewVar” +
number. The data type is set to Boolean.
• You can add a variable by pressing the Enter key in the name cell of the last empty row of the
variable list window or by dragging and dropping (AutoFill).
• Duplicate variable names cannot be added.
• Double-click the title column to sort in ascending or descending order based on that column.
• Undo/Redo for variable addition is supported. Undo/Redo is possible up to 6 times only.
• However, if the group is moved, Undo/Redo is initialized and Undo/Redo is not performed.

7 Delete variable
After selecting the variables to be deleted in the variable list window, press the [Delete] key or select
[Delete] from the pop-up menu.

In the Variable List window, the row containing the selected variable is displayed as a blank row. The
row itself is not deleted.

4-115
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• Any blank rows remaining due to a deleted variable are moved to another group and then
returned, and those blank rows are deleted.
• Undo/Redo for variable deletion is supported. Undo/Redo is possible up to 6 times only.
• However, if the group is moved, Undo/Redo is initialized and Undo/Redo is not performed.

8 Variable Copy & Paste

After selecting the variables to be copied from the variable list window, select [Copy] from the pop-up
menu.

After moving to another group, selecting the last empty row and selecting [Paste] from the pop-up
menu, the variable is copied.

4-116
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• When pasting, for duplicate variable names, the variable names are automatically changed and
added. The automatically assigned variable name consists of “copy_” + existing variable name or
copy_existing variable name + “(number)” format. For example, if duplicated with [NewVar1],
[Copy_NewVar1], [Copy_NewVar1 (2)] will be given automatically.

• Undo/Redo for variable copy/paste is supported. Undo/Redo is possible up to 6 times only.

• However, if the group is moved, Undo/Redo is initialized and Undo/Redo is not performed.

4-117
 4.Editing common data

4.1.10 Database
It can be linked with various databases such as MSSQL, MySQL, and MariaDB. Using the database
property setting screen, you can set the properties for connecting to the database server on the network,
add a query job for searching, inserting, or modifying data, and set the properties.

To set Database Property:

1 Double-click [Database] ▶ [Database Properties] in the project tab.

2 Set the following setting items.

Items Description
Database Type Select database type. Possible DB types are:
1. MySQL
2.MSSQL
3. MariaDB

Host Enter the hostname or IP address of the database server.

Port Enter the database server connection port.

Database Name Enter the database service name. Since multiple database
services can be operated on one host, the DB service name must
be specified to distinguish them.

User Name Enter the database user name.

Password Enter the database Password.

4-118
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Connection Time Limit Registers the timeout when trying to connect to the specified
database. You must enter a value greater than 0. If the value is
entered as 0, it will wait indefinitely until the database connection is
successful.

Connection Test Test whether database connection is available or not.

Add and set query job:

1 1 Double-click [Database] ▶ [Query Job Insert] in the Project tab.

2 Set the following setting items.

Items Description
Query Job Name Displays the name of the query. Duplicate query names are not
allowed.

Table Name Enter the table name used in SQL statements.

Max. Records(Select) Sets the maximum number of search rows for Select queries.

4-119
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
The number of rows can be set from 1 to 1000.

Error No. Device Set the address to display the Select, Insert, and Update execution
results. Only Word type addresses can be set.
0 is success, 1 or more is error. Please refer to the error code table
of each manufacturer's database for the error message contents
regarding the error code value.

Device Setting Designate the connection device of the field, and designate the
data type and size. In XP-Builder, separate data type validity check
is not performed.
Since the setting list exists for Select and Insert/Update
respectively, click the Select, Insert/Update button below to select
and set the connection device setting list for Select or
Insert/Update.
The Insert/Update button is activated when the Insert or Update
query is checked in the execution conditions for each query.

Field Name Enter the field name registered in the database table.

Device Type The data types provided by XP-Builder are as follows.

• Bit
• Int16
• UInt16
• Int32
• UInt32
• BCD16
• BCD32
• Float
• String
• Date(displayed only for Insert/Update list)
DB data type and XP-Builder data type are converted according to
pre-determined rules.

Device Enter the link address in the field.

4-120
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
Size If the data type is String, designate the size of the device. The rest
is fixed.

Import DB Field Names Connects to the database and displays the table field information
in a list and deletes all previously entered information, if any.

Query Execution Specifies the address to be linked with the Select/Insert/Update

Condition(Bit) operation conditions.
If you check Use Update Query, the conditions for the Update
query are displayed.

Where Condition Syntax Sets the condition used in the Where clause of the SQL statement.
Settings

Device Variable Specifies the address to be linked to the parameter ({1}, {2}, {3})
used in the Where condition of the SQL statement.
Up to 3 can be added.

Select Query Specifies the Where condition of the Select statement.

Up to 3 can be added.

Update Query Specifies the Where condition of the Update statement.

Up to 3 can be added.
It is displayed only when the Update query in the execution
conditions for each query is checked.

Select Sort Settings Specifies the sorting condition of the Select statement.
Up to 2 can be added.

Execution Result SQA The set result is displayed in the form of an SQL statement.
Syntax Viewer Click the Select/Insert/Update query buttons to display the
respective results.

Notes

• Field names with spaces are not supported.

• Field values of the first record (row) among the records (rows) searched by the Select statement
are set in the connected device.

4-121
 4.Editing common data

4.2 Scripts
Instead of creating individual objects and assigning commands, you can use a script of LXP-Designer
to program global commands.

4.2.1 Script Features

A script is operated by user or system input.
You can control the system through pictures and objects of LXP-Designer.
You can organize a project more conveniently and effectively using a script.

The script has the following characteristics:

 If you use a script, it easy to maintain the system.
 You can control the screen in various ways with a script, and process complex arithmetic operations
easily.
 It supports easy-to-use programming languages (provided in limited C language format).
 It supports programming editors you can use.
 It checks the validity of the grammar for the created scripts.
 You can send and receive a user's data with the controller via a user-defined protocol driver.

A script is executed according to the table below.

Script type Execution method

Global If the condition is met, the script controls or manages the entire project and its
components.

Screen change When the current screen is closed and before a new screen is opened

4-122
 4.Editing common data

Script type Execution method

Local setting • When the script condition setting of the current screen is met Set a script only for
screen.

Schedule At a specific time

Target It is based on the object behavior on the current screen.

4-123
 4.Editing common data

Understanding the script command

This is how to use a command in a script. The table below describes the control statements and
operators you can use when programming a script.

Command Example Description

 Control statement

if if (Condition) This control statement is executed when the

{ condition value is true (non-zero). If it is false
Statement; (0), the corresponding control statement is
skipped and it goes to the next control
}
statement.
else
[Example]
{
Statement;
}

for for(Expression; Condition; This command repeats the statement when the
Expression) condition value is true (value other than 0). If it
{ is false (0), it goes to the next control statement.
Statement; [Example]
}

while while(Condition) This command repeats the statement when the

{ condition value is true (value other than 0). If it
Statement; is false (0), it goes to the next control statement.
[Example]
}

4-124
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

do while do This command executes the statement once,

{ and if the condition value is true (value other
than 0), it repeats the corresponding statement,
Statement;
and if it is false, it goes to the next control
} while(Condition);
statement.
[Example]

return return; Closes the script.

[Example]

break break; • The break inside the loop is used to get out of
the loop.
• If break is declared inside multiple loops, the
function is applied only to the innermost loo
p.
• [Example]

4-125
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

continue continue;  Skips the part below Continue in the

corresponding control loop and execute the
next loop.
 If Continue is declared inside multiple loops, the
function is applied only to the innermost loop.
[Example]

 Logical operator

&& <Term 1>&&<Term 2> Provides value 1 if both <Term 1> and <Term 2> are
true, and value 0 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

4-126
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

|| <Term 1> || <Term 2> Provides value 0 if both <Term 1> and <Term 2> are
false, and value 1 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

! ! <Term> Provides value 1 if <Term> is 0, and 0 for others.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-127
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

 Relational operator

< <Term 1><<Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> is less than <Term 2>
are true, and value 0 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-128
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

<= <Term 1><= <Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> is less than or equal
to <Term 2> are true, and value 0 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

> <Term 1>><Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> is greater than
<Term 2> are true, and value 0 for others.
[Example]

4-129
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

>= <Term 1>>= <Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> is greater or equal
than <Term 2> are true, and value 0 for others.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-130
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

!= <Term 1> != <Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> and <Term 2> are not
the same, and value 0 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

4-131
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

== <Term 1> == <Term 2> Provides value 1 if <Term 1> and <Term 2> are the
same, and value 0 for others.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

 Arithmetic operator

+ <Term> + <factor> Adds <Term> and <factor>.

[Example]
Named variable

4-132
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

Temporary variable

- <Term> - <factor> Subtracts <factor> from <Term>.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

4-133
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

* <Term> * <factor> Multiplies <Term> and <factor>.
[Example]

Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

/ <Term> / <factor> Divides <factor> from <Term>.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-134
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

% <Term> % <factor> Divides <factor> from <Term> and obtains the

remainder.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

 Bit operator

& <Term>&<factor> Perform bit operation (AND) for <Term> and

<factor>.
[Example]
Named variable

4-135
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

Temporary variable

| <Term> | <factor> Perform bit operation (OR) for <Term> and

<factor>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-136
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

~ ~ <bit> Inverts the <bit> value.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

^ <Term> ^ <factor> Perform bit operation (EOR) for <Term> and

<factor>.
[Example]
Named variable

4-137
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

Temporary variable

<< <Term><<<factor> Moves <Term> to the left by the <factor> value.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-138
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

>> <Term>>><factor> Moves <Term> to the right by the <factor> value.

[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

 Assignment operator

= <Device> = <term> Assigns the value of <term> to <Device>.

[Example]
Named variable

4-139
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

Temporary variable

+= <Device> += <term> Adds the value of <term> to the value of <Device>.

Assigns the calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-140
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

-= <Device> -= <term> Subtracts the value of <term> from the value of

<Device>. Assigns the calculated result value to
<Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

*= <Device> *= <term> Multiplies the value of <Device> by the value of

<term>.
Assigns the calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

4-141
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

Temporary variable

/= <Device> /= <term> Divides the value of <term> by the value of

<Device>.
Assigns the calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-142
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

%= <Device> %= <term> Divides the value of <Device> by the value of

<term> to obtain the remainder. Assigns the
calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

|= <Device> |= <term> Performs bit operation (AND) for the value of

<term> to the value of <Device>. Assigns the
calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

4-143
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Direct variable

&= <Device>&= <term> Performs bit operation (OR) for the value of <term>
to the value of <Device>. Assigns the calculated
result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Direct variable

^= <Device> ^= <term> Performs bit operation (EOR) for the value of

<term> to the value of <Device>. Assigns the
calculated result value to <Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

4-144
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

Temporary variable

<<= <Device><<= <term> Moves the value of <Device> to the left by the value
of <term>. Assigns the calculated result value to
<Device>.
[Example]
Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

4-145
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

>>= <Device>>>= <term> Moves the value of <Device> to the right by the
value of <term>. Assigns the calculated result value
to <Device>.
[Example]

Named variable

Direct variable

Temporary variable

 Increase/decrease operator

++ ++<Device>; Increases the value of <Device> value by 1.

<Device>++; [Example]

4-146
 4.Editing common data

Command Example Description

-- --<Device>; Decreases the value of <Device> value by 1.

<Device>--; [Example]

4-147
 4.Editing common data

Expression method
Uses the following formats to display a device address in a script. : @[device format: connection number:
station address: tag name or device address], The values in parentheses are the physical addresses of
PLC devices.

The following is an example for the device address expression method.

Notes

• In the device address example below, “1” means a direct device address, and the address depends
on the type of PLC. For related information, refer to <4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.
• Range of connection numbers (0-3)

Device Device address format Device address example

Bit (Device type=X) @[X: Address] @[X: %MX1]
@[X: Conn#: Address] @[X: 0: %MX1]
@[X: Stn#: Address] @[X: #1: %MX1]
@[X: Conn#: Stn#: Address] @[X: 0: #1: %MX1]

Short (Device type=S) @[S: Address] @[S: %MW000]

@[S: Conn#: Address] @[S: 0: %MW000]
@[S: Stn#: Address] @[S: #1: %MW000]
@[S: 2: #1: %MW000]
@[S: Conn#: Stn#: Address]

Integer (Device type=L) @[L: Address] @[L: %MW000]

@[L: Conn#: Address] @[L: 0: %MW000]
@[L: Stn#: Address] @[L: #1: %MW000]
@[L: 2: #1: %MW000]
@[L: Conn#: Stn#: Address]

Unsigned Short (Device @[W: Address] @[W: %MW000]

type=W) @[W: Conn#: Address] @[W: 0: %MW000]
@[W: Stn#: Address] @[W: #1: %MW000]
@[W: 2: #1: %MW000]
@[W: Conn#: Stn#: Address]

Unsigned Integer (Device @[D: Address] @[D: %MW000]

type=D) @[D: Conn#: Address] @[D: 0: %MW000]
@[D: Stn#: Address] @[D: #1: %MW000]
@[D: 2: #1: %MW000]
@[D: Conn#: Stn#: Address]

Float (Device type=F) @[F: Address] @[F: %MW000]

@[F: Conn#: Address] @[F: 0: %MW000]
@[F: Stn#: Address] @[F: #1: %MW000]
@[F: Conn#: Stn#: Address] @[F: 2: #1: %MW000]

4-148
 4.Editing common data

Constant and data type

A scripts provides a structured representation method of data.

The following are constants used in the script of LXP-Designer.

Details Example

Decimal Number 124, -34, 0, 2334454

Real Number 0.123, 10.45E12, 0.0

Hexadecimal Number 0x45FA, 0xfff

Binary true, false

Character ‘a’, ‘1’, ‘0’, ‘%’

Text “123abc”

A script function is capable of expressing and returning various types of data.

The table shows the data type used in the script of LXP-Designer.

Type Description Data range Example

Boolean (1 • True/false expression 0 to 1 bool bState = true;

bit) • "bool”is followed by a variable name.
• Initial value: 0 or 1

Character (8 • Character expression -127 to 127 char cValue =-10 ;

bit) • Put the assignment operator “=” afte
r the variable name and specify the
value you want to assign next.

Short (16 bit) • short may use less memory than int. -32768 to short nValue = -10 ;
32767

• Put the assignment operator “=” afte

r the variable name and specify the

4-149
 4.Editing common data

Type Description Data range Example

value you want to assign next.

Integer (32 • Integer type is capable of representing -2147483648 to Int nValue = -100 ;
bit) positive, negative, and 0. 2147483647
• To declare more than one variable,
place “int” in front, and separate eac
h variable with commas to be listed.
• Put the assignment operator “=” afte
r the variable name and specify the
value you want to assign next.

Unsigned • Put the assignment operator “=” after 0 to 65535 unsigned short
Short (16 bit) the variable name and specify the nValue = 10 ;
value you want to assign next.

Unsigned • Used for variables which have only 0 to 4294967295 unsigned int nValue
Integer (32 positive values, including zero. = 100 ;
bit) • Put the assignment operator “=” after
the variable name and specify the
value you want to assign next.

4-150
 4.Editing common data

Type Description Data range Example

Float (32 bit) • Put the assignment operator “=” after 1.175494351 E float fValue = 10.01 ;
the variable name and specify the – 38
value you want to assign next. to
3.402823466 E
+ 38

Notes

Bit: refers to the smallest unit of memory. A bit can represent only one of two values, 0 or 1. (A set bit
is sometimes called “on” or “off”.)

You can declare an array variable in the same method as any other variable declaration method.
When you declare an array and initialize a variable, you can initialize a constant within a bracket.
However, when you declare an array in char type, you can initialize a constant as a string within a double
quotation.
If you do not initialize an array variable, the value of the variable may contain a value other than 0. It is safe to
initialize an array variable for use when using it.

4-151
 4.Editing common data

Examples of data types used in a LXP-Designer script

Type Variable declaration Initialization example

example
Boolean bool bState[3]; bool bState[3] = {true, false, true}
bool bState[3] = {1, 0, 1};

Short short nValue[3]; short nValue[3] = {1, 2, 3};

Character char cValue[3]; char cValue[3] = {‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’}; or

char cValue[5] = “1234”

Integer int nValue[4]; int nValue[4] = {-100, -200, 100, 200};

Unsigned unsinged short unsigned short nValue[3] = {0, 100, 200};

Short nValue[3];

Unsigned unsigned int nValue[5]; unsigned int nValue[5] = {10, 11, 12, 13, 15};
Integer

Float float fValue[2]; float fValue[2] = {10.0, 20.0}; or

float fValue[2] = {1.175494351e-38 , -1.175494351e-38};

Notes

 An error occurs when initialized to a number larger than the declared size of the array.
Example) int nValue[3] = {1, 2, 3, 4};
 An uninitialized variable occurs when initialized to a number smaller than the declared size of the array.
Example) bool bValue[2] = {true};  bValue[0] is true. However, bValue[1] may be either true or false.
 When you initialize an array in char type using double quotations, you can initialize it to 1 smaller than
the array size. This is because it can be used as a string since a null value shall exist at the end of a
string constant.
Example) char cValue[5] = “1234”;
 When you initialize an array in char type using a double quotation, you can initialize it only with
English letters, numbers, and special characters. You cannot initialize it in multiple languages such as
Korean.

4-152
 4.Editing common data

Temporary variable

Basic variables are used as temporary variables. A temporary variable can be used in a script command
at an object. A direct variable is written directly to PLC memory when executed whereas a temporary
variable is written to PLC memory after the script is completely executed.
Only an object that supports input function supports writing a temporary variable as direct variable (PLC
memory). For example, if we assume that the direct variable %MW10 is assigned to the switch object,
the first script below operates at the moment the switch is pressed. And 100 is stored in %MW10.

 Script where %mw10 is used

------------------------------------------------------ Script operation
If @[w:%mw10] == 100)
@[w:%mw10]= 20; /* true*/
Else
@[w:%mw10]= 40;

@[w:%mw10] = @[w:%mw10]+1; /*%mw10 = 21 */

------------------------------------------------------ Script ends
%mw10 value = 21
 Script where direct variable %mw10 and temporary variable $S are used
------------------------------------------------------ Script operation
/* $S is initialized to 100 */
If ($S == 100)
@[w:%mw10]= 20; /* true*/
Else
@[w:%mw10]= 40;

$S = $S+1; /* $S = 101, @[w:%mw10] = 20 */

/* $S value will be written to @[w:%mw10] when the script ends*/

------------------------------------------------------ Script ends
%mw10 value = 101

4-153
 4.Editing common data

The data type of temporary variable is as follows:

Variable type Example Value range

16Bit $S -32768 to 32767
Signed DEC

32Bit $L -2147483648 to 2147483647

Signed DEC

16Bt $W 0 to 65535
Unsigned DEC

32 Bit $D 0 to 4294967295
Unsigned DEC

Real number $F -1.175494351e-38,

to
3.402823466e+38

4-154
 4.Editing common data

Script cross-reference
The script cross-reference function refers to the function which displays the objects or common elements
used by the script in the output window. Sometimes, an unexpected operation result may occur when the
a project is executed within XGT Panel. In this case, It is most likely that a script is being executed in a
specific location within the project. This function eliminates the trouble of having to open the property
window one by one to investigate all objects, common information, and places where global and local
scripts are used, and figure out a location where the script was used with ease, thereby helping
debugging within the device.

Select [TOOL] ▶ [Cross Reference] and then [Script] from the menu.

You can see that the script name, location, object type and description show up in the output window.

Notes

• Just like any other search function, if you double-click a specific row, you can check that it moves to
the object or screen where the corresponding script is located.
• Click [TOOL] ▶[Cross Reference] ▶ [Script] to find the script information applied to the object
on the base screen.

4-155
 4.Editing common data

4.2.2 Creating script

You can create a script in the Project window. Then you can add functions and variables in the Script
toolbox. For global setting in scripts, please refer to <2.2.2.8 Global Script Setting>.

Inserting a script

Inserting a script in the Project window:

1 Double-click [Insert Script] in the Project window.

The Script Editing window has been created as shown below.

2 Create a script in Edit window. If you right-click and click [Close], it returns to the previous screen
window.

4-156
 4.Editing common data

Using the script tool window

The script editing tool window (function list tab) allows you to easily register built-in functions that can be
used within a script.

Script registration using function list:

1 For script inserting, refer to <4.2.2.1 Insert script> .

2 Click [VIEW] ▶ [Script Toolbox Window].

3 Select the desired function from the list of predefined functions (device, screen, dialog command).
Select the command, set the property and press [Insert], or double-click the command to insert it into
the script.

4-157
 4.Editing common data

4 Check that the selected command has been added to the Script Editing window. You can enter or
modify a value for the command directly in the Script Editing window.

5 Click the Control Word tab in the script toolbox to select the command, device setting, and operator
list. Double-click the target to insert as script.

6 Check whether the selected control statement has been inserted in Script Editing window. Then
insert an operand or the remaining control statements.

4-158
 4.Editing common data

Setting screen script

The screen script executes a command on the screen, which meets the condition.

Set screen script:

1 Create a script as specified in <4.2.2.1 Insert script>.

2 Double-click the screen in the Project window.

3 Right-click in the Edit window and click [Screen property].

4 Press [Local Script Setting].

5 Set the run condition. If selected continuous or periodic is selected as the execution condition, set the
device address.

4-159
 4.Editing common data

6 Press Insert and set the priority of the script through the up and down buttons.

7 Press [OK].

4-160
 4.Editing common data

Setting screen change script

The screen change script is run when the screen is changed. You can set the screen change script only
on the base screen.

Set change screen script:

1 Create a script according to <4.2.2.1 Insert script>.

2 Click the screen in Project window.

3 Right-click in the Edit window and click [Screen property].

4 Click [Etc.].

5 Select Use script when screen shows up or Use script checkbox when the screen disappears. Then
run a script in the base screen state.

4-161
 4.Editing common data

6 Click the OK button.

4-162
 4.Editing common data

Setting scheduler script:

Setting script scheduler:

1 Create a script according to <4.2.2.1 Inserting a script>.

2 Double-click [Scheduler] in the Project window.

3 Double-click the list in the Scheduler window.

4 Set the execution condition, detailed execution condition, and description.

5 Select a script ▶ [>>] in Action Settings.

6 Select a script from the drop-down menu.

4-163
 4.Editing common data

7 If necessary, set the priority of the script with the [Up] and [Down] buttons.

8 Close the Property window, and then set an additional script schedule if necessary. Changes are
automatically saved.

4-164
 4.Editing common data

Object scheduler script:

Creating object script:

1 Create a script according to <4.2.2.1 Insert script> and <4.2.2.2 Use script toolbox>.

2 Create an object. For object creation, refer to <2.3.4 Drawing a figure/object>. If you create an
object, the Property window for the corresponding object shows up.

3 Click the [Operation] tab.

4 Check Use Script.

5 Select Script.

6 Press [OK].

4-165
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• Script only applies to certain type of object. You can use [Use Script] only when the corresponding
object supports scripts.
• If you delete the script of the object from Project, an error occurs when checking Data.

4-166
 4.Editing common data

Editing script

Finding script:

1 Select [TOOL] ▶ [Find in Screen] with the Script tab opened in Edit window.

2 Enter the content you want to find in a pop-up window.

3 If you check by word unit, you can find by word unit.

4 Click Find Next to find the next content.

Replacing script:

1 Select [TOOL] ▶ [Replace in Screen] with Script tab opened in Edit window.

2 Enter the content you want to replace in a pop-up window.

3 Set options (by word, case-sensitive).

4 Click [Replace] to replace one at a time, or click [Replace All] to replace all contents at once.

4-167
 4.Editing common data

Shortcut function:

1 Right-click the edit list in the Script Editing window.

2 Click [Shortcut].

3 Enter a line number, and then press [Shortcut].

Notes

You can put a comment in a script. If the comment is one line, you can insert it with (//) mark, and if the
comment is more than two lines , you can input it with (/* */) mark.
// This is a single line comment.
/* This is line 1 of a multi-line comment.
This is line 2 of a multi-line comment.
This is line 3 of a multi-line comment. */

4-168
 4.Editing common data

Script error processing

If an error occurs during script execution, the script after the error is skipped without processing. Also,
the error is processed after the error control statement. (Refer to the figure below.)

An error control statement is executed when an error occurs while the script is running.

A script error message is displayed in Output window at the bottom of LXP-Designer screen.

4-169
 4.Editing common data

Script watchdog function

When the script execution time exceeds a certain amount of time, a watchdog occurs to stop the script
execution.
This case is a case where there are too many contents in the script, so all of them cannot be executed. but
this may occur if you cannot end the function due to an infinite loop.
To prevent such an error, if the script is not ended for a certain period of time (5 seconds) or more, the
running script is forced to be ended.
You can set the script watchdog time in the project property [Auxiliary Settings] of the project window.

Script running takes more time than any other action. Caution is required when using control statements (for
example, for, while, and do ~ while) whose execution time is difficult to predict.

4-170
 4.Editing common data

4.2.3 XGT Panel control function

Some scripts are capable of controlling XGT panel functions (system, print, device functions).

System capability function

Script property content for system function

Function name Description Parameter

HMIExit Shuts down the monitor and goes None
to the standby screen.
Example: HMIExit();

InitHistoricalAlarm Function to initialize the alarm None

area of NVRAM
An alarm content is deleted.
Example: InitHistoricalAlarm();

InitLogging Function to initialize the logging

area of NVRAM Return None
value
The logged content is deleted.
Parameter Int nLogNumber:
Example: InitLogging(1);
1 Logging number is
initialized.

SetTime Changes the clock of XGT Panel.

Example: Return None
SetTime(@[W: %MW1000], value
@[W: %MW1001], Parameter Int nYear: Year
@[W: %MW1002], 1
@[W: %MW1003], Parameter Int nMonth: Month (1-
@[W: %MW1004], 2 12)
@[W: %MW1005]); Parameter Int nDay: Day (0-31)
3
SetTime(2013, 1, 30, 8, 10, 0); Parameter Int nTime: Hour (0-23)
4
Parameter Int nMinute: Minute
5 (0-59)
Parameter Int nSecond: Second
6 (0-59)

ResetUSB Resets the power of the USB None

memory installed in XGT Panel.
Example:

4-171
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

if(@[X: HX00000] == true)
ResetUSB ( );

GetTickCount Returns the Tick value of the None

current system.
Example:
int a = GetTickCount();
// The current system tick value is
stored in variable a.

Print capability function

Below are the contents on script properties for the print function.

Function name Description Parameter

PrintAlarm Prints the alarm list. None
Example:
if(@[X: %MX0] == true)
{
PrintAlarm();
}

PrintScreen Prints the current screen of XGT None

Panel. The storage location of the
printed data is saved as a file or
printed according to the “Screen
Capture” option in the [Other
Settings] tab of LXP-Designer
project property information.
Example:
if(@[X: %MX1] == true)
{
PrintScreen();
}

4-172
 4.Editing common data

Screen change capability function

Function Description Parameters
ChangeBaseScreen If you change the current screen, the Int nBaseScreenNumber: Enter a
screen number is set by the device. If screen number to change the
a screen number is not assigned in screen. You can assign a word
the Project window, the screen does device for entering real numbers or
not change. values.
Example:

if(@[W:%MW000] >= 0)
ChangeBaseScreen(10);
else
ChangeBaseScreen(@[W:%MW10]);
//Constant is 10. Device is %MW10.

Script capability function

Below are the contents on script properties for the script function.

Function name Description Parameter

GetLastError Returns the last (most recent) error Refer to the following table.
encountered while running a script.
Example:
Int num =0, a = 10, b = 0;
int error;
num = a/b;
ERROR:
{
error = GetLastError();
}

GetLastError function return value

Value Description
0: Normal operation Set the state of normal operation.

1: Finish Occurs upon clean exit.

2: Memory error Occurs when a value is written onto or read from the stack address
incorrectly.

4-173
 4.Editing common data

Value Description
3: Direct variable memory Occurs when a value is written onto or read from the direct variable
error address incorrectly.

4: Temporary variable Occurs when a value is written onto or read from the temporary variable
memory error incorrectly.

5: Internal function Occurs when you execute internal function declared in LXP-Designer
processing incorrectly.

6: Data error Occurs when the read data is invalid when reading the data value of a
variable (For debugging).

7: Not valid data Occurs when the data value is invalid when writing the data value onto a
variable (For debugging).

8: 0 division error Occurs when division by zero is performed.

9: Opcode error Occurs when Opcode is not valid.

10: Array subscript exceeded Occurs when the subscript of the array exceeds the maximum size of the
array.

11: Range exceeded Not used

12: Function error Not used

13: Semi error Not used

14: Watchdog time error Occurs if the set watchdog time is exceeded.

15: Nested function count

Occurs if 10 scripts are exceeded when a script is called within a script.
error (10)

16: Deadlock state Not used

17: Memory error Occurs when trying to reference out of the global variable (g_DataBuffer) L
area

18: Memory error Occurs when the memory of pointer goes out of the scope of the previously
allocated variable.

19: Memory error If the class of the pointer is entered incorrectly (only global variables or
stack variables are possible.)

20: Memory error If an incorrect type is entered (if a value other than the declared variable is
entered)

4-174
 4.Editing common data

Text capability function

Below is the description of text function properties. :

Function name Description Parameter

Strcat Appends the source text after the Return bool: Whether to append a
target text. value text
Parameter char* pszDst: target text,
Example: 1 address of an array
char szSrc[10]=“12345”, variable of char type
szDst[10]=“abcd”;Strcat (&szDst, Parameter char* pszSrc: source text,
&szSrc);// The value of szDst is 2 address of an array
“abcd12345”. variable of char type

Strcmp Compares two texts. Return int: Returns the compared

Example: value results.
char szStr1[10] = “12345”;char • Negative number:
szStr2[10] = “12345”;int pszString1 <
nResult;nResult = pszString2
Strcmp(&szStr1, &szStr2);//The • 0: Same string
value of nResult is 0. • Positive number:
pszString1 >
pszString2
Parameter char* pszDst: Target text,
1 address of an array
variable of char type
Parameter char* pszSrc: Source text,
2 address of an array
variable of char type

Strcpy Copies the value of the source text Return bool: whether the text copy
to the target text. value is successful
Example: Parameter char* pszDst: copy target
char szSrc[10] = “12345”, 1 text, address of an array
szDst[10];Strcpy (&szDst, variable of char type
&szSrc); Parameter char* pszSrc: Copy source
2 text, address of an array
variable of char type

Strlen Get the length of a text. Return int: length of an input string
value
Example: Parameter char*pszString: address of
char buf[10] = “12345”;int 1 an array variable of char
nLen;nLen = Strlen(&buf);// The type

4-175
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

value of nLen is 5.

Device capability function

Below is the description of device function properties.

Function name Description Parameter

CopyData Reads data by number of copies Return None
from the source device and inputs it value
to the target device. Parameter DEVICE src: Copy source
Example: 1 device
CopyData(@[W: %MW000], Parameter DEVICE dst: Copy target
@[W: %MW100], 10); 2 device
Parameter int nCount: Device count
3

CopyDataEx Reads data as much as the number Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
of copies from the device which is value the device address is
as far away as the source offset exceeded.
from the source device and enters Parameter DEVICE src: Copy source
it into the device. 1 device
Example:
Parameter int nSrcOffset: Offset of
int index; 2 copy source device
if(@[X:%IX0.0.0] == true)
Parameter DEVICE dst: Copy target
{
3 device
index = 0;
} Parameter int nDstOffset: Offset of
else 4 copy target device
{ Parameter int nCopyCount: Device
index = 100; 5 count
}
CopyDataEx ( @[W:%MW0], 0,
@[W:%MW100], index, 10 );
/*
If the value of IX0.0.0 is true, it
offsets the value of 10 words

4-176
 4.Editing common data
Function name Description
from %MW000 to %MW100. If the
value of IX0.0.0 is false, it offsets
the value of 10 words
from %MW000 to %MW200.
*/
SetData Enter a value in Device.
Example:
int nLoop;for(nLoop = 0;
nLoop<10;
nLoop++)SetData(@[W:%MW100
], nLoop, 0);// Set “0” to the device
from % MW100 to % MW109.
GetData Gets the value of a device.
Example:
intn Loop, nValue; for(nLoop =
0; nLoop<10; nLoop++){
GetData(@[W: %MW100], nLoop,
&nValue);nValue += nValue;}
// Add a value from MW100
to %MW109.
SetStrData Copies the data of a string to the
device.
Example:
char a[6] = “abcde”;// The
character value of device
“HW0000” is “abcde”.
SetStrData ( @[W:HW00000], 0,
&a );
4-177
Parameter
Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
value the device address is
exceeded.
Parameter DEVICE src: Source device
1
Parameter int nSrcOffset: Offset of
2 source device
Parameter int nValue: Value
3
Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
value the device address is
exceeded.
Parameter DEVICE src: Source device
1
Parameter int nSrcOffset: Offset of
2 source device
Parameter int* pRetValue: Returns the
3 value of a device.
Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if a
value string length exceeds the
maximum address of the
target device or it is a
device to which you cannot
write.
Parameter DEVICE dst: Target device
1
Parameter int nDstOffset: Offset of
2 target device
Parameter char* pstrValue: char array
3 address variable where the
string to copy is stored
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

GetStrData Copies the data of a device as a Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if a
string. string length to copy is
Example: greater than the size of the
char a[6];GetStrData array to be stored.
( @[W:HW00000], 5, Parameter DEVICE src: Target device
&a );//Copies 5 bytes from 1
HW00000 to array a. Parameter int nCount: byte size of a
2 string to be copied
Parameter char* pRetValue: char array
3 address variable where the
string to copy is to be
stored

Note

• If you use a PLC device, and if communication is not smooth, the function may fail.
• Cannot get a value if the address of a device exceeds the maximum value.

4-178
 4.Editing common data

Communication capability function

Description of the communication function property

Function name Description Parameter

ADD_SUM Calculates and returns the sum of Return valueBOOL: Returns FALSE if
input data. the count is out of buffer
range.
Example: Parameter 1 char* pBuffer: buffer for
char nResult; calculation
char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}; Parameter 2 int nCount: number of byte
ADD_SUM(&buf[0], 5, &nResult); to calculate
Parameter 3 int* nResult: Calculated
value

ADD_SUM_1S Calculates the sum of the input data Return valueBOOL: Returns FALSE if
to obtain the unary complement the count is out of buffer
and return it. range.
Parameter 1char* pBuffer: buffer for
Example: calculation
char nResult; Parameter 2int nCount: number of byte
char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}; to calculate
ADD_SUM_1S(&buf[0], 5,
Parameter 3int* nResult: Calculated
&nResult);
value

ADD_SUM_2S Calculates the sum of the input data Return value BOOL: Returns FALSE if
to obtain the binary complement the count is out of buffer
and return. range.
Example: Parameter 1 char* pBuffer: buffer for
char nResult; calculation
char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}; Parameter 2 int nCount: number of byte
ADD_SUM_2S(&buf[0], 5, to calculate
&nResult);
Parameter 3 int* nResult: Calculated
value

4-179
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

CRC16 Calculates the 16-bit CRC value of Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
the input data and returns it. value the count is out of buffer
Example: range.
short nResult; Parameter char* pBuffer: buffer for
char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}; 1 calculation
CRC16(&buf[0], 5, &nResult); Parameter int nCount: number of byte
2 to calculate
Parameter int* nResult: Calculated
3 value

XOR_SUM Calculates and returns the XOR Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
sum of input data. value the count is out of buffer
range.
Example: Parameter char* pBuffer: buffer for
char nResult; 1 calculation
char buf[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}; Parameter int nCount: number of byte
XOR_SUM(&buf[0], 5, &nResult); 2 to calculate
Parameter int* nResult: Calculated
3 value

ReadFromIO Reads data from I/O of the Return int: number of byte of read
specified controller. value data
. Parameter int nCtlr: controller number
Example: 1 (0~3)
char Response[32]; Parameter char* pBuffer: buffer to
int ReadSize; 2 store read data
Memset ( &Response, 0, 32 );
Parameter int nToRead: size of data to
ReadSize = ReadFromIO(0,
3 read
&Response[0], 32 );

WriteToIO Sends data to I/O of specified Return int: number of byte of sent
controller. value data
Example: Parameter int nCtlr: controller number
char Command[8] = “ABCDEF”; (0~16)
int nSentSize; Sends data to LPT1 printer
nSentSize = WriteToIO(0, port if the controller number
&Command[0], 6 ); is 100.
Parameter char* pBuffer: data buffer to
2 send
Parameter int nSize: size of buffer
3

4-180
 4.Editing common data

Memory function
Below is the description of memory function properties.

Function name Description Parameter

HIBYTE Obtains the upper byte of the input word Return char: upper byte
value. value
Example: Parameter int nValue: input data
int nValue = 0x1234; 1
char nResult;
nResult = HIBYTE(nValue);

LOBYTE Obtains the lower byte of the input word Return char: lower byte
value. value
Example: Parameter int nValue: input data
int nValue = 0x1234; 1
char nResult;
nResult = LOBYTE(nValue);

MAKEWORD Obtains a word value with the input two Return int: word value
byte values. value
Example: Parameter char cLow: lower byte
char cLow = 0x12, cHigh = 0x34; 1
intn Result; Parameter char cHigh: upper
nResult = MAKEWORD(cLow, cHigh); 2
// The result is 0x3412.

Memcpy Copies data from the source buffer to Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
the destination buffer. value the count is out of buffer
Example: range.
char src[10] = “123456789”, dst[4]; Parameter char * pDstData: copy
Memcpy(&dst[0], &src[2], 4); 1 destination buffer
Parameter char * pSrcData: copy
2 source buffer
Parameter int nDataSize: number of
3 data to copy (number of
char)

4-181
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

Memset Initializes the buffer to the specified Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if
value. value the count is out of buffer
Example: range.
char src[9]; Parameter 1 char * pSrcData: copy
Memset(&src[0], 0, 10); source buffer
Parameter 2 char byData: value to
initialize
Parameter 3 int nDataSize: number of
data to initialize (number
of char)

Memcmp Compares two buffers. Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if

Example: value the count is out of buffer
char src[10] = “123456789”, dst[5] = range.
“3456”; Parameter char* pBuffer1:
int nResult; 1 comparison buffer 1
Memcmp(&src[2], &dst[0], 4, Parameter char* pBuffer2:
&nResult); 2 comparison buffer 2
Parameter int nDataSize: number of
3 data to compare (number
of char)
Parameter int* nResult: Returns 1 if
4 the two buffers match with
each other, and
otherwise, returns 0.

SwapWord Exchange the values of the upper and Return int: value of exchanged
lower byte data of word data. value data
. Parameter int nSrcData: value of
Example: 1 data to exchange
int nSrc = 0x1234, nResult;nResult =
The value of
SwapWord(nSrc);//nResult is 0x3412.

SwapDWord Exchange the values of the upper and Return int: value of exchanged
lower word data of DWord data. value data
Example: Parameter int nSrcData: value of
int nSrc = 0x12345678, 1 data to exchange
nResult;nResult = The value of
SwapDWord(nSrc);//nResult is
0x56781234.

4-182
 4.Editing common data

Data conversion function

Below is the description of data conversion function properties.

Function name Description Parameter

ASCII2HEX Converts ASCII data to
hexadecimal data.
Example:
char buf[5] = “1234”;int
nResult;ASCII2HEX(&buf[0],
&nResult, 4);// The value of
nResult is 0x1234.
Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if the
value count is out of buffer range.
Parameter char* pSrcBuffer: source
1 buffer to convert
Parameter int* pRetValue: variable to
2 store the converted data
Parameter int nCount: number of byte to
3 convert (1 ~ 8)

HEX2ASCII Converts hexadecimal data to Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if the

ASCII data. value conversion count is not a
Example: value between 1 and 8, or if
char buf[4]; the size of pDstBuffer is less
intn Src = 0x1234; than the conversion count.
HEX2ASCII (nSrc, &buf[0], 4); Parameter int nValue: value to convert
1
Parameter char* pDstBuffer: The target
2 buffer to store the converted
data
Parameter int nCount: number of byte to
3 convert (1 ~ 8)

ASCII2DEC Converts ASCII data to decimal Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if the
data. value count is out of buffer range.
Example: Parameter char* pSrcBuffer: source
char buf[5] = “1234”;int 1 buffer to convert
nResult;ASCII2HEX(&buf[0], Parameter int* pRetValue: variable to
&nResult, 4);// The value of 2 store the converted data
nResult is 1234.
Parameter int nCount: number of byte to
3 convert (1 ~ 10)

4-183
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

DEC2ASCII Converts decimal data to ASCII Return BOOL: Returns FALSE if the
data. value conversion count is not a
Example: value between 1 and 8, or if
char buf[4]; the size of pDstBuffer is less
int nSrc = 1234; than the conversion count.
HEX2ASCII (nSrc, &buf[0], 4); Parameter int nValue: value to convert
1
Parameter char* pDstBuffer: The target
2 buffer to store the converted
data
Parameter int nCount: number of byte to
3 convert (1 ~ 10)

Notes

Conversion stops if a value of the data of an input buffer contain the data, which cannot be changed to
decimal.
Example) If you convert 6 char src[6] = {‘1’,’7,’4,’A’,’5’,’3’}, the value of result is 174.

4-184
 4.Editing common data

Other functions
Below is the description of other function properties.:

Function name Description Parameter

BacklightOn Can turn on or off the backlight. Bool bOn: Turns on/off the Backlight
Example: power.
if(@[X:HX100] == true)
BacklightOn(true);

Buzzer Makes a buzzer sound (50ms). None

Example:
if(@[X:HX100] == true)
Buzzer();

SetBuzzerEnable Can enable or disable the use of the Bool bEnable: The buzzer turns on/off
buzzer. the operation.
Example:
if(@[X:HX100] == true)
{
SetBuzzerEnable(true);
Buzzer();
}

ShowStatusbar Shows the status bar at the bottom of Bool bShow: Shows the status bar.
XGT Panel screen.
Example:
if(@[X: HX100] == true)
ShowStatusbar ( true );

Sleep Pause a script for a certain period of int nSleepTime: time to pause (ms)
time.
Example:
int nLoop;
for(nLoop = 0; nLoop<10;
nLoop++)
{
Buzzer();
Sleep(500);
}

RunExtProgram Runs an external program. First: Executable program path

Use this after setting it as Char array. Second: parameter (Example: -silent)
Example:
char a[100] =

4-185
 4.Editing common data

Function name Description Parameter

“\\FlashDisk\\FILETEST.exe”;
char b[5] = "";

if(@[x:HS0000.D] == true)
{
RunExtProgram ( &a, &b );

4-186
 4.Editing common data

4.3 [Effect] Dynamic Characteristic

The effect is to give dynamic characteristics to the display properties such as the shape/position of an
object. There are several types of effects as shown in the table below. To operate these effects, check
the corresponding effect and make detailed settings. Multiple effects can be checked at the same time
and operated in combination.

Effect Description
Width This function changes the size of an object in the horizontal
direction.

Height This function changes the size of an object in the vertical direction.

X Move This function moves and changes an object in the horizontal

direction.

Y Move This is a function to move and change an object in the vertical

direction.

Rotation This function rotates an object in a clockwise or counterclockwise

direction

Color This is a function that changes the line/character, background, and

foreground color of a figure to a pre-specified color.

4-187
 4.Editing common data

4.3.1 Width
This function changes the size of an object in the horizontal direction according to the size change value.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Input Limit Range Set the input limit range for the device value that can be referred to
when changing. If the target device is set to word, the [Input limit
range] function can be used. [Minimum Value] cannot be greater
than [Maximum Value].
- Minimum value: Set the minimum value to limit the size. When
the device value is less than the minimum value, the size becomes
the minimum value.
- Maximum: Set the maximum value to limit the size. When the

4-188
 4.Editing common data

Object Setting
device value is greater than the maximum value, the size becomes
the maximum value.

Size Change Range Set the size change range (%) when changing.
If [Target device] is a word, the size is calculated according to the
proportion of [Minimum/Maximum] of [Input limit range] and
[Start/End] of [Size change range].
[reference position]
- Left: Increases/decreases the object's size from the left to the
right.
- Center: The size increases/decreases in both directions based on
the horizontal center of the object.
- Right: Increases/decreases the size in the left direction based on
the right side of the object.

Auto Run If the bit device value is true to the specified bit condition, it is set
when the size change occurs with the virtual value of [Size change
range].
If you set the target device to beat, you can use the [Auto Run]
function. There are one-way (start->end, start->end) and two-way
(start->end>>start) driving directions. In [Duration Cycle], the cycle
is the time to perform [Direction Type] once.

4-189
 4.Editing common data

4.3.2 Height
This function changes the size of an object in the vertical direction according to the size change value.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Input Limit Range Set the input limit range for the device value that can be referred to
when changing. If the target device is set to word, the [Input limit
range] function can be used. [Minimum Value] cannot be greater
than [Maximum Value].
- Minimum value: Set the minimum value to limit the size. When
the device value is less than the minimum value, the size becomes
the minimum value.
- Maximum: Set the maximum value to limit the size. When the
device value is greater than the maximum value, the size becomes

4-190
 4.Editing common data

Object Setting
the maximum value.

Size Change Range Set the size change range (%) when changing.
If [Target device] is a word, the size is calculated according to the
proportion of [Minimum/Maximum] of [Input limit range] and
[Start/End] of [Size change range].
[reference position]
- Top: The size increases and decreases in the downward direction
from the top of the object.
- Middle: The size increases and decreases in both directions
based on the vertical center of the object.
- Below: The size increases and decreases in the upward direction
based on the bottom of the object.

Auto Run If the bit device value is true to the specified bit condition, it is set
when the size change occurs with the virtual value of [Size change
range].
If you set the target device to beat, you can use the [Auto Run]
function. There are one-way (start->end, start->end) and two-way
(start->end>>start) driving directions. In [Duration Cycle], the cycle
is the time to perform [Direction Type] once.

4-191
 4.Editing common data

4.3.3 X Move
This function changes the position of an object in the horizontal direction according to the movement
change value.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Input Limit Range Set the input limit range for the device value that can be referred to
when changing. If the target device is set to word, the [Input limit
range] function can be used. [Minimum Value] cannot be greater
than [Maximum Value].
- Minimum value: Set the minimum value to limit the size. When
the device value is less than the minimum value, the size becomes
the minimum value.

4-192
 4.Editing common data

Object Setting
- Maximum: Set the maximum value to limit the size. When the
device value is greater than the maximum value, the size becomes
the maximum value.

Move Change Range This function changes the position of an object in the horizontal
direction according to the movement change value.
Set the movement change range (pixels) when changing.
If [Target device] is a word, the size is calculated according to the
proportion of [Minimum/Maximum] of [Input limit range] and
[Begin/End] of [Move change range].

Auto Run If the bit device value is true to the specified bit condition, it is set
when the size change occurs with the virtual value of [Size change
range].
If you set the target device to beat, you can use the [Auto Run]
function. There are one-way (start->end, start->end) and two-way
(start->end>>start) driving directions. In [Duration Cycle], the cycle
is the time to perform [Direction Type] once.

4-193
 4.Editing common data

4.3.4 Y Move
This is a function that changes the position of an object in the vertical direction according to the
movement change value.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Input Limit Range Set the input limit range for the device value that can be referred to
when changing. If the target device is set to word, the [Input limit
range] function can be used. [Minimum Value] cannot be greater
than [Maximum Value].
- Minimum value: Set the minimum value to limit the size. When
the device value is less than the minimum value, the size becomes
the minimum value.

4-194
 4.Editing common data

Object Setting
- Maximum: Set the maximum value to limit the size. When the
device value is greater than the maximum value, the size becomes
the maximum value.

Move Change Range This function changes the position of an object in the horizontal
direction according to the movement change value.
Set the movement change range (pixels) when changing.
If [Target device] is a word, the size is calculated according to the
proportion of [Minimum/Maximum] of [Input limit range] and
[Begin/End] of [Move change range].

Auto Run If the bit device value is true to the specified bit condition, it is set
when the size change occurs with the virtual value of [Size change
range].
If you set the target device to beat, you can use the [Auto Run]
function. There are one-way (start->end, start->end) and two-way
(start->end>>start) driving directions. In [Duration Cycle], the cycle
is the time to perform [Direction Type] once.

4-195
 4.Editing common data

4.3.5 Rotation
This function changes the rotation of an object according to the rotation change value.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Input Limit Range Set the input limit range for the device value that can be referred to
when changing. If the target device is set to word, the [Input limit
range] function can be used. [Minimum Value] cannot be greater
than [Maximum Value].
- Minimum value: Set the minimum value to limit the size. When
the device value is less than the minimum value, the size becomes
the minimum value.

4-196
 4.Editing common data

Object Setting
- Maximum: Set the maximum value to limit the size. When the
device value is greater than the maximum value, the size becomes
the maximum value.

Rotation Change Range(Angle) Set the rotation change range (angle) when changing.
If [Target device] is a word, the size is calculated according to the
proportion of [Minimum/Maximum] of [Input limit range] and
[Begin/End] of [Rotation change range].

Rotation Center Point(Object The rotation center point is the center point of the object by
Center) default, and you can change the rotation center point by setting the
X, Y offset based on the object center point.

Auto Run If the bit device value is true to the specified bit condition, it is set
when the size change occurs with the virtual value of [Size change
range].
If you set the target device to beat, you can use the [Auto Run]
function. There are one-way (start->end, start->end) and two-way
(start->end>>start) driving directions. In [Duration Cycle], the cycle
is the time to perform [Direction Type] once.

4-197
 4.Editing common data

4.3.6 Color
This is a function that changes the line/character, background, and foreground color of a figure to a pre-
specified color.

Object Setting
Target Deivce Bit device or word device can be selected according to the
purpose of use.
Bit device Used for [Bit Condition] of [Auto Run]

Word device Used as a data value that can be referred

to when changing word devices.

Size 16bit or 32bit

Type Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, BCD,

float

Condition Execution Order Insert a row into the grid to enter the execution condition value of
the device when the color changes, and set the line/character,
background, and foreground color to be displayed under the
condition.

4-198
 4.Editing common data

4.4 Object
An object can change its shape according to the value of monitoring data. The following subsections
describe how to change the function and setting of each object in LXP-Designer. For details on drawing
object, refer to <2.3.4.3 Drawing an object >.

You can set conditions to change object characteristics such as background color, frame color, outline,
text display.

Object Setting
Switch object Action condition, Lamp condition

Word lamp Image, Text type

Word message Image color, Image background color, Text color, Text

Numeric input, Numeric display Image background color, Text color, Flashing

Word window Number of windows to move

Bar graph Fill background color, Fill color

Pie graph Fill background color, Fill color

Meter graph Pointer color

Closed curve graph Fill background color, Fill color

To set display condition, click in Object Property window for registration.

4-199
 4.Editing common data

The Edit Area and Condition window appear as shown below. The corresponding window can be
displayed differently by each object.

Function Description
Type Select a type for entering display condition.
(2 terms or 3 terms).

a. Preview expression You can preview a conditional expression.

b. Operand, operator Set operand and operator areas.

Constant Set the immediate value of an operand.

$V(Pivot Device) As an operand, sets the reference device value monitored by the
object.

$S(Other Device) As an operand, sets other device values.

Notes

Refer to the table below for the upper/lower limit values of the constant according to the device size.
Device size Device type Lower Upper
16bit Signed DEC -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647

4-200
 4.Editing common data

32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295

32 bit BCD 0 99999999

The Property window of a figure/object consists of [OK], [Cancel], and [Apply] buttons in common.

Items Description
OK The Property window is closed while all the set items are being
reflected.
If the device address is incorrect or not supported, a warning
window shows up and the window does not close.

Cancel All the set items are not reflected, and the Property window is
closed.

Apply Click the [Apply] button to apply changes made on the settings
page to objects and screens immediately. If you change the
background color of the header as shown below and click the
Apply button, it is immediately reflected in the screen and object
settings even if you do not close the setting window.
In this case, [undo/redo] is possible, and in the case of an invalid
property window like [OK], a warning window occurs and the
property is not applied.

4-201
 4.Editing common data

Items Description

4-202
 4.Editing common data

4.4.1 Lamp object

The lamp performs the function to change the shape or type depending on the set conditions, which is
suitable for the state of the device connected to PLC. The lamp objects are bit lamp, word lamp, and N-
phase lamp. The bit lamp changes depending on the on/off status. Therefore, the word lamp changes
depending on a text value, and the N-phase lamp changes according to the status of five devices.

Notes

 If the lamp is not connected to a PLC device, it is not displayed on XGT Panel.
 The lamp displays a basic image if the connection with the PLC device fails before 1 scan is
completed.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5.Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.
 When you place a lamp, do not overlap it with other object. The screen display does not show up
correctly.

4-203
 4.Editing common data

Bit lamp
The type of the bit lamp changes according to the on/off state of the connected device. Below is the
description of the possible settings in the bit lamp object.

• Basic: It is the basic setting of bit lamp object including the following matters.

- Device: You can enter a device or a tag address in the input box directly or click the keyboard
button to set the device or tag address in detail. If necessary, you can click the keyboard button to
set the network in the Device window.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-204
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a bit lamp object display setting including the following matters.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between "ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an
image. Select an image from raster, vector, or user
registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Color Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary
color) according to the selected vector image.

4-205
 4.Editing common data

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

4-206
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a bit lamp object character setting including the following items

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-207
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

4-208
 4.Editing common data

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

- Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-209
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is the detailed setting of bit lamp object including the following items.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the device of the basic tab is P100 and the value of the
offset device is 10, it is displayed in P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-210
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of bit lamp object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-211
 4.Editing common data

Word lamp
The word lamp type changes depending on the character value of the connected device. This section
describes the word lamp object.

The following is an example for how to create and set a word lamp.

1 Create a word lamp on the screen.

2 Double-click the word lamp to open Property window.

3 Set the device to HW 0 in the basic item.
4 Write the following four conditional statements in the basic item. ($V refers to a target device.)
$V == 1
$V == 2
$V == 3
$V == 4

5 Set an image that corresponds to conditions 1 ~ 4 in the display item.

6 Set a text that corresponds to conditions 1 ~ 4 in the character item.

4-212
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is the basic setting of word lamp object including the following matters.

- Device: You can enter a device or a tag address in the input box directly or click the keyboard
button to set the device or tag address in detail. If necessary, you can click the keyboard button to
set the network in the Device window.

- Size: Set a device data size (16 bit or 32 bit).

- Type: Set a device data type (signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number).

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange conditional statements.

(Insert) Create a new range condition. You can create up to 64 conditional

statements. If you press the corresponding button, Edit Range window
opens and you can create a condition. For details, refer to <4.2.1.3
Constant and data types>.

(Delete) If you select a condition, and press the corresponding button, the condition
is deleted.

(UP) If you select a condition, and press the corresponding button, it moves up
in the list.

(Down) If you select a condition, and press the corresponding button, it moves
down in the list.

4-213
 4.Editing common data

If you select a conditional statement, and press the corresponding button,

(Copy&Paste) a new conditional statement is added. However, it is not added if there are
64 conditional statements.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-214
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a word lamp object display setting including the following matters.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- State: Select a state from the drop-down list to configure a option for each state.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Copy to All States Copies all image properties in the current state to all other states.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between "ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an
image. Select an image from raster, vector, or user
registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
Color selected. Apply color to an image.

4-215
 4.Editing common data

You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

4-216
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a word lamp object character setting including the following matters.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the Text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the Text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the Text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font type settings are imported.

4-217
 4.Editing common data

- Copy to other states: Copies texts and formats in the current state to all other states.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [Copy to other states] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: You can set [Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the
currently set text are copied to a different state.

- Only Caption Continuous Copy: Captions are continuously copied from one state to another
based on the caption in the current state.

If entered directly
Append a number after the caption you entered directly
to copy it to other state automatically.
For example, if you set the caption to [Control 1] in the
1st state, the 0 caption is automatically set to [Control
0] and the 2nd state caption is set to [Control 2]
automatically.

If selected with the text The index of the text table increases by 1 automatically
table to be copied.
For example, if the caption of state 0 is ([0] stopped) as
shown below, the caption of state 1 is set to ([1]
waiting) and the caption of state 2 is ([2] in operation).

- Caption Continuous Copy: In the above method, the caption is copied continuously, and all set
property information (alignment, font, text size, etc.) are copied as well.

- Delete Caption: Clears the caption setting of the current state.

4-218
 4.Editing common data

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number

- Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-219
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is a word lamp operation setting including the following matters.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to <4.2
Scripts>.

4-220
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is the detailed setting of word lamp object including the following matters.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-221
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of word lamp object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-222
 4.Editing common data

N-phase lamp
Below is the description of the settings of the N-phase word lamp object. The type of the N-phase lamp
changes depending on to the state of up to 5 controllers. Refer to the example below.

Monitoring device (bit device): P0000, M0000

Priority State Bit device Image color Display text Blink state
number state
High State 0 P0000: OFF Blue Normal operation No flashing
M0000: OFF

State 1 P0000: ON Red Stop Fast

M0000: OFF

State 2 P0000: OFF Yellow Caution Slow

M000: ON

Low State 3 P0000: ON Purple Alarm Normal

M0000: ON

P0000: OFF / M0000: OFF P0000: ON / M0000: OFF

P0000: OFF / M0000: ON P0000: ON / M0000: ON

4-223
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is the basic setting of N-phase lamp object.

- The Num. of state: It sets the state count to display in the object. (3~16)

- State Change Condition: It sets the condition to change the device state.

Change Condition by Display on/off status with up to 15 controllers and 1 lamp. The
Bit maximum number of states is 16.
However, it sets the caption blink speed of an object.
Refer to the example below.
Display
Item P0 P1 P2 P3
example
State 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF

State 2 ON OFF OFF OFF

State 3 OFF ON OFF OFF

State 4 OFF OFF ON OFF

State 5 OFF OFF OFF ON

Change condition by Displays on/off state with up to 4 controllers and 1 lamp. The
bit combination maximum number of states is 16.

Refer to the example below.

4-224
 4.Editing common data

Display
Item P0 P1 P2 P3
example

State 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF

State 2 ON OFF OFF OFF

State 3 OFF ON OFF OFF

State 4 ON ON OFF OFF

State 5 OFF OFF ON OFF

- Device Setting: Enter a device or a tag address directly in the input area, or set a specific device
or a tag address with the keyboard button on the right. If you click the keyboard button to open the
Device window, you can set the network as well if necessary.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-225
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of N-phase lamp object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- State: Select a state from the drop-down list to configure a option for each state.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Copy to All States Copies all image properties in the current state to all other states.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between "ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an
image. Select an image from raster, vector, or user
registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
Color selected. Apply color to an image.

4-226
 4.Editing common data

You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

color) according to the selected vector image.
- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

4-227
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of N-phase lamp object.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the Text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-228
 4.Editing common data

- Delete Caption: Clears the caption setting of the current state.

- Copy to other states: Copies the current caption as caption property of other states.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [Copy to other states] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Only Caption Continuous Copy: Captions are continuously copied from one state to another
based on the caption in the current state.

If entered directly
Append a number after the caption you entered directly
to copy it to other state automatically.
For example, if you set the caption to [Control 1] in the
1st state, the 0 caption is automatically set to [Control
0] and the 2nd state caption is set to [Control 2]
automatically.

4-229
 4.Editing common data

If selected with the text The index of the text table increases by 1 automatically
table to be copied.
For example, if the caption of state 0 is ([0] stopped) as
shown below, the caption of state 1 is set to ([1]
waiting) and the caption of state 2 is ([2] in operation).

- Caption Continuous Copy: In the above method, the caption is copied continuously, and all set
property information (alignment, font, text size, etc.) are copied as well.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object. Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

- Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

4-230
 4.Editing common data

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-231
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of n-phase lamp object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-232
 4.Editing common data

4.4.2 Switch object

A switch performs one or more functions depending on the type. You can use five switch types. (Bit,
word, change screen, special, multi bit) bit switches control On/Off state, and the word switch runs a
script or changes value. The screen change switch changes the screen in XGT panel interface, the
special switch performs storage-related actions, and the multi bit switch performs multiple functions.
Notes

 The switch is not displayed on in XGT Panel if it is not connected to the PLC device when using the
lamp condition.
 The switch displays a basic image if the connection with the PLC device fails before 1 scan is
completed when using the lamp condition.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5.Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.

Bit switch
The bit switch controls the on/off state of the bit switch. Below is the description of the settings of the bit
switch object.

• Basic: It is the basic setting of the bit switch.

4-233
 4.Editing common data

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Copy to Lamp: It copies the basic device address of the bit switch to the bit device address of the
ramp condition.

- Action Type: Set the action to perform when the switch is enabled.

On It turns on the value of the corresponding bit device in PLC

when you touch the switch. The state is retained.

Off It turns off the value of the corresponding bit device in PLC
when you touch the switch. The state is retained.

Momentary Turns on the value of the corresponding bit device in PLC only
while you are touching the switch. If you do not press the
switch, it becomes Off state.

Alternative Turns on/off the value of the corresponding bit device when you
touch the switch,

- Use Lamp Condition: Select this when controlling the lamp with other methods other than the
method to turn on the lamp when the switch is enabled.

Bit Device Turns on the lamp when the device state is On.

Copy to Main The bit device address of the ramp condition is copied to the basic
device of the bit switch.

Word Device When the device value condition is met, turn on the lamp.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set the condition to mark with On as conditional expression.

- Use Lamp Offset: Select when using lamp offset.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-234
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of bit switch object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- Use Image Inversion: Tap an object or the switch image is inverted when the condition is met. If
you select this option, you cannot use Disable image function or On/Off image function. If you
select the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use the corresponding function.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between “ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an
image. Select an image from raster, vector, or user
registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
Color selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

4-235
 4.Editing common data

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

4-236
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of bit switch object.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-237
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

4-238
 4.Editing common data

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set a font style. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline) You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment. (left, middle, right)

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment. (top, middle, bottom)

4-239
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of bit switch object.

- Security Level: Set if you use a password for an object.

- Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Action Delay: Set if you use the Action Delay function.

- Type: Set the type of action delay.

On Delay When you continue to press the switch for the set time, the
value of the corresponding bit device is changed according to
the operation (On, Off, On only when pressed, Invert) set in
[Basic Item].
Return after Action The moment the switch is pressed, the actions set in [Basic
and Delay Item] (On, Off, On only when pressed, Invert) are performed,
and when you continue to press the switch for the set time, it
returns to the original state.
Check Twice If you press the switch once, a dialog box shows up. And, if you
press OK button, it operates the actions set in [Basic Item] (On,
Off, On only when pressed, Invert). If you do not press the OK
button so that a certain period of time elapses, the dialog
disappears automatically.

- Time: Set the time for action delay.

4-240
 4.Editing common data

- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set when using the Offset function.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-241
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: It is an action condition setting of bit switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-242
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of bit switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-243
 4.Editing common data

Word Switch
A word switch runs a script, enters a specific value, and adds or subtracts a value. Below is the
description of the word switch object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of word switch object

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Size: Set a device data size (16 bit or 32 bit).

- Type: Set a device data type (signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD).

- Action Type: Set an action to perform.

Writing a value Write the value you specified in the device.

Adding a value Add the value you specified to the value in the device.

Subtracting a Subtract the value you specified from the value in the device.
value

Script Run the set script.

4-244
 4.Editing common data

Increasing a specific Increase only the bit value in a specific position of the word
digit value device.
For adding a value, the current device value increases by the
operand value set by a user, whereas for Increase a specific digit
value, only set digit value increases.

For example, if you set the change of the third digit of the device
value,
and then operate the word switch, you can check that
only the third digit value is changed.

Decreasing a specific Decrease only the bit value in a specific position of the word
digit value device.
For Subtracting a value, the current device value decreases by
the operand value set by a user, whereas for Decrease a specific
digit value, only set digit value decreases.

Continuous You can set the corresponding action only in [Adding a value],
increase/decrease [Subtracting a value], [Increasing a specific digit value], or
action [Decreasing a specific digit value].
If you press and hold the switch for more than 1 second, it
increases or decreases by the value set in [Fixed value]-[Value]
once every 0.5 second. If the device value is out of the constant
value range in [Notes] below, round up the value. For example, if
the value is 16-bit signed DEC, and decreases by 1 while the
value is -32768, the value is set to 32767.

- Operand: Set a value to be written to the target device. You can set the operand in the format as
below.

Constant Set a fixed value as an operand in a conditional expression.

Indirect Set the device specified as an operand in a conditional expression.

Script Set when running a specific script other than adding, subtracting, or
writing a fixed value or the value of a specific device.

Data Type If a specific digit value increases or decreases, set the type of data to
be increased or decreased.
If the corresponding digit value of the device set by BCD data is 0 ~ 9,
the word switch does not operate.

Digit If a specific digit value increases or decreases, sets the corresponding

digit.

4-245
 4.Editing common data

If the device size is 16-bit, you can set from 1 to 4, and for 32-bit, you
can set from 1 to 8.

If you save the operands as script, they are applied to the device after you finish calculating the
final value.

Please refer to the description below.

1. Read a value from the device specified in the word switch and stores the value in a temporary
variable which refers to the device.

2. Run the script using the entered value.

3. Operate the script and apply the value stored in the temporary variable.

- In the above flowchart, the script action result means “The value of a temporary variable when a script
action is ended.” In addition, if the device value is changed while running the script, it does not affect
the script.
If you change the device value using a direct variable while the script is running, the changes are
maintained because the temporary variable value is written onto the device after the script is ended.

Notes

If you enter an operand as a fixed constant, depending on the size and shape of the reference
device, the range of possible constant values is as follows.
Device Size Device Type Minimum Value Maximum Value

Signed DEC -32768 32767

16 bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
BCD 0 9999
Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647
32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
BCD 0 99999999

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-246
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of word switch object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- Use Image Inversion: Tap an object or the switch image is inverted when the condition is met. If
you select this option, you cannot use Disable image function or On/Off image function. If you
select the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use the corresponding function.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between “ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an image.
Select an image from raster, vector, or user registration
image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Color Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

4-247
 4.Editing common data

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

4-248
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of word switch object.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-249
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

4-250
 4.Editing common data

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-251
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of word switch object.

- Security Level: Set if you use a password for an object.

- Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Action Delay: Set if you use the Action Delay function.

- Type: Set the type of action delay.

On Delay When the switch is enabled, the action is executed after a set
delay time.

Check Twice If you press this once, a confirmation dialog shows up, and if you
press this once again, the action is executed after a set delay
time.
- Time: Set the time for action delay.

- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set when using the Offset function.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-252
 4.Editing common data

• Lamp Condition: It is a lamp condition setting of word switch object.

- Use Lamp Condition: This is selected when controlling the lamp in a way other than how to turn
on the lamp if you touch the switch on XGT Panel.

- Type: Select the condition for lamp control.

Bit When the device bit is On, turn on the lamp.

Word When the setting conditions are met, turn on the lamp.

- Bit: If you select bit condition, bit device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click
the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard
button, you can set network as well if necessary.

- Word: If you select word condition, word device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or
click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the
keyboard button, you can set network as well if necessary.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

4-253
 4.Editing common data

- Use Lamp Offset: Set the lamp offset.

• Action Condition: It is an action condition setting of word switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

4-254
 4.Editing common data

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-255
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of word switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-256
 4.Editing common data

Change Screen Switch

The change screen switch changes the interface screen. You can set the screen type to change when
you press the switch. Below is the description of the settings of the screen change switch object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of the change screen switch object.

- Screen Type: Select the type of screen to change.

- Type: Set the screen change method.

Device Move to the number corresponding to the set device value. If there is no
screen corresponding to the set device value, do not move.

Const Move to the set screen regardless of the device value.

Screen Number You can set the screen number or click [Browse] to specify it.

If you have set [Project Property > Screen Setting > Screen Change Device], try to write the screen
number in the corresponding ‘Change screen device’ first when the change screen switch
operates. If communication is smooth, a value is written onto the corresponding device and the
screen is changed, but if communication is disconnected, repeated attempts are made by the time
amount of [Timeout Time * Retry Count] entered in [Project Property > XGT Panel Settings]. And
even if you fail to write a value onto the change screen device fails after the corresponding time
has elapsed, the screen is changed. In this state, if communication is resumed to read value of the
change screen device, it returns to the screen corresponding to that value.

- Screen Change Type: Set the screen change type.

4-257
 4.Editing common data

Fixed Changes to the set screen.

Previous Changes to the previous screen.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

- Offset when using import: Applies an offset value to the screen number when importing a screen
including the change screen switch.

If you do not select the corresponding option, the value is not changed even after importing the
screen number. If you do not set the corresponding option, the screen number value keeps having
1.

If you set the corresponding option, the screen number ,to which the offset value set when you
right-click and import in the base screen, list has been applied.

4-258
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of change screen switch object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- Use Image Inversion: Tap an object or the switch image is inverted when the condition is met. If
you select this option, you cannot use Disable image function or On/Off image function. If you
select the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use the corresponding function.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between “ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply a pattern or a
color to an image. Select an image from raster, vector, or
user registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Color Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

4-259
 4.Editing common data

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

4-260
 4.Editing common data

• Text: Text setting of change screen switch object

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-261
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

4-262
 4.Editing common data

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

- Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-263
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of the change screen switch object.

- Security Level: Set if you use a password for an object.

- Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Action Delay: Set if you use the Action Delay function.

- Type: Set the type of action delay.

On Delay When the switch is enabled, the action is executed after a set
delay time.

Check Twice If you press this once, a confirmation dialog shows up, and if you
press this once again, the action is executed after a set delay time.

- Time: Set the time for action delay.

- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set when using the Offset function.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-264
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: It is an action condition setting of change screen switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-265
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of the change screen switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-266
 4.Editing common data

Special Switch
The special switch performs key code, alarm, logging, printing, language conversion, script running,
storage-related action, etc. Below is the description of the special switch object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of special switch object. You can select a function and set the property in
the special switch function setting.

4-267
 4.Editing common data

- Multimedia
Function Description
Play

• Direct: Enter the path and file name of the file to play. You do not need
to enter the extension of the video file.
• Device: Set the device to receive the file name.
• Instant playback: Instantly plays a file in an ascending order by file
name.
• You can play only video files with mp4, avi, and wmv extensions.

Stop Stops a video file that is being played.

Pause/Restart Pauses/restarts a video file that is being played.

Fast Forward Moves forward by the set time.

Rewind Moves backward by the set time.

Next File Plays the next file in an ascending order by file name.

Previous File Plays the previous file in an ascending order by file name.

- View history alarm list

Function Description
Alarm group filtering Filters only a specific group and displays the history alarms which have
occurred.

4-268
 4.Editing common data

Function Description
Check All Alarm Data in Check all alarm data of the currently displayed page in the history alarm
Alarm Page view. In this case, a check time is recorded in all alarm data of the
current page.
 When checking all data
Check Selected Alarm Data
in Alarm Viewer

 When checking selected data

Delete All Occurrence No. Deletes the number of occurrences of all history alarms which have
occurred.

Delete Occurrenc No. of Deletes the number of occurrences of currently selected history alarms
Selected Alarm Data

Delete Recovered Alarm If you press the switch, the recovered data of the current page is
Data in Alarm Viewer deleted.

Delete Recovered All Data If you press the switch, all recovered data are deleted.
in Alarm Viewer

4-269
 4.Editing common data

Function Description
Delete Selected Recovered If you press the switch, the selected data except for unrecovered alarm
in Alarm Viewer data is deleted.

Show detail window When an alarm occurs according to the set history alarm occurrence
condition, you may want additional information related to the
corresponding alarm. In this case, the edited window screen is displayed
to get additional information through the use of an object, etc.
The detailed setting method is as follows:
1. Edit the detailed window screen.
2. Check the movement of the detailed screen in the history alarm list
of common data.
3. Set View details in the history alarm view.
4. Select an alarm in XGT Panel and press the special switch.

History Alarm Filter Set the history alarm data filter and display the View history alarm
object. There are five types of filters (Generated, Checked, Restored,
Unchecked, and Not restored).
Type Description

Generated Shows all history alarm data.

Check If you press the switch, it shows

checked history alarm data.

Restored Shows restored history alarm data.

Examples for checked history alarm data

4-270
 4.Editing common data

Function Description

One Line Down If you press the switch, it scrolls history alarm data in a specific
direction.
One Line Up

One Page Down

One Page Up

Print data If you press the switch, it prints selected history alarm data. Select the
alarm group from the list of history alarms.

4-271
 4.Editing common data

Function Description
Selected History Alarm If you press the switch, it moves the line or page of history alarm data.
Viewer Line Down

Selected History Alarm

Viewer Line Up

4-272
 4.Editing common data

- View history alarm horizontal list: You can move to the specified area of the history alarm data
through the corresponding function. Also, you can check the data that exceeds the displayed
column.

4-273
 4.Editing common data

The following is the description of the function related to history alarm.

Function Description
Next column If there are more columns to be displayed than those displayed on the
device screen, you can check the next column using the corresponding
function.
(For the columns to be displayed through the use of the corresponding
action, the fixed columns remain while non-fixed columns are
displayed.)

All columns are not displayed in the example above. Therefore, you
shall obtain enough space of the object in order to display all columns.

Previous column If there are more columns to be displayed than those displayed on the device
screen, you can check the previous column using the corresponding function.
(For the columns to be displayed through the use of the corresponding action,
the fixed columns remain while non-fixed columns are displayed.)

First column Displays the value of the first column out of data over the View history
alarm object displayed on the device.

Last column Displays the value of the last column out of data over the View history
alarm object displayed on the device.

The part where the column size exceeds the total object size is
displayed in gray.

4-274
 4.Editing common data

- Viewing the logging vertical list

Function Description
One line down Press the switch to scroll up/down the logging data.

One line up

One page down

One page up

- Viewing the logging horizontal list

Function Description
View the first column Press the switch to move to a specific area of history alarm data. If the
data column count exceeds the columns provided by XGT Panel, you
View the last column can view more data.
View the next column In the example below, fixed rows never move, but non-fixed areas can
be moved, so that more data can be displayed.
View the previous column

View the next page Fixed Non-fixed

View the previous page

Time Location Step 3 Step 4

2013/03/29 Line 1 21 31
2013/03/30 Line 2 22 32
2013/03/31 Line 3 23 33
2013/04/01 Line 4 24 34
If the object area is larger than the area displayed up to the last column,
the remaining area is filled with gray.

- Logging trend
Function Description
View the next data You can see the next log. You can set the number of logs to be
displayed. For example, if you set it to 8, the graph displays the next 8
logs.

4-275
 4.Editing common data

Function Description

View the previous data You can see the previous log. You can set the number of logs to be
displayed. If you set the number to 8, the trend for the 8 previous logs
is displayed in the graph.

View the first data You can view the first or last log data.

View the last data

Set/disable BookMark It is a function to set a data area that a user wants as BookMark in the
logging trend graph, and move the data area of the graph freely and
return to the BookMark position again.
For example, set 2 BookMarks as follows:

If you set BookMark as above, move the graph to the area marked with

4-276
 4.Editing common data

Function Description
a dotted line as shown below and press BookMark moving special
switch, it moves the graph area with a straight line (BookMark 1).

Dotted line: An area displayed in Logging Trend before moving to

BookMark
Straight line: An area displayed in Logging Trend after moving to
BookMark1
1. Up to 5 BookMarks can be selected.
2. If BookMark setting exceeds the maximum of 5, delete the oldest
set BookMark.
3. If you press [Set/disable BookMark] special switch is pressed in
the logging data set as BookMark, the previously set BookMark is
disabled.
4. If you set [Use storage area circulation buffer] so that the previous
data is deleted after the logging area is full, BookMark is also
deleted if the corresponding data was set as BookMark.
5. If the data set as BookMark is displayed in the graph area, the
BookMark shows up at the origin position as follows.

4-277
 4.Editing common data

Function Description

Move to BookMark Move to the set BookMark.

6. If you operate [Move to BookMark] special switch for the first time,
it moves the next BookMark sequentially starting with the oldest
set BookMark position.
7. If you move to the last BookMark, it moves to the first BookMark
position again.
8. Even if the latest logging occurs while [Move to BookMark], do not
display the latest logging in the graph area. You need to move to
the latest logging area via [View the Last Data] or [View the Next
Data].

4-278
 4.Editing common data

- Others
Function Description
Change Runtime When you press the special switch, the function of changing the
Language language in XGT Panel is performed. Select a language you want to
change in the function setting.

You can select a language, which can be changed, from the languages
registered in [Common]-[Project Property]-[Language Setting]-[Runtime
Language].

Close Window Arrange it on the window screen, and if you touch it during monitoring,
the window screen is closed. It operates if it is placed on the window
connected to the bit window object, the history alarm detail screen
window, and the keypad window screen, but it does not operate in the
window connected to the word window object.

Security mode locked For an object whose security was set, it is usually locked again in
security mode when a certain period of time elapses after security is
released. The corresponding function is to switch back to the security
mode if you press the special switch before a certain period of time
elapses.

4-279
 4.Editing common data

Function Description
Key Switch It is a switch for entering a value into a character input or a numeric
input. Set the key code to be executed in the function setting as shown
below.

You can set numbers, alphabets, and special symbols (Esc, Clear, etc.).
If you touch the specified key special switch when it is executed in XGT
Panel, the specified text is entered into the numeric input or text input
currently in input waiting state.
If AScii char. or, Unicode char. is selected, a user can enter only one text
value directly.
For the uppercase key function, a user can enter a Text value in
uppercase letters.

4-280
 4.Editing common data

Function Description

Notes

Enter uppercase letters:

ASCII: You cannot use uppercase letters directly. Set caps lock
switch and text switch to enter uppercase letters. (A=caps lock switch
+ “a” input switch)
Unicode: Set uppercase letters in advance. Only one switch is
required.

Move cursor to next order Set to move a numeric or text input object to the next/previous area.

Move cursor to previous

order

Print screen When you press the switch in XGT Panel, only the currently displayed
screen is printed.
The screen content is printed to the set output location. Set the output
location [Common]-[Project Property]-[Other Settings]-[Screen Capture]-
[Output Location].

4-281
 4.Editing common data

Function Description

Option Description

Save as file The screen content is saved as a Bitmap

file in the path set in [Common]-[Project
Property]-[Set Storage Use Setting]-
[Backup Data Location]-[Screen Capture
Image].

Print Prints a screenshot using a connected

printer via USB.

Save and print Prints using the USB printer which is

connected to XGT Panel currently.
If the printer is not connected, a system
alarm saying that the printer is not
connected occurs. If an alarm occurs,
connect the printer and try again.
For system alarm setting, check View Alarm
Screen in [Common]-[Project Property]-
[Others].

Runtime Exit When you press the special switch, it stops the current monitoring
operation and returns to the menu screen of XGT Panel series.

Safe Removal Switch If a user presses the safe removal switch, the same effect as the
operation of the hardware safe removal switch occurs.
If a user presses the safe removal switch, it removes the corresponding
storage device (SD, extended memory), and remove the corresponding
storage as soon as the currently operating function is completed.
You can check whether the storage has been detached via the special
device which displays the detachment of the storage, and the address of
the special device is as follows.
Storage device Special device address

SD card HS051.2

Extended HS051.1
memory

4-282
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of special switch object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- Use Image Inversion: Tap an object or the switch image is inverted when the condition is met. If
you select this option, you cannot use Disable image function or On/Off image function. If you
select the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use the corresponding function.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between “ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an image.
Select an image from raster, vector, or user registration
image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Color Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

4-283
 4.Editing common data

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

4-284
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of special switch object.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-285
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

4-286
 4.Editing common data

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

- Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-287
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of special switch

- Security Level: Set if you use a password for an object.

- Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Action Delay: Set if you use the Action Delay function.

- Type: Set the type of action delay.

On Delay When the switch is enabled, the action is executed after a set delay
time.

Check Twice If you press this once, a confirmation dialog shows up, and if you
press this once again, the action is executed after a set delay time.

- Time: Set the time for action delay.

- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set when using the Offset function.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Action Trigger (Only History Alarm Viewer/Multimedia): Set whether to use the action device
when viewing history alarm list/displaying multimedia. If you touch a special switch on XGT Panel
or a specific device turns on, the special switch function is enabled.

4-288
 4.Editing common data

Notes

If there are two or more “Play” switches with the same action device set when there are two
or more multimedia objects in one screen (main screen/pop-up window/overlapping window,
etc.), it is not guaranteed that a video file plays at a location where the switch is located
when you press the switch. Therefore, it is not recommended to use the same device for the
action device.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-289
 4.Editing common data

• Lamp Condition: It is a lamp condition setting of special switch object.

- Use Lamp Condition: This is selected when controlling the lamp in a way other than how to turn
on the lamp if you touch the switch on XGT Panel.

- Type: Select the condition for lamp control.

Bit When the device bit is On, turn on the lamp.

Word When the setting conditions are met, turn on the lamp.

- Bit: If you select bit condition, bit device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click
the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard
button, you can set network as well if necessary.

- Word: If you select word condition, word device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click
the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard
button, you can set network as well if necessary.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

4-290
 4.Editing common data

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Use Lamp Offset: Set the lamp offset.

4-291
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: It is an action condition setting of special switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-292
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of special switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-293
 4.Editing common data

MultiAction Switch
The multiaction switch object is capable of performing a combination of bit switch, word switch, screen
change switch, and special switch functions. Up to 8 functions can be performed at once, and you can
set the sequence of each function. Below is the description of the multi switch object.

• Basic: It is the basic setting of multi switch.

- Set Script in Up or Down Action: Set a script for the press and release state of the switch.

Down Action Set a script to run when you press a switch.

Up Action Set a script to run when you release a switch.

- Operation Type: Select and manage an operation.

(Delete) Delete the operation you selected from the list.

(Up) Raise up the priority of the operation you selected by one.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the operation you selected by one.

- Bit Operation: Set the bit switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.1 Bit switch>.

- Word Operation: Set the word switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.2 Word switch>.

4-294
 4.Editing common data

- Change Screen: Set Change screen switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.3 Change
screen switch>.

Notes

The Change screen switch should always be set last in multiple switch. Even if you set the
Change Screen switch in the middle of multiple operation, it is automatically set lastly.

- Print Screen: Set Print screen switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special switch>.

- Change Language: Set Change language switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special
switch>.

- Special Operation: Set Special operation switch condition. For details, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special
switch>.

Notes

Both Change Switch Language and Print Screen switch are special switches, but they
operate independently.
You can add only one [Special Operation] of multiple switch.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-295
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of multiaction switch object.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

- Use Image Inversion: Tap an object or the switch image is inverted when the condition is met. If
you select this option, you cannot use Disable image function or On/Off image function. If you
select the Transparent BG Image option, you cannot use the corresponding function.

- On: Configures the option for an object in the On state.

- Off: Configures the option for an object in the Off state.

- Off->On Copy: Copies all image properties in Off state to On.

- On->Off Copy: Copies all image properties in On state to Off.

- Image Type: Set whether the color can be changed when switched between “ON” and “OFF”
states. If you select the Change Color option, you shall select a vector image of the object. To view
the characteristics of a raster or vector image, refer to <2.4.1 Graphic library management>.

Not Change Color Use the original image. You can apply color to an
image. Select an image from raster, vector, or user
registration image to display On or Off state.

Same Image & Change Select the vector image. The raster image cannot be
Color/Pattern selected. Apply color to an image.
You can change up to 2 colors (main color, secondary

4-296
 4.Editing common data

color) according to the selected vector image.

- Library: Select an image from the library. Image categories are divided into Raster, Vector1,
Vector2 in the library list. Vector2 is a high-quality vector image newly provided by LXP-Designer.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

4-297
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of multi switch object.

- Use Caption: Click the checkbox to use a text. If you select this option, you can enter a text from
the text table.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- From Text Table: Click the checkbox to add a text in the text table. The option is enabled in the
text table and the character space is disabled. Add the required texts to the text table before
editing an object. You shall select the texts for the “on” and “off” states from the same text table.

- Text Table: Click to open the text table and select a text. Color and font format settings are
imported.

4-298
 4.Editing common data

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Copy Only Caption: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Caption]. In this case, only the currently set texts are copied to a different state.

- Copy Only Property: If you press the arrow in [On->Off Copy] as shown below, you can set
[Copy Only Property]. In this case, all properties except for the currently set text are copied to a
different state.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Blink: Set the caption blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

4-299
 4.Editing common data

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Char. Space: Set a character space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and
when the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be overlapped or it can be
displayed as same effect as a positive number.

Line Space: Set a line space. When the value is negative number, spacing is reduced, and when
the value becomes very small as a negative number, it can be go up or it can be displayed as
same effect as a positive number.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-300
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of multiaction switch object.

- Security Level: Set if you use a password for an object.

- Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Action Delay: Set if you use the Action Delay function.

- Type: Set the type of action delay.

On Delay When the switch is enabled, the action is executed after a set delay time.

Check Twice If you press this once, a confirmation dialog shows up, and if you press
this once again, the action is executed after a set delay time.

- Time: Set the time for action delay.

- Offset in [Write] Operation: Set when using the Offset function.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-301
 4.Editing common data

• Lamp Condition: It is a lamp condition setting of special switch object.

- Use Lamp Condition: This is selected when controlling the lamp in a way other than how to turn
on the lamp if you touch the switch on XGT Panel.

- Type: Select the condition for lamp control.

Bit When the device bit is On, turn on the lamp.

Word When the setting conditions are met, turn on the lamp.

- Bit: If you select bit condition, bit device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the
keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button,
you can set network as well if necessary.

- Word: If you select word condition, word device is set.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click
the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard
button, you can set network as well if necessary.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Use Lamp Offset: Set the lamp offset.

4-302
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: It is an action condition setting of multiaction switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-303
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of multi switch object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-304
 4.Editing common data

4.4.3 Message object

A message object displays a message according to the set bit or word device. To use the message
object, you shall register the message in Text table in advance.
Notes

 If the message object is not connected with the PLC device, only the background image is displayed.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5.Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.

Bit Message
This section describes the bit message object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of bit message object.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-305
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of bit message object.

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background/image and color settings at the same time.

- Main Color: You can set the main color when selecting a vector image.

- Sub Color: You can set the sub color when selecting a vector image.

- Use Border: Set whether to use a border in the message area. You can set a border if you check
Disable Image.

- Border Color: Set a border color.

4-306
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of bit message object.

- On: Configure the option of the object in the “on” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Off: Configure the option of the object in the “off” state. You must enter a text in the text table.

- Text Table: Open the text table to select a text. Import the color and font set in the text table along
with the text.

- On <-> Off Copy: Copy text and format in the “ON” state with “OFF” state or vice versa.

- Delete On/Off Caption: Clear the currently set text.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using characters in the text table.

Color Set a font color.

Format Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more

4-307
 4.Editing common data

than one option at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical Alignment: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

4-308
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: detailed setting of bit message object

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-309
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: display trigger setting of bit message object

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-310
 4.Editing common data

Word message
This section describes the word message object.

• Basic: basic setting of word message object

- Message Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the
keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network
as well if necessary. If you set a message number as an indirect or conditional statement, the word
message of the message number input in the message device is output.

- Size: Set a device data size (16-bit or 32-bit). If you change the object device size, the previously
set condition is deleted.

- Type: Set a device data type (signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number).

- Message Num: Set a message type. If you change the message type, the previously set condition
is deleted. The message number refers to the number of each row in Edit window of Text Table.

4-311
 4.Editing common data

Indirect (Device Use the value read from the reference device as a number in Text Table
Value) to display the message corresponding to the number.

Case (Set the If the reference device meets the set condition among the set
conditional in condition expressions, display the text you specified.
the Character Set a conditional statement Text tab.
tab.)

4-312
 4.Editing common data

Fixed Displays the message, which corresponds to the specified number.

You cannot [Offset] device if it is set as a fixed value.

- TextTable Num: Set the method to select the text table number. As shown below, the text table
number refers to the number displayed in front of the text table name.

Fixed Set the text table number to be displayed directly.

Device Displays the table number, which corresponds to the set device value.
For example, if the device value is 7, use the text table of [7 Text
Table_7].

- Number of Continuous Display Rows: Displays the messages as many as the number of
consecutive rows starting with the first message number. For example, if the text table is as below,
the value of message device HW0000 is 3, and the number of consecutive display rows is 6, it is
displayed as shown below.

4-313
 4.Editing common data

If it is set as above, it is displayed as below.

A-UMAC ERROR ACK

A-PC처리중ERROR ACK
A-VISION ERROR ACK
B-UMAC ERROR ACK
B-PC처리중ERROR ACK
B-VISION ERROR ACK

If you display consecutive rows, the text property is based on the set value of the first row.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-314
 4.Editing common data

• Display: display setting of word message object

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background/image and color settings at the same time.

- Main Color: You can set the main color when selecting a vector image.

- Sub Color: You can set the sub color when selecting a vector image.

- Use Border: Set whether to use a border in the message area. You can set a border if you check
Disable Image.

- Border color: Set a border color.

4-315
 4.Editing common data

• Text: text setting of word message object

- [Basic]-[Text Table]: Displays the text table set in Basic tab.

- Font: A user cannot set the font of a message. The messages displayed in Word Message object
share the basic settings of the text table created in advance. Therefore, the message font is the
same as the font of the current editing language set in [Common]-[Project Property]-[Language
Settings].

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Horizontal: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

- Vertical: Set the vertical alignment (Top, Middle, Bottom).

- Case: Shows the set text when selecting a conditional statement in the object. You can select it
from the text table and change it.

- Text Table: Open the text table to select a text. Import the color and font set in the text table along
with the text.

- Delete All Message: Deletes all messages assigned to an object.

- Case Property: Set the property of the text to be displayed in the conditional statement state.

- Char. Space: Set the spacing between characters in a message. (Range: 0 ~ 255)

- Line Space: Set the line spacing of a message. (Range: -127 ~ 255)

4-316
 4.Editing common data

- Change the Property of Text Table: Click the attribute selected in the text table to use a different
color or font. This option is enabled only when using a text in the string table after setting the
message number as a conditional statement.

- Color: Set the color of a text. If you check Change property selected in the string table, you can
change the font color set in the text table.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Font Style: Set a font style. If you check Change selected property in the string table, you can set
the text format (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option at a time.

- Conditional statement: If you set [Basic]-[Message Number] to [Conditional Statement], you can
enter a conditional statement.

If press the right button in the conditional statement column, a dialog for entering a conditional
statement is displayed.

If you press the right button in the string column when you select the string, a dialog for entering
the string table is displayed. If you selected a string you want, [Color] is displayed in the color set in
[Text Table]. If you want to change [Color], set [Change Property], and then set the font color.

For an item which you want to [Copy/Paste], select the corresponding row, press [Ctrl+C], and then
press [Ctrl+V] in the row you want to paste.

4-317
 4.Editing common data

If you want to delete an item, select a row (or click a column), and then press [Delete] key.

If the image type is vector in the display, a column, in which you can change the frame color and
background color, is displayed.

If you want to change the order of conditional statements, release the mouse at the position of the
column to be moved while clicking the column you want to change with the mouse.

If you want to select row 3 and change the order to the front of row 2, release the mouse in front
of row 2 as shown below.

4-318
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of word message object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to <4.2
Scripts>.

4-319
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of word message object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110. You cannot set the offset if [Basic]-[Message Number] selection method is
[Fixed].

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-320
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of word message object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-321
 4.Editing common data

4.4.4 Number/character object

The number/character object performs the function to display the value of the corresponding device in
numbers or characters on the screen or enter the value set by the keypad into the device. Four types
of number/character object can be used as shown below.

Type Details
Enters and displays numerical values in the word device connected to
Enter number
the PLC in XGT Panel.

Displays the data of word device connected to the PLC as numerical

Display number
values on XGT Panel.

Writes the character that you entered onto the word device as ASCII
Enter character
code.

Display Regards the data stored in the word device as ASCII code value and
character displays the text table.

Notes

 If the number/character object is not connected with the PLC device, only the background image is
displayed.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5.Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.

4-322
 4.Editing common data

Numeric input
Use the numeric input to enter the value into the word device. This section describes numeric input.

• Basic: It is the basic description of the number input object.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Use Input Function: If you disable the corresponding option, it changes from numeric input to
numeric display. Object property setting is set automatically according to the type. For details, refer
to <4.3.4.2 Numeric display>.

- Size: It sets the data size (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change the existing data size, the input/display
conditions are changed to the corresponding type and size, and the value is changed according to
the data size display type.

4-323
 4.Editing common data

- Display Format: It sets a display format.

Numeric Format Set a numeric format (signed DEC, unsigned DEC, octal,
hexadecimal, binary, BCD, real number).
Format Example

Signed DEC -2184

Unsigned DEC 2184

Octal 4210

Hexadecimal 888

Binary 10010001000

BCD 888

Real number 2184.0

Digits Set how many digits to display numerical values.

You can specify up to 64 digits.
If the numeric count you set is smaller than the read device and
write device values, * is displayed in the object.
If you cannot display a device value in BCD format, it is displayed
with ~.

No. of Decimal Digits Set how many digits to display part when you selected all numeric
types except for binary, octal and hexadecimal.
Const Enter the decimal count directly.

Device The decimal count changes dynamically

depending on a device value.

Format Set the display format for numeric values and characters.
A user can specify a character format directly or select it from the
string table. You can enter characters directly, but numeric values
are displayed as *. The number of * is the number of digits, and
determined by the number of discards.

Direct A user enters a character format directly.

From Select a character format from the string

Text table. In this case, you can change the

4-324
 4.Editing common data

Table character format according to switch

language.

Example)

If you set as above, the results displayed on XGT Panel differ

depending on the device.
• Device (if the value is 12345)

1 2 3 4 5
→ 12cm 34mm

No. of Display: 5

Truncated Digits:

• Device (if the value is 123)

1 2 3
→ cm 12mm
No. of Display 5

Truncated Digits:

4-325
 4.Editing common data

Notes

If you specified a character format in the string table, the

character format (bold, strikeout, etc.), color, and font of
[Text Table] are not applied. In this case, each property
set in [Character] tab is applied.

Truncated Digits Set the discard count of numeric values. They are discarded in
the order of most significant bits to least significant bits.

- Use Scaling: Set if a user scales and enters a random value in the set PLC device address. Actual
PLC and displayed value differ depending on data size and display format. If a value entered by a
user exceeds the maximum value, the device recognizes it as the maximum value. In addition, if
the input value is less than the minimum value, it is recognized as the minimum value to be
entered into the device. If a value you enter is out of the input maximum/minimum value range of
scaling, it is not entered.

Device Min. Dev. Set the scaling function, and then enter the minimum data value
of the PLC device you want to scale.
Device: You can set the minimum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the minimum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Device Max. Dev. Set the scaling function, and then enter the maximum data
value of the PLC device you want to scale.
Device: You can set the maximum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the maximum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Input Min Out Set the scaling function, and then enter the minimum data value
you want to display on the scale.

4-326
 4.Editing common data

Device: You can set the minimum value as a device address.

Constant: You can specify the minimum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Input Max Out Set the scaling function, and then enter the maximum data
value you want to display on the scale.
Device: You can set the maximum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the maximum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Use Round Off Set whether to round off the scaled result value.
Uncheck ‘Use Round Off’: Decimal points in calculation result
are always discard.
Check ‘Use Round Off’: Decimal points in calculation result to be
rounded up.

Scaling example: set as below.

1) Scaling applied numeric input device: M0000
2) Device Maximum value: 100
3) Device Minimum value: 0
4) Input Maximum value: 1000
5) Input Minimum value: 0
6) Device Value (value that inputs to numeric input object): 100

{ (Device Maximum value – Device Minimum value) / (Input Maximum value – Input Minimum
value) } * Device Value
{ (100 – 0) / (1000 – 0) } * 100 = 10 is entered.

4-327
 4.Editing common data

However, in the case of a number input device, when a value is entered and displayed on an object, it
is output in the same way as a number output device. Therefore, the value may be displayed
differently than the value entered. After entering the value as above, the object is displayed in the
following way.
{ (Input maximum value – Input minimum value) / (Device maximum value – Device minimum
value) } * device value
{ (1000 – 0 ) / (100 – 0 ) } * 10 = 100 will be printed out.
At this time, the value of the control device means the value after scaling is applied and input to the
PLC device.

<Numeric Input, Numeric Output Scaling applied>

<Only Numeric Output scaling applied>

Round Off example: set as below.

1) Device Maximum value: 100
2) Device Minimum value: 0
3) Input Maximum value: 500
4) Input Minimum value: 0
Device Value Display value when round off Display value is set
(Value that entered numeric is not set
input object)
50 10 10

53 10 11

4-328
 4.Editing common data

(Truncate the decimal point of (Calculation result decimal

the calculation result) point rounding)

86 17 17
(Truncate the decimal point of ((Calculation result decimal
the calculation result) point rounding))

100 20 20

204 40 41
(Truncate the decimal point of ((Calculation result decimal
the calculation result) point rounding))

4-329
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 The scalable PLC actual data value and the displayable data value differ respectively depending on
the data size and display type.
Device size Device type Minimum value Maximum value
16 bit upper type Signed DEC -128 127

Unsigned DEC, binary, octal, 0 255

and hexadecimal

16 bit lower type Signed DEC -128 127

Signed DEC, binary, octal, and 0 255

hexadecimal

16 bit Signed DEC -32768 32767

Unsigned DEC 0 65535

BCD 0 9999

32 bit Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647

Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295

BCD 0 99999999

 The following errors may occur when you enter a number.

Message Case Solution

Can’t Write Data Occurs when communication Check the power state of the
between XGT Panel series and PLC connection cable or PLC, XGT
fails Panel

Exceeded The Occurs when you enter a value that Enter a correct value by referring
Maximum Value! exceeds the size and type of the to the range of available device
device values.
 If the data size is changed, the previously written input cases and display cases are deleted.
 If communication failure with PLC occurs during input or read operation, only the background image
of the object is displayed on XGT Panel series and numbers are not displayed.
 To enter decimals, press ‘.’ on the keypad and then enter a number you want.

- Use Encryption: Encrypts a user input value. An input value is displayed as “*”.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-330
 4.Editing common data

- Output Expression: Set the operation expression using the data device or fixed value added by the
user. Activated when the target device is set. The set formula is displayed in the formula preview.

Calculation Order Enter the order displayed in the equation.

Operator Select the operator used in the expression. Supported

operators are:
+, -, /, *, ^, |, &, <<, >>

Device/Constant Set the data used for the device/fixed value operation
expression. Set device or fixed value according to data type.
Device: Can be set as device address.
Fixed value: You can directly designate a constant according to
the data size and number format.

Data Type Data type Select the data type used in the operation
expression.
Select from Fixed Value, Bit, Signed 16-bit, Unsigned 16-bit,
Signed 32-bit, Unsigned 32-bit, BCD 16-bit, BCD 32-bit, Real
32-bit.

Ignore Condition Set the conditions under which the output operation function
does not operate. When checking the ignore condition and
setting the bit address to be used as the condition, data
operation does not work when the bit address is On.

4-331
 4.Editing common data

- Use Cipher: Encrypt user input. Input values are displayed as “*”.

- Description: Enter a description of the object.

• Display: Display setting of number input object

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically added
to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background transparent.
You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time. You can use
the frame background color only when using a vector image.

Main Color Set the main color.

Sub Color Set the sub color.

4-332
 4.Editing common data

• Text: Text setting of number input object

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to increase
or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Text Plate Color: Set the text plate color.

Disable text plate color. Enable text plate color (blue).

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set the
left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

4-333
 4.Editing common data

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option at
a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

• Input Case: Input case setting of a number input object.

- Input Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions. You can set only one case in the
numeric input.

Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
(Insert)
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(UP) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

4-334
 4.Editing common data

• Display Case: Display case setting of numeric input object.

- Display Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions. If a device value matches
multiple cases, it is displayed according to the first matched condition.

Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
(Insert)
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(UP) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

<Example of display case>

$V refers to the value of the device to monitor.
If the display case is $V > 0:
Setting Case Plate Color Text Color Blink
Expression
Case 1 200 <= $V < 300 Blue Yellow Not used

Case 2 $V > 1000 Yellow Black Slow

4-335
 4.Editing common data

Setting Case Plate Color Text Color Blink

Expression
General Do not set. Gray Black Not used

The change of the numeric input of XGT Panel according to change in the value of the device to
monitor is as follows:

Case Result
Device value to monitor = -200 A numeric value not entered

Device value to monitor = 199

Device value to monitor = 250

Device value to monitor = 1010

Notes

If the device value satisfies multiple case statements, it is displayed according to the setting
state of the first satisfied case statement. In the example above, if the device value to be
monitored is 250, all conditions of case 1 and case 2 are met, but it is expressed according to
the state set in case 1.

Set the text plate color, text color, and blink option in the setting.

Plate Color Set the text plate color of an image. For raster image, this option is
not supported.

Select raster image

4-336
 4.Editing common data

Select vector image

Text Color Set the color of the numeric values displayed on the number input.

Blink Set the speed at which the numerical value to be displayed on the
number input blinks on XGT Panel. (Not Use, Slow, Normal, Fast)

4-337
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of numeric input object.

- Use Input Script: Set whether to use a script in the numeric input.

- Input Script No.: Select the numeric input script.

- Use Display Script: Set whether to use a script in the numeric display.

- Display Script No.: Select the numeric display script.

- Script Name: The most recently selected script content is displayed.

4-338
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 Input script process

User input value

Input value <

maximum value
I t l

Run a script using the input value.

Inspect the script

result value and input
diti

Write the result value.

- Always treat a value a user entered as a decimal number and do not perform additional conversion.
- The maximum/minimum values vary depending on the size and shape of a device. Refer to Notes in
the basic items of word switch.
- If you run a script, continue to perform the next action even when an action fails.
- If the temporary variable ($ variable) has been changed at the time of failure when an action fails
during script running, perform the next step with the changed value.
- Inspect the script result value and the written input condition statement, and if the condition is not met,
an “Invalid at Input Case” message occurs and it is not entered.
- If communication fails at the time of writing the value after running the script normally, the “Can’t Write
Data” message occurs and it is not entered.

4-339
 4.Editing common data

 Output script process

Read the value from the device.

Run a script using the input value.

Chang the display type.

Display the result value.

- If a communication failure occurs when reading a value from a device in PLC, the next step is not
performed.
- If you run a script, continue to perform the next action even when an action fails.
- If the temporary variable ($ variable) has been changed at the time of failure when an action fails
during script running, perform the next step with the changed value.
- Inspect the display type, and if it is not in the BCD format, it is expressed as ~.
- If the final result value exceeds the numeric count you set, it is expressed as *.
- If communication fails at the time of writing the value after running the script normally, the “Can’t
Write Data” message occurs and it is not entered.

4-340
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of number input object.

- Security Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-enter
the password in order to use the object.

- Zero Fill: Inserts a “0” in front of the numeric when you select Align Right.

- Zero Display: Set whether to display "0”. If you do not set the corresponding option, an object
displays nothing when the device value is 0.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according to
an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value from
the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device address is
P110. The offset function operates differently depending on whether to set the read device. If the
read device is set, the offset is applied only to the write operation. Also, if the read device is not set,
both write and read devices are applied.

4-341
 4.Editing common data

<Read device set>

<Read device not set>

4-342
 4.Editing common data

- Offset Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard
button on the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the
device window, you can set the network when necessary.

- Read Device: Set if you separate and use a device when reading data. If you set the read device,
the setting of the offset device is applied only to the write device even if you specified the same
device as the reference device. If you specified a device different from the reference device, write a
onto the write device during input operation, and continue to read a value from the read device and
display it while you do not perform the input operation.

For example, if the device value is as shown below:

Item Device Address Device Value

Reference device D10 100

Read device D20 200

The result of writing the value of 500 in the numeric input is as follows:

Item PLC Actual Value XGT Panel Display Value

Read operation not D10 500 500

set
D20 200

Read operation set D10 500 200

D20 200

The device values in PLC are the same, but the values displayed on XGT Panel are different.

- Write Check Device: Set the device which identifies the returned device value. Set when the bit
device turns ON after entering a number.

- Write Device Off: Set if the read check device turns off when you cannot identify data.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-343
 4.Editing common data

• Keypad Settings: It is a keypad setting of the numeric input.

- Input Type: Set the movement method for using the automatic cursor.

<About cursor operation>

Input objects set to touch in the cursor method option can be grouped to enable continuous input. It
enables you to perform continuous inputs by group. If the interlock option is set for automatic
cursor use, the corresponding cursor is automatically skipped and moved to the next input order.

If you move the cursor with a special switch while entering a data value, the input is canceled and
returns to the state of the previously entered value. After that, it returns to the state of waiting for
object input of the previous or next order.

Focus Type The input cursor is applied only if you touch the numeric input. The
sequence of changing to input mode and output mode is as follows:

Output mode Input mode Input Output mode

Touc
h

If you set the input permit device, the input cursor moves only when the
corresponding device bit turns on.
Input Permit Bit Device ON

OFF OFF

4-344
 4.Editing common data

Input Permit If the cursor method is input permit device, set the bit input permit bit.
Device

Clear Type Set how to delete or retain the previous data value when changed to input
mode.
Continues to display the previously
Auto Clear OFF displayed value when becoming the input
state.
Set the value displayed in numeric input to 0
Auto Clear ON
when becoming the input state.

4-345
 4.Editing common data

- Keypad Settings: Set keypad window option for data input. If you do not use a keypad window, you
can set a key switch using a special switch object.

Keypad Type Set whether to use the keypad window.

Use Keypad set in Select whether to use the keypad set in the keypad window
Input Object setting. Enter the number of the keypad window or press
[Browse] to enter the location of the keypad window.

Use User Keypad Create a keypad window in a specified location. Set the X
Position and Y coordinates. If you do not specify a location, the
keypad window is displayed in the top left or top right.

- Use Auto Cursor: Set whether to use the auto cursor function. When a user presses [Enter] button
while entering data in the keypad window, the cursor moves to the next input area automatically.

720 720 720

0 290 290

0 0 5

☞
☞

Input Order Set the input order of the cursor. The cursor moves automatically
according to the input order.

Use Group Set if you want to specify two or more numeric inputs as a group, and
then enter them for the group with an automatic cursor.

- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device is in certain conditions (device ON or
OFF). The input cursor does not move, and moves to the next numeric input automatically.

4-346
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: Action condition setting of numeric input object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-347
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of numeric input object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-348
 4.Editing common data

Numeric Display
This section describes numeric display.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of numeric input object.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.
- Use Input Function: If you disable the corresponding option, it changes from numeric input to
numeric display. Object property setting is set automatically according to the type. For details, refer
to <4.3.4.1 Numeric display>.

- Size: It sets the data size (16 bit or 32 bit). If you change the existing data size, the input/display
conditions are changed to match the data size display type.
- Display Format: It sets a display format.
Numeric Format It sets a numeric format.
Format Example
Signed DEC -2184
Unsigned DEC 2184
Octal 4210
Hexadecimal 888

4-349
 4.Editing common data

Binary 10010001000
BCD 888
Real Number 2184.0

You can select the real number format only if the data is 32Bit.

Digits Set how many digits to display numerical values. You can specify
up to 64 digits. If the numeric count you set is smaller than the read
device and write device values, * is displayed in the object. If you
cannot display a device value in BCD format, it is displayed with ~.

No. of Decimal Digits Set how many digits to display part when you selected all numeric
types except for binary, octal and hexadecimal.
Const Enter the decimal count directly.

Device The decimal count changes dynamically

depending on a device value.

Format Set the format for both numeric and character display.
A user can specify a character format directly or select it from the
string table. You can enter characters directly, but numeric values
are displayed as *. The number of * is the number of numeric
values, and determined by the number of truncations.

Direct A user enters a character format directly.

From Text Select a character format from the string

Table table. In this case, you can change the
character format according to switch
language.

Example)

4-350
 4.Editing common data

If you set as above, the results displayed on XGT Panel differ

depending on the device.

• Device (if the value is 12345)

1 2 3 4 5 → 12cm 34mm

No. of Display: 5

Truncated Digits:

• Device (if the value is 12345678)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 → 45cm, 67mm

No. of Display 5

Truncated Digits:

4-351
 4.Editing common data

Although the number basically is truncated from the back of the

input device value, if the character format is set and the number of
device values is greater than the number of set numbers, the
number is truncated from the front of the input device value.

Notes

If you specified a character format in the string table, the

character format (bold, strikeout, etc.), color, and font of
[Text Table] are not applied. In this case, each property set
in [Character] tab is applied.

Truncated Digits Set the discard count of numeric values. They are discarded in the
order of most significant bits to least significant bits.

- Use Scaling: Set if a user scales and enters a random value in the set PLC device address. Actual
PLC and displayed value differ depending on data size and display format. If a value entered by a
user exceeds the maximum value, the device recognizes it as the maximum value. In addition, if
the input value is less than the minimum value, it is recognized as the minimum value to be entered
into the device.

Device Min. Dev. Set the scaling function, and then enter the minimum data value of
the PLC device you want to scale.
Device: You can set the minimum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the maximum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Device Max. Dev. Set the scaling function, and then enter the maximum data value of
the PLC device you want to scale.
Device: You can set the maximum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the maximum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Display Min Out Set the scaling function, and then enter the minimum data value
you want to display on the scale.
Device: You can set the minimum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the minimum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Display Max Out Set the scaling function, and then enter the maximum data value
you want to display on the scale.
Device: You can set the maximum value as a device address.
Constant: You can specify the maximum value as a constant
directly according to the data size and numeric format.

Use Round Off This option activates or deactivates rounding up to the scaled

4-352
 4.Editing common data

value.
Uncheck ‘Use Round Off’: Decimal points in calculation result are
always discarded.
Check ‘Use Round Off’: Decimal points in calculation result to be
rounded up.

Scaling example: set as below.

1) Scaling applied numeric output device: M0000

2) Device Maximum value: 100

3) Device Minimum value: 0

4) Display Maximum value: 1000

5) Display Minimum value: 0

6) Device Value (actual device value before scaling): 100

<Only Numeric Output scaling applied>

Notes

 The scalable PLC actual data value and the displayable data value differ respectively
depending on the data size and display type.
Maximum
Device size Device type Minimum value
value
16 bit upper type Signed DEC -128 127

4-353
 4.Editing common data

Unsigned DEC, binary,

0 255
octal, and hexadecimal
Signed DEC -128 127
16 bit lower type Unsigned DEC, binary,
0 255
octal, and hexadecimal
Signed DEC -32768 32767

16 bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535

BCD 0 9999

Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647

32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
BCD 0 99999999

 The following errors may occur when you enter a number.

Message Case Solution
Occurs when
Check the power state of
Can’t Write communication between
the connection cable or
Data XGT Panel series and
PLC, XGT Panel
PLC fails
Exceeded Occurs when you enter a
Enter a correct value by
The value that exceeds the
referring to the range of
Maximum size and type of the
available device values.
Value! device

 If the data size is changed, the previously written input cases and display cases are
deleted.
 If communication failure with PLC occurs during input or read operation, only the
background image of the object is displayed on XGT Panel series and numbers are not
displayed.
 To enter decimals, press ‘.’ on the keypad and then enter a number you want.

- Output Expression: Set the operation expression using the data device or fixed value added by the
user. Activated when the target device is set. The set formula is displayed in the formula preview.

4-354
 4.Editing common data

Calculation Order Enter the order displayed in the equation.

Operator Select the operator used in the expression. Supported

operators are:
+, -, /, *, ^, |, &, <<, >>

Device/Constant Set the data used for the device/fixed value operation
expression. Set device or fixed value according to data type.
Device: Can be set as device address.
Fixed value: You can directly designate a constant according to
the data size and number format.

Data Type Data type Select the data type used in the operation
expression.
Select from Fixed Value, Bit, Signed 16-bit, Unsigned 16-bit,
Signed 32-bit, Unsigned 32-bit, BCD 16-bit, BCD 32-bit, Real
32-bit.

Ignore Condition Set the conditions under which the output operation function
does not operate. When checking the ignore condition and
setting the bit address to be used as the condition, data
operation does not work when the bit address is On.

- Description: Enter a description of the object.

4-355
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of numeric display object.

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background and reverse image settings at the same time.

Main Color Set the main color.

Sub Color Set the sub color.

4-356
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of numeric display object.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Text Plate Color: Set the text plate color.

Disable text plate color. Enable text plate color (blue).

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

4-357
 4.Editing common data

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

4-358
 4.Editing common data

• Display Case: It is a display case of numeric display object.

- Display Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions. If a device value matches
multiple cases, it is displayed according to the first matched condition.

Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create a
(Insert)
case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to <4.2.1.3
Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(UP) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

<Display Case Example>

$V refers to the value of the device to monitor.

If the display case is $V > 0:

Setting Case Expression Plate Color Text Color Blink

Case 1 200 <= $V < 300 Blue Yellow Not used

Case 2 $V > 1000 Yellow Black Slow

General Do not set. Gray Black Not used

4-359
 4.Editing common data

The change of the numeric input of XGT Panel according to change in the value of the device to
monitor is as follows:

Case Result
Device value to monitor = -200 A numeric value not entered

Device value to monitor = 199

Device value to monitor = 250

Device value to monitor = 1010

Notes

If the device value satisfies multiple case statements, it is displayed according to the setting
state of the first satisfied case statement. In the example above, if the device value to be
monitored is 250, all conditions of case 1 and case 2 are met, but it is expressed according
to the state set in case 1.

Set the text plate color, text color, and blink option in the setting.

Plate Color Set the text plate color of an image. For raster image, this option is
not supported.

Select raster image

Select vector image

Text Color Set the color of the numeric values displayed on the number input.

Blink Set the speed at which the numerical value to be displayed on the
number input blinks on XGT Panel. (Not Use, Slow, Normal, Fast)

4-360
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of numeric display object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. Refer to the information on script modification.

4-361
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of numeric input object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

- Zero Fill: Inserts a “0” in front of the numeric when you select Align Right.

- Zero Display: Set whether to display "0”. If you do not set the corresponding option, an object
displays nothing when the device value is 0.

4-362
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of numeric input object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-363
 4.Editing common data

Text Input
Enter a text in a word device with ASCII code. This section describes text input.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of text input object.

- Use Input Function: If you disable the corresponding option, it changes from text input to text
display. The object property setting is changed according to the object type. For details, refer to
<4.3.4.4 Text display>.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Display Format: It sets a display format.

Num. of Byte Set the number of bytes of a text to display (2~64).

- Use Data Byte Swap: Set to change from input address to word unit.

- Cipher: Encrypts a user input value. An input value is displayed as “*”.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-364
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 Spaces are counted as the number of bytes in text input.

 A 16-bit word device is allocated to enter two characters.
 The starting address of the set reference device is the memory location where characters are
entered. The amount of texts you can enter is equal to the size of the memory location.
 When you enter texts, you can enter an odd number of texts, and the remaining area is filled with 0s.
For example, if you set the number of texts to 4 and enter only 3 characters, the remaining area in
the memory is filled with 0s.

4-365
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of character input object.

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background/image and color settings at the same time.

Main Color You can set the main color when selecting a vector image.

Sub Color You can set the sub color when selecting a vector image.

4-366
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of text input object.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Text Plate Color: Set the text plate color.

<Disable text plate color> <Use text plate color (Blue)>

- Multi-Language: Set the character type to display. You can display it in ASCII or multi-language.

4-367
 4.Editing common data

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

4-368
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of text input object.

- Security Level: Set the security level of an object. The higher the security level, the shorter the
authentication time when entering the password. If the authentication time expires, you shall re-
enter the password in order to use the object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

The offset function operates differently depending on whether the read device is set. If the read
device is set, the offset is applied only to the write operation. Also, if the read device is not set, both
write and read devices are applied.

<Read device set> <Read device not set>

4-369
 4.Editing common data

- Offset Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard
button on the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the
device window, you can set the network when necessary.

- Read Device: Set if you separate and use a device when reading data. If you set the read device,
the setting of the offset device is applied only to the write device even if you specified the same
device as the reference device. If you specified a device different from the reference device, write a
onto the write device during input operation, and continue to read a value from the read device and
display it while you do not perform the input operation.

For example, if the device value is as shown below:

Item Device Address Device Value

Reference device D10 0 (0x00)

Read device D20 CD (0x4443)

The result of writing the value of AB (0x4241) onto the text input is as follows:

Item PLC Actual Value XGT Panel Display Value

Read operation D10 AB(0x4241) AB(0x4241)
not set
D20 CD(0x4443)

Read operation D10 AB(0x4241) CD(0x4443)

set
D20 CD(0x4443)

The device values in PLC are the same, but the values displayed on XGT Panel are different.

- Write Check Device: Set the device which identifies the returned device value. Set when the bit
device turns on after entering a number.

- Write Device Off: Set if the read check device turns off when you cannot identify data.

- Use Operation Log: Leave the operation log of a device to be monitored.

4-370
 4.Editing common data

• Keypad Settings: It is a keypad setting of text input object.

- Input Type: Set the movement method for using the automatic cursor.

- Focus Type: Set the cursor movement method. If you select Touch, a user shall touch the input
area to move the cursor. The touch method process is as follows:
<About cursor operation>

Input objects set to touch in the cursor method option can be grouped to enable continuous input. It
enables you to perform continuous inputs by group. If the interlock option is set for automatic
cursor use, the corresponding cursor is automatically skipped and moved to the next input order.

If you move the cursor with a special switch while entering a data value, the input is canceled and
returns to the state of the previously entered value. After that, it returns to the state of waiting for
object input of the previous or next order.

Focus The input cursor is applied only if you touch the numeric input. The sequence of
Type changing to input mode and output mode is as follows:

Output Mode Touc Input Mode Input Output Mode

h

If you set the input permit device, the input cursor moves only when the
corresponding device bit turns on.

4-371
 4.Editing common data

Input Permit Bit Device ON

OFF OFF

Input If the cursor method is input permit device, set the bit input permit bit.
Permit
Device

Clear Set how to delete or retain the previous data value when changed to input mode.
Type  Auto Clear OFF: Continues to display the previous value when becoming the
input state.
 Auto Clear ON: Displays 0 in numeric input when becoming the input state.

- Keypad Settings: Set keypad window option for data input. If you do not use a keypad window,
you can set a key switch using a special switch object.

Keypad Type Set whether to use the keypad window.

Use Keypad set in Input Select whether to use the keypad set in the keypad window
Object setting. Enter the number of the keypad window or press
[Browse] to enter the location of the keypad window.

Use User Keypad Create a keypad window in a specified location. Set the X and Y
Position coordinates. If you do not specify a location, the keypad window
is displayed in the top left or top right.

- Use Auto Cursor: Set whether to use the auto cursor function. When a user presses [Enter] button
while entering data in the keypad window, the cursor moves to the next input area automatically.

720 720 720

0 290 290

0 0 5
☞
☞

Input Order Set the input order of the cursor. The cursor moves automatically
according to the input order.

Use Group Set if you want to specify two or more numeric inputs as a group, and
then enter them for the group with an automatic cursor.

- Use Interlock: Set to prevent input when the interlock device is in certain conditions (device ON or
OFF). The input cursor does not move, and moves to the next numeric input automatically.

4-372
 4.Editing common data

4-373
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of text input object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-374
 4.Editing common data

• Action Condition: Action condition setting of text input object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the action condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Operates when the device turns on.

Bit Off Operates when the device turns off.

Range Operates when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Operates when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-375
 4.Editing common data

Text Display
Regards the data stored in the word device as ASCII code value and displays the text table. As shown
in the figure below, you can display 4 texts using the M00 device of PLC as the reference device.

Data
l Text Display
Recovery device:

The read operation is performed in units of words, and the low byte of the target device is read first,
and the high byte is read later and the input text is read to be displayed in the display object.

If a 4-character ASCII value is displayed in the target device, the value is displayed in the 4-byte read
area from the target device address.

This section describes text display.

4-376
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is a basic setting of text display object.

- Use Input Function: If you check the corresponding option, it changes from text display to text
input. Object property is changed according to the object type. For details, refer to <4.3.4.3 Text
input>.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Display Format: It sets a display format.

Num. of Byte Set the number of bytes of texts to display (2 ~ 64).

- Use Data Byte Swap: Set to change from input address to word unit.

- Display Type: It sets a display type.

Device Value Displays the value from the device address specified in the basic
setting.
If you store a value in HW9, the corresponding value is displayed in
the text display.

4-377
 4.Editing common data

Current input Displays the value entered from the keypad on the text display. If you
value select the corresponding option, you cannot select device, display
format, and Use Data Byte Swap.

Current upper Displays the maximum value according to the data format of the
limit numeric input entering the current value in text display. If you select
the corresponding option, you cannot select device, display format,
and Use Data Byte Swap.
If the scaling function or input case is set in the numeric input entering
the current value, the maximum value of the intersection range of the
input range limited by the two functions is displayed.

Current lower Displays the minimum value according to the data format of the
limit numeric input entering the current value in text display. If you select
the corresponding option, you cannot select device, display format,
and Use Data Byte Swap.
The range of the maximum and minimum input values depends on
the size of the device and the shape of the object created by the pop-
up keypad. If an input case is set, the maximum and minimum values
depend on the range of the input case.
If the scaling function or input condition is set in the numeric input that
is entering the current value, the minimum value of the intersection
range of the input range limited by the two functions is displayed.

View bit device Displays the bit device address.

address If you select View bit device address, the address of the corresponding
device is displayed.

View word device If you select View word device address, the address of the
address corresponding device is displayed.

4-378
 4.Editing common data

In order to exclude internal devices when viewing the device address,

if you select “Exclude internal device when viewing device address” in
[Common] ▶ [Project Property] ▶ [Language], the internal device is
not displayed on the text display when selecting View bit device
address or View word device address.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

Notes

 Spaces are counted as the number of bytes in text input.

 A 16-bit word device is allocated to enter two characters.
 The starting address of the set reference device is the memory location where characters are
entered. The amount of texts you can enter is equal to the size of the memory location

4-379
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of text display object.

- Library: Select an image from the library.

- Open: Find an image in the computer. If you select an image in the computer, it is automatically
added to the image library.

- Transparent BG Image: If you click the checkbox, you can make the image background
transparent. You cannot use transparent background/image and color settings at the same time.

Main Color You can set the main color when selecting a vector image.

Sub Color You can set the sub color when selecting a vector image.

4-380
 4.Editing common data

• Text: It is a text setting of text display object.

- Font: Select a font in the drop-down list.

- Size: Set the text size in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the corresponding area.

- Color: Set a font color.

- Blink: Set a blink speed of an object.

Not Use An object does not blink.

Slow An object blinks every 3 seconds.

Normal An object blinks every 2 seconds.

Fast An object blinks every second.

- Width Ratio: Select the ratio in the drop-down list or enter a value directly in the input area to
increase or decrease the font. You can set the ratio between 1-600%.

- Multi-Language: Set the second language option. If you select a language other than English, you
cannot change the font. The fonts of other languages are displayed as set in the project property
setting.

- Text Plate Color: Set the text plate color.

- Space: Set a space in the object. If you select Left Alignment in Horizontal Alignment, you can set
the left space, and if you select Right Alignment, you can set the right space.

4-381
 4.Editing common data

- Font Style: Set the text type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can apply more than one option
at a time.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the horizontal alignment (Left, Center, Right).

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of text display object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-382
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of text display object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-383
 4.Editing common data

4.4.5 Window object

The window object calls a window screen depending on the device condition.

Bit window
Below is the description of the bit window object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of bit window object.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Window Screen No.: Set the window number to call or click [Browse] to select the location of the
window.

- Bit Condition: Set the bit condition for calling a window screen (On or Off).

- Window Type: Set the Window Type to call.

Popup A new window screen opens over the existing window screen.

Overlap The window screen is overlapped over the base screen to be

displayed, and the part where no figure or object is drawn on the
window screen is penetrated to be displayed on the base screen as it
is.

4-384
 4.Editing common data

- Placement: Set where a new window screen appears on the screen (top left, center, top right,
bottom right, bottom left). For example, if you select top left, a window screen is aligned to show up
in the top left of the object.

<Window screen>

<Example of “Top left” alignment>

A description of the alignment option is shown in the table below.

Type Description
Top left Aligns the top left corner of a part with the top left corner of a object.

Center Aligns a part to the center of a object.

Top right Aligns the top right corner of a part with the top right corner of a object.

Bottom right Aligns the bottom right corner of a part with the bottom right corner of a object.

Bottom left Aligns the bottom left corner of a part with the bottom left corner of a object.

Notes

• If a window area to be called is out of the top or left side of the base screen, you cannot express a
window in XGT Panel. In this case, the edit screen causes an error and cannot be downloaded. If a
window area to be called is out of the bottom or right side of the base screen, only the area that does
not get out of the base screen among the entire window area is displayed in XGT Panel.

4-385
 4.Editing common data

 There are two ways to close the bit window when the condition is met.
1. Invert the state of the reference device.
2. For a popup, press the Exit button of the currently displayed screen. The device state is
automatically inverted. If the window screens overlap with each other, the Exit button is not
displayed.
 The difference between the window alignment and part alignment is as follows:
Object types Alignment point
Window object The starting point of the edited window screen
The starting point at which a part is drawn on the edited sub
Part object
screen

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of bit window object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value

4-386
 4.Editing common data

from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

- Use Border: It sets the border color of a window object. If the border color is not set, the color set
in [TOOL] ▶ [Option] ▶ [Edit Option] ▶ [Shape/Object Basic Line Color] is displayed. This function
is independent of XGT Panel operation and only affects editing.

Example
No border color set Border color set
(Use basic color) (Use the color a user selected)

4-387
 4.Editing common data

Word Window
Below is the description of the word window.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of word window object.

- Device:

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or
click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the
keyboard button, you can set network as well if necessary.

Size Set a data size (16 bit or 32 bit).

Type Set a data type

(Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD)

- Window Type: Set the Window Type to call.

Popup A new window screen opens over the existing window screen.

Overlap The window screen is overlapped over the base screen to be

displayed, and the part where no figure or object is drawn on the
window screen is penetrated to be displayed on the base screen as it
is.

- Display Window: Set a method to view the window screen.

Indirect Call a window object depending on the device value.

Case Call a window screen if the condition is met.

4-388
 4.Editing common data

- Placement: Set where a new window screen appears on the screen (top left, center, top right,
bottom right, bottom left). For example, if you select top left, a window screen is aligned to show up
in the top left of the object.

<Window screen>

<Example of “Top left” alignment>

Display Description
Top left Aligns the top left corner of a part with the top left corner of a object.

Center Aligns a part to the center of a object.

Top right Aligns the top right corner of a part with the top right corner of a object.

Bottom right Aligns the bottom right corner of a part with the bottom right corner of a
object.

Bottom left Aligns the bottom left corner of a part with the bottom left corner of a object.

4-389
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 If the data size or type is changed, the input and display conditions are deleted.
 If you change the method to view the window screen indirectly, the input and display conditions are
deleted.
 If the input window screen area gets out of the border of the base screen, it is not downloaded
unless it is displayed in XGT Panel. If the window screen object area gets out of the bottom or right
side of the base screen, only the part, which is out of it, is displayed.

 The word window object is always displayed on top of the base screen and since there is no Exit
button, a user cannot close it at his or her will. A word window object is allocated in two or more
states. In addition, even if the current window screen is closed, you cannot determine how the state
of the reference device changes.
 The difference between the window alignment and part alignment is as follows:
Object types Alignment point
Window object The starting point of the edited window screen

Part object The starting point at which a part is drawn on the edited sub
screen

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-390
 4.Editing common data

• Case: It is a state setting of word window object.

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions.

(Insert) Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(UP) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

You can specify a window screen number which calls a pop-up or overlapping window if the case is
met. You can specify a window screen number directly or with Browse. If you click Browse, all the
created windows are displayed in the screen list as shown below figure. If you want to specify a
window screen number, select the window you want to display.

4-391
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of word window object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to<4.2
Scripts>.

4-392
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of word window object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

- Use Border: It sets the border color of a window object. If the border color is not set, the color set
in [TOOL] ▶ [Option] ▶ [Edit Option] ▶ [Shape/Object Basic Line Color] is displayed. This function
is independent of XGT Panel operation and only affects editing.

4-393
 4.Editing common data

4.4.6 Animation Object

An animation object displays a moving image (GIFs) according to a condition.

• Animation: It is an animation setting.

- Loop: Set whether to repeat the animation. If you set the corresponding option, you cannot use
start/end and pause/resume devices.

- Start/End: Set a bit device for animation operation.

- Pause/Restart: Set a device to pause or operate animation again.

- Library: Select an animation from user and system graphic libraries.

- Open: Select a GIF file in the computer.

- Speed: Set the animation speed.

Slow 400ms

Normal 250ms

Fast 100ms

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-394
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 Depending on the motion speed or image size of an animation object, it may give overload to XGT
Panel or reduce the performance.
 The original moving gif image registered as animation cannot exceed 256 pixels horizontally and
vertically, and the number of frames cannot exceed 32. Check the above restrictions when
registering to the library or checking data errors.
 If it is not connected to PLC when you set the start/end, pause/resume in an animation object,
display the image in the stopped state.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5.Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.

4-395
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of animation object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-396
 4.Editing common data

4.4.7 Graph Object

Use a graph object to represent various device values. You can use eight graphs: bar, pie, meter,
closed curve, trend, logging trend, logging scatter, and realtime scatter.
Notes

 If the graph object is not connected to the PLC device, only the background and scale of the graph
are displayed.
※ For details, refer to <Appendix 5. Rules for displaying objects before communication
connection>.

Bar graph
Below is the description of the bar graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of bar graph object.

4-397
 4.Editing common data

- Target device: Set the option for the target device.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area
or click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set
through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary

Size Set the device data size (16-bit or 32-bit). If you change the data
size of the existing object, the conditional state is deleted.

Type Set the data type of the device (signed DEC, unsigned DEC,
BCD). If you change the data type of the existing object, the
conditional state is deleted.

- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the upper/lower limit values of the data to display. The upper/lower
limit values shall be set within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise, the minimum value
or maximum value supported by the device is displayed.

Device Set the specified device value to the upper/lower limit values.

Constant Set the constant, which a user specified, as upper/lower limit values.

4-398
 4.Editing common data

Notes

Refer to the table below for the upper/lower limit values of the constant according to
the device size.
Device Size Device Type Lower Upper
16bit Signed DEC -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647
32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
32 bit BCD 0 99999999

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-399
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of bar graph.

Set when the number of channel is 1:

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the bar graph background image.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Direction: Set the direction to fill the bar graph (top > bottom, bottom > top, left > right, right > left).

- No. of Channels: Set the number of channels to display in the bar graph.

- Channel: Select the channel whose pattern you set. If the channel is one, you can set only
channel 0.

- Pattern: Set the pattern of the graph fill area.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the pattern.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the pattern.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

4-400
 4.Editing common data

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

Plate color

Fill color

- Scale: Set the option for the scale.

Point Set the point of the scale.

Interval Set an interval between the scales of the graph (from 0 to 0).

Location Set a scale location.

Placement Set the position alignment of a graduated ruler.

Color Set a scale color.

Set when the number of channel is 2 or more:

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the bar graph background image.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

4-401
 4.Editing common data

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Direction: Set the direction to fill the bar graph (top > bottom, bottom > top, left > right, right > left).

- No. of Channels: Set the number of channels to display in the bar graph.

- Channel: Select a channel number with which you set the fill color.

- Fill Color: Select a fill color of the selected channel.

- Use display value: Displays the ratio of the value of each channel to the values of all channels in
percentage.

Font Size Set the size of the displayed font.

Text Color Set the color of the displayed font.

Text Plate Color Set the plate color of the displayed font.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

Plate color

Fill color

- Scale: Set the option for the scale.

Point Set the point of the scale.

Interval Set an interval between the scales of the graph (from 0 to 0).

Location Set a scale location.

Alignment Set the position alignment of a graduated ruler.

Color Set a scale color.

• Case: It is a case setting of bar graph object.

4-402
 4.Editing common data

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions.

(Insert) Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(UP) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

When creating a range condition, you can set the fill type of the graph.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

4-403
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of bar graph object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to<4.2
Scripts>.

4-404
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of bar graph object. The detailed tab is displayed only when the number
of channels is 1.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. Displays the value of the device, which has been offset by the value read
from the offset device on the graph. For example, if the target device is P101 and the offset device
is HW0, and if the value of HW0 is 10, the value of P110 is displayed on the graph.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-405
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of bar graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-406
 4.Editing common data

Pie graph
Below is the description of the pie graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of the pie graph.

- Target device: Set the option for the target device.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area
or click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set
through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary

Size Set the device data size (16-bit or 32-bit). If you change the data
size of the existing object, the conditional state is deleted.

Type Set the data type of the device (signed DEC, unsigned DEC,
BCD). If you change the data type of the existing object, the
conditional state is deleted.

4-407
 4.Editing common data

- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the max./min. values of the data to display. The max./min. values
shall be set within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise, the minimum value or
maximum value supported by the device is displayed.

Device Set the specified device value to the maximum and minimum
values.

Constant Set the constant, which a user specified, as maximum and

minimum values.

Notes

• Refer to the table below for the upper/lower limit values of the constant according to
the device size.
Device Size Device Type Lower Upper
16bit Signed DEC -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed DEC - 2147483647
2147483648
32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
32 bit BCD 0 99999999
• If there are 2 or more channels, the device of each channel is set as a continuous
device based on the device, which has been inputted.
- Example) input device: HW00000, if the size is 16bit, the second channel device is
set to HW00001.

- Example) input device: HW00000, if the size is 32bit, the second channel device is
set to HW00002.

• If there are 2 or more channels, only positive numbers greater than 0 for the device
input value can be entered.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-408
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of pie graph.

Set when the number of channel is 1:

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- No. of Channels: Enter the number of items to output in the pie graph.

- Select fill-type channel: Set the pattern of the graph fill area.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the pattern.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the pattern.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to use the graph background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of values.

- Shape and Direction: Set shape and direction options of the graph.

Shape Set a pie graph shape. (circle, top semicircle, bottom semicircle, left
semicircle, right semicircle, top sector, bottom sector, left sector, right

4-409
 4.Editing common data

sector, 3/4 sector)

Direction Set a pie graph fill direction (clockwise, counterclockwise).

Start Position Set the starting point when using the circle shape. If the direction is
clockwise, the starting point is as follows:

Top Bottom Left Right

- Scale: Set the option for the scale.

Point Set the point of the scale.

Color Set a scale color.

Set when there are 2 or more channels:

- Select fill-type channel: Enter the channel number for which you want to set the fill color, or
select a channel number from the drop-down list.

- Use display value: Displays the ratio of the value of each channel to the values of all channels in
percentage.

4-410
 4.Editing common data

Font Size Set the size of the displayed font.

Text Color Set the color of the displayed font.

Text Plate Color Set the plate color of the displayed font.

- Fill Color: Set the fill color of the pie part of each channel.

4-411
 4.Editing common data

• Case: It is a case setting of pie graph object.

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions. You can set when the number of
channel is 1.

(Insert) Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(Up) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

When creating a range condition, you can set the fill type of the graph.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

4-412
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of pie graph object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to<4.2
Scripts>.

4-413
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of pie graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-414
 4.Editing common data

Meter Graph
Below is the description of the meter graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of meter graph object.

- Target Device: Set the option for the target device.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or
click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set through the
keyboard button, you can set network as well if necessary

Size Set the device data size (16-bit or 32-bit). If you change the data size
of the existing object, the conditional state is deleted.

Type Set the data type of the device (signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD). If
you change the data type of the existing object, the conditional state
is deleted.

4-415
 4.Editing common data

- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the max./min. values of the data to display. The max./min. values
shall be set within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise, the minimum value or
maximum value supported by the device is displayed.

Device Set the specified device value to the maximum and minimum values.

Constant Set the constant, which a user specified, as maximum and minimum
values.

Notes

• Refer to the table below for the upper/lower limit values of the constant according to
the device size.
Device Size Device Type Lower Upper
16bit Signed DEC -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647
32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
32 bit BCD 0 99999999

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-416
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of meter graph object.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of values.

Needle Color Set the color of a needle.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to use the graph background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- Shape and Direction: Set shape and direction options of the graph.

Shape Set the shape of a pie graph.

Direction Set the direction of a pie graph.

Start Position Set the starting point when using the circle shape.
When the direction is clockwise, the starting point is as follows:

4-417
 4.Editing common data

Top Bottom Left Right

- Scale: Set the option for the scale.

Num. of Major Set the number of major.

Num. of Minor Set the number of minor between majors..

Color of Major Set the color of major.

Color of Minor Set the color of minor.

4-418
 4.Editing common data

• Case: It is a case setting of meter graph object.

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions.

(Insert) Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(Up) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

When creating a range condition, you can set the needle color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

4-419
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of meter graph object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to<4.2

Scripts>.

4-420
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of meter graph object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-421
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of meter graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-422
 4.Editing common data

Closed Curve Graph

Below is the description of the closed curve graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of closed curve graph object.

- Target Device: Set the option for the target device.

Device You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area
or click the keyboard button on the right to set it. If you set
through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary

Size Set the device data size (16-bit or 32-bit). If you change the data
size of the existing object, the conditional state is deleted.

Type Set the data type of the device (signed DEC, unsigned DEC,
BCD). If you change the data type of the existing object, the
conditional state is deleted.

4-423
 4.Editing common data

- Upper/Lower Limit Value: Set the max./min. values of the data to display. The max./min. values
shall be set within the range supported by the device type. Otherwise, the minimum value or
maximum value supported by the device is displayed.

Device Set the specified device value to the maximum and minimum values.

Constant Set the constant, which a user specified, as maximum and minimum
values.

Notes

• Refer to the table below for the upper/lower limit values of the constant according to the
device size.
Device Size Device Type Lower Upper
16bit Signed DEC -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned DEC 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed DEC -2147483648 2147483647
32 bit Unsigned DEC 0 4294967295
32 bit BCD 0 99999999

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-424
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of closed curve graph object.

Set when the number of channel is 1:

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the bar graph background image.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Direction: Set the direction to fill the bar graph (top > bottom, bottom > top, left > right, right > left).

- Hatch: Set the graph area pattern.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

- Fill Type: Set the pattern of the graph fill area.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the pattern.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the pattern.

- Scale: Set the option for the scale.

4-425
 4.Editing common data

Point Set the point of the scale. You can set the scale point from 0 to
255. Each scale is expressed as a longer scale every 5 scales,
and the scale size is also displayed differently depending on the
size of the graph. If the scale point is 0, you cannot perform other
setting of scale.

Interval Set an interval between the scales of the graph (from 0 to 10).

Location Set a scale location.

Alignment Set the position alignment of a graduated ruler. If the location of

the scale is left and right, you can set alignment only to the left
and right. If the location of the scale is top and bottom, you can
set alignment only to the top and bottom.

Color Set a scale color.

Set when there are 2 or more channels:

- Select fill-type channel: Enter the channel number for which you want to set the fill color, or
select a channel number from the drop-down list.

- Use display value: Displays the ratio of the value of each channel to the values of all channels in
percentage.

Font Size Set the size of the displayed font.

4-426
 4.Editing common data

Text Color Set the color of the displayed font.

Text Plate Color Set the plate color of the displayed font.

4-427
 4.Editing common data

• Case: It is a case setting of closed curve graph.

- Case List: Create, delete, and rearrange case expressions.

(Insert) Create a new area case. You can set up to 8 cases. You can create
a case statement through Edit Area window. For details, refer to
<4.2.1.3 Constant and data type>.

(Delete) Deletes a case statement.

(Up) Raise up the priority of the case statement which you are editing.

(Down) Raise down the priority of the case statement which you are
editing.

When creating a range condition, you can set the fill type of the graph.

Pattern FG Set the foreground color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

Pattern BG Set the background color of the graph to display if the condition is
met.

4-428
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of closed curve graph.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer to<4.2
Scripts>.

4-429
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of closed curve graph. Detailed setting is displayed when there is only
one channel.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-430
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of closed curve graph.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-431
 4.Editing common data

Trend Graph
Below is the description of the trend graph.

Notes

• Only the number of X-axis (time axis), which have been collected most recently based on the
current time, is displayed on the screen. That is, it is expressed only by the previous value
(acquisition cycle * X-axis digits) based on the current time point.

• Communication is disconnected and resumed when changing screens, and if a delay occurs
when resuming communication, the graph may be disconnected for a second to be
displayed. Or, the graph may be disconnected temporarily to be displayed even if
communication fails in a moment due to other external environmental factors such as noise.

4-432
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is a basic setting of trend graph object.

- Target Device: Set the option for the target device.

Size Set the size of the device value (16 bit, 32 bit).

Type Set the type of the device value (Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD,
real number).

Notes

• Data size, data type, warning upper limit, warning lower limit, data maximum value,
data minimum value are equally applied to all devices.

- Alarm Value: Set whether to use an alarm trigger when the data value is out of the upper limit or
lower limit.

Device Set a device value specified as alarm limit.

Constant Set a fixed value specified as alarm limit.

As shown below, the warning upper limit and the warning lower limit value are displayed as straight
line in the example of a graph, which compares the target amount and production amount.

4-433
 4.Editing common data

Maximum
1500
data
al e Maximum
Alarm Value

Minimum
Alarm Value

Amount Created (M1 Device Value)

Target Amount (M0 Device Value)

- Device: Select a device to be referenced by the object or enter a device address. If you specify a
device, up to 8 new device input columns are automatically created so that you can specify a
device to be referenced.

If you want to delete a device, select a column number and press Delete key on the keyboard.

- Line Color: Set the color of the graph.

- Line Type: Set the type of the line (solid or dotted line).

- Line Width: Set the width of the line.

Solid You can set from 1 to 10.

Dotted Line You can set only 1.

4-434
 4.Editing common data

• Max./Min.: It is a max./min. value setting of trend graph object.

- Max./Min. Setting: It sets the max./min. value of the data to display. The max./min. value can be
set by device selection or a constant can be entered. Set the minimum value to 0 and the
maximum value to 150 in range of 0-150 in the graph below. If the device to be monitored has a
value outside the maximum and minimum values, it is as the maximum value or minimum value in
the graph.

Not displayed
100%

50%

0%

4-435
 4.Editing common data

Individual For [Individual] for max./min. values, the max./min. values are applied
according to each device address set in [Basic].
As shown in the example below, if you register three target devices P0000,
P0001, and P0002 in [Basic], you can specify the max./min. as follows:

[Basic Setting]

[Max/Min. Setting]
If each is individually specified as above, the max./min. values of device 1,
P0000 are set in the graph from 0 to 150.
The max./min. values of device 2, P0001 is set from 100 to 200, and those
of device 3, P0002 is set from 50 to 250 in the graph.
(3) (2) (1)
250 200 150

50 0 0

Block If you set the max./min. values to [Block], the same value is applied to all
indices set in [Basic]. Therefore, for the example above, index 1, 2, and 3
will all have the same max./min. values, respectively. You can enter only
one max./min. values. You can set the reference line if you specify the
max./min. values.

4-436
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of trend graph object.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- No. of Display in X axis: Set the number of data to be displayed on the graph (3 or more).

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

- Sampling Timex100ms: Set the data collection cycle in 100ms unit (1 to 6,000).

4-437
 4.Editing common data

Constant Set to a value between 1 and 6000.

Device Set a cycle from the device value. If the value of the device is 0, the
period is forced to be 100ms.

- Starting point: Set the scale starting point position (bottom left or bottom right).

Graphic Graphic

Left Right
- The Scroll Points: Set the scroll points to draw the next data value after all data values are
displayed on the graph. A new data value is displayed in the moving direction after the previous
data value is deleted by the set movement unit.

- Scale: Set the option of scale.

No. of Horizontal Set the number of X-axis scales.

No. of Vertical Set the number of Y-axis scales.

X-axis Height Set the height of X-axis scales.

Y-axis Weight Set the height of Y-axis scales.

Scale Color Set the color of scale.

4-438
 4.Editing common data

• Operation: It is an operation setting of trend graph object.

- Use Script: Click to use a script on the object.

- Select Script: Select a script from the drop-down list.

- Script: If you select Script, it is displayed here. For information on script modification, refer
to<4.2 Scripts>.

4-439
 4.Editing common data

• Detail: It is a detailed setting of trend graph object.

- Offset: Click the checkbox to use the offset function. You can offset the device address according
to an offset device value. For example, if the start address is P100, LXP-Designer reads the value
from the offset device and offsets the address by the value. If the offset value is 10, the device
address is P110.

- Device: Enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or press the keyboard button on
the right to specify the device or tag address. If you click the keyboard button to open the device
window, you can set the network when necessary.

4-440
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Display trigger setting of trend graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-441
 4.Editing common data

• Use Reference: Set whether to use reference line. The reference line is a line on which a user marks
the location of a specific value other than the max./min. in the trend graph.

Notes

If the max./min. values setting method is [Individual] in the max./min. values setting window,
the reference line option menu is not displayed.

- Use Reference: The setting for using the reference line of the graph. The reference line is a line
that marks the location of a specific value set by a user other than the max./min. values.

You can set the reference line to fixed value or device value.
Num of Reference Set the number of reference lines to display. If a user enters the

4-442
 4.Editing common data

number of reference lines and moves to each reference line

property setting window, a column is created so that the number
of reference lines can be set as many as the set number. The
number of reference lines can be from 1 to 8.

Set reference line You can edit only when Enable is set for whether to use the
properties reference line. Set each property of the reference line. If you set it
to [Constant] in [Value Format] item of the reference line, you
cannot enter a device. On the other hand, if you set [Value
Format] to Device, you cannot enter [Constant]. The number
column refers to the number of reference line, and you cannot
edit each number column and cannot change the position of each
column. If the line shape of the reference line is dotted line, the
thickness can only be 1.

Display Value When you display a reference line, display a reference line value
as a text.
The text color is the same color as the reference color, and the
size is automatically calculated according to the trend graph size.

4-443
 4.Editing common data

Logging Trend Graph

Below is the description of the logging trend graph.

Notes

• Only the number of X-axis (time axis), which have been collected most recently based
on the current time, is displayed on the screen.

• Communication may be disconnected momentarily due to other external environmental

factors such as noise during logging. In this case, logging fails. Since the data at this
time is not normal data, the data at this time is not displayed in the logging trend graph.
Therefore, the trend line looks broken.

4-444
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is a basic setting of logging trend graph object.

- Logging Display Format: Set the following option for logging device.

Size Set the size of the device value (16 bit, 32 bit).

Type Set the type of the device value (Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD,
real number)

- Alarm Value: Set whether to use an alarm trigger when the data value is out of the upper limit or
lower limit.

Device Set a device value specified as alarm limit.

Constant Set a fixed value specified as alarm limit.

As shown below, the warning upper limit and the warning lower limit value are displayed as straight
line in the example of a graph, which compares the target amount and production amount.

4-445
 4.Editing common data

1500
Maximum
data value
Maximum
Alarm Value

Minimum
Alarm Value

Amount Created (M1 Device Value)

Target Amount (M0 Device Value)

- Logging Number: Set the logging number set in Create a logging of common data.

- Display Case: Set the display case of the graph.

Always Display Set to Always Display.

Display by Condition Set to display only a specific index depending on a device value.
For example, if you set the condition device to P0100 and 4
indexes as shown in the screenshot below,

it is displayed as in the graph below according to 4 consecutive

bit device states starting with P0100.

4-446
 4.Editing common data

- Display First: Set a sorting method (oldest, newest).

- Consecutive Addition: Enter the start index and end index to add consecutively.

- Delete All: Delete all input data.

- Index: Index number of a device. As the device address increases, the logging device index
increases from 1 by 1.

For example, if you edit to log 32 devices from P100 as shown below, the 4 index numbers of P0001,
P0005, P0010, and P0018 among 32 consecutive devices are as follows.

Device address Logging index

P0001 (logging device) 1

P0002 2

… …

P0005 5

… …

P0010 10

… …

P0018 18

Enter an index number in Index window to add a new item. If a new item is added, a blank index
window is created in the next column, so that you can add the next item. You can add up to 20 items.

To delete an item, click the column number you want to delete and press [Delete] key.

4-447
 4.Editing common data

- Device Address: It is a device address.

- Line Color: Set the line color of the graph.

- Line Type: Set a line type (solid or dotted line).

- Line Width: Set the width of the line.

Solid You can set from 1 to 10.

Dotted Line You can set only 1.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-448
 4.Editing common data

• Max./Min.: It is a max./min. value setting of logging trend graph object.

- Max./Min. Setting: It sets the max./min. value of the data to display. The max./min. value can be
set by device selection or a constant can be entered. Set the minimum value to 0 and the
maximum value to 150 in range of 0-150 in the graph below. If the device to be monitored has a
value outside the maximum and minimum values, it is as the maximum value or minimum value in
the graph.

100% Not displayed

50%

0%

4-449
 4.Editing common data

Individual For [Individual] for max./min. values, the max./min. values are applied according
to each device address set in [Basic].
As shown in the example below, if you register three target devices P0000,
P0001, and P0002 in [Basic], you can specify the max./min. values as follows:

[Basic Setting]

[Max/Min. Setting]
If each is individually specified as above, the max./min. values of device 1,
P0000 are set in the graph from 0 to 150. The max./min. values of device 2,
P0001 is set from 100 to 200, and those of device 3, P0002 is set from 50 to 250
in the graph.
(3) (2) (1)
250 200 150

50 0 0

Notes

If Max/Min setting method is [Individual], the Reference Line menu option is

not displayed.

Block If you set the max./min. values to [Block], the same value is applied to all indices
set in [Basic]. Therefore, for the example above, index 1, 2, and 3 will all have
the same max./min. values, respectively. You can enter only one max./min.
values. You can set the reference line if you specify the max./min. values.

4-450
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of logging trend graph object.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- No. of Display in X axis: Set the number of data to be displayed on the graph (3~120).

Device Set the device value to be specified as an X-axis point.

Constant Set the fixed value to be specified as an X-axis point.

4-451
 4.Editing common data

- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

- No.of Samples to Scroll: A user can inquire the data at a desired location using the View
previous data/next data special switch. However, in the following two cases (the most recent data
tracking mode/oldest data tracking mode), the screen is automatically updated to show data at the
time since present time. The screen movement unit is to set how many data units to move the
screen at this time.

Oldest -> Latest
If a user sets the View First mode to the latest data when
editing the logging trend graph and downloads it, the logging
trend is set to the latest data tracking mode to update the
screen whenever new logging is made, and tract and display
the most recent logging data.

Latest -> Oldest
If the logging setting connected to the logging trend graph is set
to the circulation buffer method, the data, which is currently
being displayed, on the screen is deleted at some point as
logging continues. The device refreshes the screen with the old
data automatically.

- Starting point: Set the scale origin position (bottom left or bottom right, top left, - top right).

- Data Order: Set data order options. For example,

Time Data
8: 10 10

8: 20 20

8: 30 30

8: 40 40

8: 50 50

4-452
 4.Editing common data

Latest -> Oldest Displays data in order from newest to oldest. If the starting
point is left:

If the starting point position is right:

Oldest -> Latest Displays data in order from oldest to most recent.
If the starting point position is left:

If the starting point position is right:

- Scale: Set the option of scale.

No. of Horizontal Set the number of X-axis scales.

No. of Vertical Set the number of Y-axis scales.

X-axis Height Set the height of X-axis scales.

Y-axis Weight Set the height of Y-axis scales.

Scale Color Set the color of scale.

4-453
 4.Editing common data

• Cursor: It is a cursor setting of logging trend graph object.

- Cursor: Set the option of cursor.

Use Cursor Set whether to display the cursor on XGT Panel screen as shown below.

Storage Set whether to store cursor information. (This refers to the time at which
Cursor the data at the point, at which current cursor is located was logged and its
Information values.) The cursor information is saved in a device, and the size of the
device is always 32-bit. Cursor information is saved as follows based on
the specified device.

< Logging device size: 16 bit >

4-454
 4.Editing common data

Year
Day Month Save each 16-
Minute bit as
Hour
unsigned
Second
16-bit data index 1

16-bit data index 2

The maximum
number of
logging groups
which you can

16-bit data index n

Save in lower 16-bit.

< Logging device size: 32-Bit >

Year
Day Month
Minute Hour
Second
Data index 1
Data index 2
The
maximum
number of
logging
Data index n

Save in 32-bit

If you set Storage Cursor Information, record the cursor information in the
specified device whenever the data at the point, at which current cursor is
located, changes or the cursor moves.

Line Color Set the color of cursor.

Line Set a cursor type (solid or dotted line).

4-455
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 If you want to show or hide the cursor, click the logging trend graph area.
 The cursor position is always displayed in the center of the currently displayed data.

<Displayed data: 3> <Displayed data: 8>

 If the data to be displayed on the graph is deleted due to the area deletion action in the
cursor display mode, the cursor disappears and is displayed when logging is restarted.
 The cursor position does not move. If you use [View data before logging trend] or [View
data after logging trend] of the special switch, it has the same effect as moving the cursor.
• If there is no data which occurred before or after the data on the current graph, th
e cursor moves to the previous or next data.

4-456
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of logging trend graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

4-457
 4.Editing common data

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-458
 4.Editing common data

• Reference line: It is a reference line setting of logging trend graph object.

Notes

If the max./min. values setting method is [Individual] in the max./min. values setting window, the
reference line option menu is not displayed.

- Use Reference: The setting for using the reference line of the graph. The reference line is a line
that marks the location of a specific value set by a user other than the max./min. values.

4-459
 4.Editing common data

You can set the reference line to fixed value or device value.

Num of Reference
Set the number of reference lines to display. If a user enters
the number of reference lines and moves to each reference
line property setting window, a column is created so that the
number of reference lines can be set as many as the set
number. The number of reference lines can be from 1 to 8.

Set reference line You can edit only when Enable is set for whether to use the
properties reference line. Set each property of the reference line. If you
set it to [Constant] in [Value Format] item of the reference line,
you cannot enter a device. On the other hand, if you set
[Value Format] to Device, you cannot enter [Constant]. The
number column refers to the number of reference line, and
you cannot edit each number column and cannot change the
position of each column. If the line shape of the reference line
is dotted line, the thickness can only be 1.

Display Value When you display a reference line, display a reference line
value as a text.
The text color is the same color as the reference color, and
the size is automatically calculated according to the logging
trend graph size.

4-460
 4.Editing common data

Logging Scatter Chart Graph

Below is the description of the logging scatter chart graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of logging scatter chart graph object.

- Type of Scatter: Set a type of scatter.

Y Scatter Displays device addresses sequentially on X-axis from logging start

device. Since the data display repeats itself, you do not have to specify
a minimum or maximum value.

4-461
 4.Editing common data

X-Y Scatter For two consecutive device addresses from the logging device, display
the previous device value on X-axis and the next device value on Y-
axis to display a dot or value at the point where two coordinates meet
each other. You shall specify minimum and maximum values for the
axis.

- Scatter Basic Setting: Set the following option for the scatter.
Group number You can set the logging group number to display from 1 to 32.
You can set it among the logging group numbers set in [Project]-
[Logging]. To add a new item in the logging scatter chart, enter
the logging group number in the logging group window and then
press [Enter]. If a new item is added, a logging group number
window is created in the next column, and you can add the
following items. You can add up to 20 items. To delete an entered
item, click the column number you want to delete and press
[Delete] key.

4-462
 4.Editing common data

Start device Displays the start device, which corresponds to the entered
logging group number. Register the start device in [Project]-
[Logging]. Each control device data value is initialized to 0 again
after each operation is completed.

Size Set the size of a device to log. The size of a device to log shows
up as the value set in the logging of common data, a user cannot
set it.

Type Set the data type of a device.

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-463
 4.Editing common data

• Max./Min.: It is a max./min. value setting of logging scatter chart graph object.

- Max./Min. Setting: Set the max./min. value option.

Y Axis. Type/X You can set the max./min. values as many as the items of the
Axis. Type logging scatter chart added in [Basic]. That is, you cannot add or
delete items for max./min. values. You can set the format of the
max./min. values as [Constant] or [Device].

Y Axis. Max/Y Set Y Axis. Max/Y Axis. Min values of the data you want to display.
Axis. Min You can set the max./min. values by selecting a device or using a
constant value. If the device exceeds the maximum and minimum
values, they are displayed as the maximum and minimum values
on the graph.

4-464
 4.Editing common data

X Axis. Max/X Set X Axis. Max/X Axis. Min values of the data you want to display.
Axis. Min You can set the max./min. values by selecting a device or using a
constant value. If the device exceeds the maximum and minimum
values, they are displayed as the maximum and minimum values
on the graph.

4-465
 4.Editing common data

• Line and Dot: It is a line and dot setting of logging distribution chart graph object.

- Line and Dot Setting: Set the following option for line.

Use Line Set whether to use a line to display data.

Line Color Set a line color.

Line Shape Set a line shape (solid or dotted line).

Line Type Set a line type.

Block Line: Collect the data set of HW0, HW1, HW2, HW3 to
connect the (HW0, HW1) coordinate and (HW2, HW3)
coordinate. That is, make 2 continuous device coordinates to
connect each coordinate.
Connect in Time Order: Instead of connecting continuous device
coordinates, connect the changed coordinates whenever the
same coordinate is changed. For example, connect and display
the coordinate which changes whenever the value of (HW0,
HW1) changes.

Use Dot Set whether to use a dot to display data.

4-466
 4.Editing common data

Dot Color Set a dot color.

Dot Type Set a dot type.

• Alarm Value: It is an alarm setting of logging scatter chart graph object.

- Alarm Setting(Only Y Scatter Graph): Set the options below for the warning value.

Use Alarm Value Set whether to use an alarm value. You can set only for Y scatter
chart.

Max/Min Value Set the alarm upper/lower limit value of the logging scatter chart
graph. If the device value is higher than the alarm upper limit, it is
not set to the set line color or dot color, and it is displayed as
upper limit line color or dot color. In addition, if the device value is
less than the lower limit value, it is displayed as the set lower limit
value line color or dot color.

Max/Min Line Set a line color to express when the alarm upper limit value of the
logging scatter chart graph is exceeded/insufficient. If the device
value exceeds the alarm upper limit value, it is expressed in the

4-467
 4.Editing common data

upper limit value line color, whereas if it is insufficient, it is

expressed in the lower limit line color.

Max./Min. Dot Set a dot color to express when the alarm upper limit value of the
logging scatter chart graph is exceeded/insufficient. If the device
value exceeds the alarm upper limit value, it is expressed in the
upper limit value dot color, whereas if it is insufficient, it is
expressed in the lower limit dot color.

4-468
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting for logging scatter chart graph.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- No. of Display Data: Specify the number of dots to display on the screen.
The X-Y scatter chart plots two device values as a single dot.
The Y scatter chart plots each value of device as a single dot.
- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of
values.

- Starting point: Set the scale origin position (bottom left or bottom right).

- Scale: Set the option of scale.

No. of Horizontal Set the number of X-axis scales.

4-469
 4.Editing common data

No. of Vertical Set the number of Y-axis scales.

X-axis Height Set the height of X-axis scales.

Y-axis Weight Set the height of Y-axis scales.

Scale Color Set the color of scale.

Notes

 Since the main purpose of the logging scatter chart is to show the scatter trend of
data, do not erase the data displayed once on the screen. If the logging setting
connected to the logging scatter chart is set to the circulation buffer method, the
data displayed on the screen is deleted sometime as logging proceeds. In this
case, the dots and lines, which correspond to deleted data, are not deleted.
 The dots and lines scattered over the screen are initialized if the logging area is
deleted. That is, if you want to initialize the scatter chart screen, use the logging
area deletion device.
 If you connect and use multiple logging groups, short time difference may occur in
displaying the data of each group. Each logging group operates individually with
separate execution condition and monitoring target device and area. Therefore,
even if the execution conditions of multiple logging groups are met at the same
time, a time order takes place when data is collected during execution. As a result,
even when data is displayed on the data scatter chart by each group, a short time
order takes place.
 Logging function prioritizes communication with a device connected to an existing
object when acquiring data. Therefore, the more logging groups you set, and the
shorter the value acquisition period of each logging group, the greater the influence
on the overall communication speed. You need to make an adjustment when
editing so that you can do logging only when necessary accordingly.

4-470
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of logging scatter chart graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

4-471
 4.Editing common data

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-472
 4.Editing common data

• Reference Line: It is a reference line setting of logging trend graph object.

Notes

If the max./min. values setting method is [Individual] in the max./min. values setting window, the
reference line option menu is not displayed.

- Use Reference: The setting for using the reference line of the graph. The reference line is a line
that marks the location of a specific value set by a user other than the max./min. values.

4-473

You can set the reference line to fixed value or device value.
Num of Reference
Set reference line
properties
4.Editing common data
Set the number of reference lines to display. If a user enters
the number of reference lines and moves to each reference
line property setting window, a column is created so that the
number of reference lines can be set as many as the set
number. The number of reference lines can be from 1 to 8.
You can edit only when Enable is set for whether to use the
reference line. Set each property of the reference line. If you
set it to [Constant] in [Value Format] item of the reference line,
you cannot enter a device. On the other hand, if you set
[Value Format] to Device, you cannot enter [Constant]. The
number column refers to the number of reference line, and
you cannot edit each number column and cannot change the
position of each column. If the line shape of the reference line
is dotted line, the thickness can only be 1.
4-474
 4.Editing common data

Realtime Scatter Graph

Below is the description of the realtime scatter graph.

• Basic: It is a basic setting of real time scatter chart graph object.

- Type of Scatter: Set a type of scatter.

Y Scatter Display device addresses sequentially on X-axis from the start device.
Since the data display repeats itself, you do not have to specify a
minimum or maximum value.

4-475
 4.Editing common data

X-Y Scatter For two consecutive device addresses from the start device, display the
previous device value on X-axis and the next device value on Y-axis to
display a dot or value at the point where two coordinates meet each
other. You shall specify minimum and maximum values for the axis.

- Scatter Basic Setting: Set the following option for the scatter.
Device Num. Set the number of devices to monitor. A user can set (1 to 1000) directly
or use the control device address as the number of devices.

If a user does not set the number of devices, use the control device + 1
device address value as the number of devices.

Control device If the first bit of word control device turns on, it is displayed on the graph
as many as the number of consecutive devices from the start device. If
the second bit turns on, clear the current graph area. Each control device
data value is initialized to 0 again after each operation is completed. If a

4-476
 4.Editing common data

new item is added, a blank control device window is created in the next
column, and you can add the following items up to 8.

Size Set an object data size.

Type Set an object data type.

Device Num. Set the number of devices.

Offset Set whether to use the offset function.

- If an offset is not used

When the offset function is not used

Address Description Display
Control device
HW00000 -
(C)
HW00001 Reserved -

HW00002 Start device Displayed

- …(10) Displayed
As many as the
HW00011 number of start Displayed
devices

- If you use an offset

If you use an offset, use the device (HW0002) as an offset device as

shown below. If the value of HW00002 is 5, display 10 consecutively
from HW00007 which is 5 words away from HW00002.
When the offset function is used
Address Description Display

HW00000 Control device (C)

HW00001 Reserved

4-477
 4.Editing common data

Used as an offset value Not

HW00002
(if the value is 5) displayed

…(Start from a location

away by offset.)

HW00007 Start device Displayed

- Notes
For 32-bit, it counts as many as DWORDs.

When the offset function is not used

Address Description Display

HW00000 Control device (C)

HW00001 ~
Reserved
HW00002

HW00003 Start device Displayed

…(10) Displayed
As many as the number
HW00022 Displayed
of start devices

Description Enter the description for an object.

4-478
 4.Editing common data

• Max./Min.: It is a max./min. value setting of realtime scatter chart graph object.

- Max./Min. Setting: Set the max./min. value option.

Y Axis. Type/X You can set the max./min. values as many as the items of the logging
Axis. Type scatter chart added in [Basic]. That is, you cannot add or delete items
for max./min. values. You can set the format of the max./min. values as
[Constant] or [Device].

Y Axis. Max/Y Set Y Axis. Max/Y Axis. Min values of the data you want to display. You
Axis. Min can set the max./min. values by selecting a device or using a constant
value. If the device exceeds the maximum and minimum values, they
are displayed as the maximum and minimum values on the graph.

4-479
 4.Editing common data

X Axis. Max/X Set X Axis. Max/X Axis. Min values of the data you want to display. You
Axis. Min can set the max./min. values by selecting a device or using a constant
value. If the device exceeds the maximum and minimum values, they
are displayed as the maximum and minimum values on the graph.

Notes

If Max/Min setting method is [Individual], the Reference Line menu option is not displayed.

4-480
 4.Editing common data

• Line and Dot: It is a line and dot setting of real time scatter chart graph object.

- Line and Dot Setting: Set the following option for line.

Use Line Set whether to use a line to display data.

Line Color Set a line color.

Line Shape Set a line shape (solid or dotted line).

Line Type Set a line type.

Block Line: Collect the data set of HW0, HW1, HW2, HW3 to
connect the (HW0, HW1) coordinate and (HW2, HW3)
coordinate. That is, make 2 continuous device coordinates to
connect each coordinate.
Connect in Time Order: Instead of connecting continuous device
coordinates, connect the changed coordinates whenever the
same coordinate is changed. For example, connect and display
the coordinate which changes whenever the value of (HW0,
HW1) changes.

Use Dot Set whether to use a dot to display data.

4-481
 4.Editing common data

Dot Color Set a dot color.

Dot Type Set a dot type.

4-482
 4.Editing common data

• Alarm Value: It is an alarm setting of realtime scatter chart graph object.

- Alarm Setting(Only Y Scatter Graph): Set the options below for the warning value.

Use Alarm Value Set whether to use an alarm value. You can set only for Y scatter
chart.

Max/Min Value Set the alarm upper/lower limit value of the logging scatter chart
graph. If the device value is higher than the alarm upper limit, it is not
set to the set line color or dot color, and it is displayed as upper limit
line color or dot color. In addition, if the device value is less than the
lower limit value, it is displayed as the set lower limit value line color
or dot color.

Max/Min Line Set a line color to express when the alarm upper limit value of the
logging scatter chart graph is exceeded/insufficient. If the device
value exceeds the alarm upper limit value, it is expressed in the upper
limit value line color, whereas if it is insufficient, it is expressed in the
lower limit line color.

Max./Min. Dot Set a dot color to express when the alarm upper limit value of the
logging scatter chart graph is exceeded/insufficient. If the device
value exceeds the alarm upper limit value, it is expressed in the upper

4-483
 4.Editing common data

limit value dot color, whereas if it is insufficient, it is expressed in the

lower limit dot color.

4-484
 4.Editing common data

• Display: It is a display setting of real time scatter chart graph object.

- Library: Select the background image from the library.

- Open: Select a background image to be displayed in the graph in the computer.

- Transparent BG Image: Set whether to display the background image.

- Transparent Border: Set whether to use the border of the graph.

- No. of Display Data: Specify the number of dots to display on the screen. If the scatter chart type is
X-Y in the basic setting, you cannot set the number of data displays, and you can display up to 500.

 The X-Y scatter chart plots two device values as a single dot.
 The Y scatter chart plots each value of device as a single dot.
- Frame Display: Set the frame option.

Border Color Set the border color.

Plate Color Set the plate color, which is an area not filled by a range of values.

- Starting point: Set the scale origin position (bottom left or bottom right).

- Scale: Set the option of scale.

4-485
 4.Editing common data

No. of Horizontal Set the number of X-axis scales.

No. of Vertical Set the number of Y-axis scales.

X-axis Height Set the height of X-axis scales.

Y-axis Weight Set the height of Y-axis scales.

Scale Color Set the color of scale.

• Display Trigger: It is a display trigger setting of real time scatter chart graph object.

- Use Condition: Set whether to use the display condition.

- Type: Select the type of a condition to set.

Bit On Displayed when the device turns on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device turns off.

Range Displayed when the device range condition is met.

Multi Bit Displayed when the logical operation results of multiple devices are
satisfied.

4-486
 4.Editing common data

- Device: You can enter the device or tag address directly in the input area or click the keyboard
button on the right to set it. If you set through the keyboard button, you can set network as well if
necessary.

- Range: Set when selecting a range condition.

Size 16-bit or 32-bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number

Expression Set a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: If you select the multi bit condition, set the number of bit, and set the bit condition in
[Setting].

4-487
 4.Editing common data

4.4.8 View history alarm object

Below is the description of how to set View history alarm object.

Notes

 The history alarm data is always collected and saved by XGT Panel.
Even if View history alarm object is a screen that has not been edited, the history
alarm data is always collected and updated.
 You can delete history alarm data using a special switch.
However, you cannot delete non-restored data.
 If the created history alarm data is more than the number of object columns in View
history alarm, use [One page down] button of the special switch to go to the next page,
which is displayed currently. Or, use [One page up] of the special switch to move to the
previous page.
 If you want to print the history alarm data displayed on the current screen, use [Print
history alarm data] of the special switch.

4-488
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is a description related to the basic setting of View history alarm object.

- Alarm Form: Set an alarm form.

No.of Row Displays the number of set rows.

Sort Set the order of data to be displayed. (order of most recent or oldest).

- Use Detailed Window Position: Set the detailed view of alarm content.

Axis [Detailed Window] is displayed at the fixed axis (X, Y).

Device [Detailed Window] is displayed at X and Y coordinates respectively,

depending on a device value.

- Show detailed window upon double-click: Do not display [Detailed Window] through a special
switch but display [Detailed Window] if you double-click the history alarm that occurred in View history
alarm object.

- Frame Display: Set the shape of a frame.

Frame Color Set the frame color of View history alarm.

Plate Color Set the plate color of View history alarm.

- Line: Set the width and color of a line.

Line Color Set the color of a frame line.

4-489
 4.Editing common data

Line Width Set the width of a frame line.

- Description: Enter a description in the corresponding object.

4-490
 4.Editing common data

• State: It is a state setting of View history alarm object

- Initial Restore/Check Filter: Set the filter displayed in View history alarm list.

Restore Filter - Display All Shows all restored/non-restored history alarm data.

Restore Filter – Display Shows restored history data.

ony restored

Restore Filter – Display When you display the history alarm screen initially in XGT
only unrestored Panel, filter and display only non-restoration history alarm
data.

Check Filter – Display All Shows all checked/non-checked history alarm data.

Check Filter – Display only When you display the history alarm screen initially in XGT
checked Panel, filter and display only checked history alarm data.

4-491
 4.Editing common data

Check Filter – Display only When you display the history alarm screen initially in XGT
unchecked Panel, filter and display only non-checked history alarm data.

Initial group number For View history alarm object registered in XGT Panel,
display the history alarm that occurred in all groups initially. If
you set [Specify initialization alarm group], you can display
only history alarms that occurred in a specific group initially.

- Property change according to alarm status: Change the color of the alarm column according to
the alarm states.

Change Property of Set whether to change the background color/text color for the
Occurrence State alarm in occurred state among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel.
Plate Color For the [Occurred] list among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel, specify the background color to indicate
that the corresponding column has occurred.

4-492
 4.Editing common data

If a user does not specify the background color of [Created data],

display the background color with [Basic]-[Frame background
color].
Text Color For the [Occurred] list among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel, specify the text color to indicate that the
corresponding column has occurred.
If a user does not specify the text color of [Checked data],
display the text color with [Text]-[Text color].
Blink Occurred history alarm data blinks.
Not Use: Does not blink.
Slow: Blinks once every 3 seconds.
Normal: Blinks once every 2 seconds.
Fast: Blinks once every second.
Change Property of Set whether to change the background color/text color for the
Check State alarm in checked state among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel.
Plate Color For the [Occurred] list among the history alarms that have
checked in XGT Panel, specify the background color to indicate
that the corresponding column has been checked.
If a user does not specify the background color of [Checked
data], display the background color with [Basic]-[Frame
background color].
Text Color For the [Checked] list among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel, specify the text color to indicate that the
corresponding column has been checked.
If a user does not specify the text color of [Checked data],
display the text color with [Text]-[Text color].

Blink Checked history alarm data blinks.

Not Use: Does not blink.
Slow: Blinks once every 3 seconds.
Normal: Blinks once every 2 seconds.
Fast: Blinks once every second.

Change Property of Set whether to change the background color/text color for the
Restoration State alarm in recovered state among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel.

Plate Color For the [Restored] list among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel, specify the background color to indicate
that the corresponding column has been checked.

4-493
 4.Editing common data

If a user does not specify the background color of [Recovered

data], display the text color with [Basic]-[Frame background
color].

Text Color For the [Restored] list among the history alarms that have
occurred in XGT Panel, specify the text color to indicate that the
corresponding column has been checked.
If a user does not specify the text color of [Recovered data],
display the text color with [Text]-[Text color].

Blink Restored history alarm data blinks.

Not Use: Does not blink.
Slow: Blinks once every 3 seconds.
Normal: Blinks once every 2 seconds.
Fast: Blinks once every second.

4-494
 4.Editing common data

• Header: It is the header setting for View history alarm. :

- Use Header: Set whether to use header. .

Plate Color If you uncheck [Background Color], the background color area of the
header is displayed transparently.

Text Color Set the text color of the header of View history alarm.

- Header Edit: It is a function to edit header.

From Text If you select [From Text Table in Header Edit], you shall select the header of all
Table in columns (occurrence, message, group, etc.) from the text, and direct input is not
Header Edit possible.
If you select [From Text Table in Header Edit], and then double-click the
corresponding column, a dialog box with which you can select a text table shows
up.

No. of fixed Set the number of rows to be displayed in XGT Panel at a time. To check

4-495
 4.Editing common data

ref. additional rows, use the history alarm column scroll function provided by the
special switch.
For example, if you set as shown below

You can check two reference columns at once on XGT Panel display.

Notes

You can use the special switch to check the next row. Create a special switch
in Edit window and click [View history alarm horizontal list].
When you click ▶ [Next column], the horizontal list moves to the next
column as shown below.

If the columns to be referenced have different sizes, some columns are

deleted as shown below.

Please use the special switch again to check the entire data of the column.
Create a special switch and click [View history alarm horizontal list] ▶ [Next
column].

Fit to the max Adjust the size of each cell. Adjust the size of the reference cell by text number,
header length and you can adjust the sizes of other cells in unit of pixel. If you do not select this

4-496
 4.Editing common data

option, you can only adjust the lengths of messages and group cell. It may be
different depending on the header type and font. If you change the size of View
history alarm object, it changes according to the set sizes of the message and
group cell. You can set the sizes of message and group cell as shown in the
picture below.

Let's take the 343 item displayed under the history alarm header as an example.

If you set language to Korean, it is displayed as ‘날짜 및 시간’, and if set to

English, it is displayed as ‘Date and Time’. If you set other language with a
different character string, the object size is changed to fit that string.

If you set Fit header to max length, the width of the column is determined as the
longest header (‘Date & Time’) to be displayed regardless of the editing language.

Setting of For the size of the history alarm object, the object size is fixed depending on the
Cell Size font and font size. However, in order for a user to manually adjust the size of each
cell of the history alarm, select the item, select [Setting of Cell Size] and specify a
cell size directly. If you set the message and group column as below:

The cell size in Message and Group column is changed to 5 and 3 respectively.

4-497
 4.Editing common data

Notes

You can change the order of the headers such as Occurrence, Message, Group,
Restoration, and Recognition.
• You only have to drag and drop the headers in the order you want.

 You cannot reduce the width of the header to less than the length of the
text.
 You cannot reduce the size until the data or headers in the selected column
cannot be expressed. That is, the size at which the data and headers of all
selected columns can be expressed is the minimum size.

 In View address column, the device name set in [Common Data]-[History

Alarm]-[History Alarm List View] is displayed as shown below.

Fixed column You can set the fixed column reference value created from the history alarm in the
reference path below. [History Alarm]-[Alarm Group]-[Alarm List]
value

4-498
 4.Editing common data

• Text: The text setting of History Alarm Viewer is as follows:

- Font: Select a font.

- Size: Select the size of text.

- Color: Set the color of text.

- Font style: Set the style of text. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can select 2 or more.

- Horizontal Alignment: Align left, center and right.

4-499
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: The display trigger setting of History Alarm Viewer is as follows:

- Use Condition: Select whether to use a display trigger.

- Type: Set a type of the condition.

Bit On Displayed when the device is turned on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device is turned off.

Range Displayed when a value is included in the set area.

Multi Bit Operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies the logical
command.

- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input part or use the keypad button. You can
set network when you press the keypad button to open the device window.

- Range: Set a range condition.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number.
expression Click to enter a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: When setting multi bit, enter a bit number and press [Set] button to set the bit condition.

4-500
 4.Editing common data

4.4.9 Logging Viewer object

The following are items you can set in Logging Viewer object.

• Basic: It is a basic setting items in Logging Viewer object.

- Const: Set a logging number to monitor. The logging number is a number set in creating logging of
common data.

- Description: Enter the description for Logging Viewer object.

4-501
 4.Editing common data

• Display: Set a display for Logging Viewer object.

- Table Type: It is a table type setting item.

No.of Row Set the number of rows.

No.of Col Set the number of columns. .

Space Set X-axis and Y-axis spaces where data of Logging Viewer is
expressed. You can set space from 0 to 32.

Format Set a data format.

Items Description
Date/Time Day/time
Date Day
Time Time

Date Set a date type.

Items Description
YYYY/MM/DD Yy/mm/dd (4-digit year)
YY/MM/DD Yy/mm/dd (2-digit year)

4-502
 4.Editing common data

MM/DD/YYYY Mm/dd/yy (4-digit year)

MM/DD Mm/dd
MM/DD/YY Mm/dd/yy (2-digit year)
DD/MM/YYYY Dd/mm/yy (4-digit year)
DD/MM/YY Dd/mm/yy (2-digit year)

Time Set a time type.

Items Description
HH:MM:SS Hour:minute:second
HH:MM Hour:minute

Sort Set one sorting method for the data you want to display between
oldest data or latest data.

- Frame Display: Set whether to use a frame.

Frame Color Set the frame color.

Plate color Set the plate color.

Line Color Set a line color.

Line Width Set a line width.

Notes

 You can set only one Logging Viewer object in one screen.
 If # or * is displayed in Logging Viewer object, refer to [Common] ▶ [Logging Setting] in
Toolbar.

4-503
 4.Editing common data

• Header: Set a header for Logging Viewer object.

- Use Header: Set whether to use a header in Logging Viewer. If you did not Use Header, you
cannot a header title, and the header is not displayed in XGT Panel.

Plate Color Set the plate color of the header in Logging Viewer.

Text Color Set the text color of the header in Logging Viewer.
(☞ Please refer to Use the background color of the header type.)
(In the example above, the text color is white.)

Bold Displays the header content thick.

Italic Italicizes and displays the header content.

Strikeout Displays a strikeout in the header content.

Underline Displays an underline in the header content.

Common Display Format: The content set in [Common Display Format] is applied to all index
columns in common.
Numeric Format Select a display type.

4-504
 4.Editing common data

Digits Set how many digits to display numerical values.

You can specify up to 64 digits.
If the digits you set is smaller than the read device and write
device values, * is displayed in the object.
If you cannot display a device value in BCD format, it is
displayed with ~.

Zero Fill Select when you display 0 in front of a numeric.

No. of Decimal Digits Set how many digits to display decimal point when you selected
all numeric types except for binary, octal and hexadecimal.

Example 1)
If you set logging data type to integer (16bit), display format to
unsigned DEC, number of displays to 5, and decimal point
length to 2
- Logging data value: 12345
- Value displayed in View logging: 123.45
If the logging data value is an integer, put a decimal point in the
place, which corresponds to the decimal point length set in
input data.

Example 2)
If you set logging data type to real number (32bit), display
format to real number, number of displays to 5, and decimal
point length to 2
- Logging data value: 123
- Value displayed in View logging: 123.00
If the logging data value is an integer value, which is less than
the number of displays, put a decimal point in the place which
corresponds to the decimal point length.

Example 3)
If you set logging data type to real number (32bit), display
format to real number, number of displays to 5, and decimal
point length to 2
- Logging data value: 123.4
- Value displayed in View logging: 123.4
If the logging data value is a real value which is less than the
displayed count, it is displayed the same as the entered logging

4-505
 4.Editing common data

data value.

- Header Edit: Select the Header column in Header Text table.

From Get a header label from Text table. Click Header column to select a text from Text table.
Text
Table in
Header
Edit

Multi- If the display type is text, display the corresponding text in multi-language.
Languag
e

Setting of You can specify logging values with different column width by each column.
Cell Size
& Setting
Device
Size per
Col.

For example, if using different device sizes (16-bit, 32-bit, consecutive text table) for each
logging column as shown below.
Inlet
Ballast equipped Ballast ejected Ship name
pressure
Number Date and time (Address: M0, (Address: M2, (Address: M5
(Address:
M1) M3) ~ M15)
M4)
1 2017/5/18 20:10 0x31438891 0x13567701 0x1356 BALASHIP10

4-506
 4.Editing common data

In View logging list object, set as follows:

Fit to the If you set the header to be used in the text table, display the header according to the
max length of the longest text in the text table.
header Example) If you select the text as shown below and specify the header of View logging
length to [3], it is displayed as the length of the ballast equipped if the editing language is
[Korean] in existing case and it is displayed as Ballast in case of [English]. Also, the
object size has been changed due to the length of that text.

[In the example below, if there is no Fit to the max header length, the object size is
changed according to the change of the editing language.]

Width: 240

Convert to Korean
(change size)

4-507
 4.Editing common data

Width: 332

[In the example below, if there is Fit to the max header length, the object size is not
changed according to the change of the editing language.]

Convert to Korean
switch

4-508
 4.Editing common data

Width: 332

- Logging Index: The index number means that the logging target device starts with 1, and as the
address increases in the target device, the logging index increases by 1.

For example, if you edit to log 32 devices from P001 as shown below, the 4 index numbers of P0001,
P0005, P0010, and P0018 among 32 consecutive devices are as follows.

Device Address Logging Index

P0001 (logging device) 1

P0002 2

… …

P0005 5

… …

P0010 10

… …

P0018 18

4-509
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• If the target device of the logging group is not in 32-bit format, and if the display format is
set to real number format in the logging view object, an error occurs in [Data check].
• If the target device of the logging group is not in 32-bit format, and if the display format is
set to real number format in the logging view object, an error occurs in [Data check].
• When set to text, the display count refers to the number of bytes.
• [Use Byte Swap] swaps the corresponding byte only for a text.

• Text: Set a text for Logging Viewer object.

- Font: Select a font.

- Size: Select the size of text.

- Color: Set the color of text.

- Font Style: Set the style of text. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can select 2 or more.

- Horizontal Alignment: Align left, center and right.

4-510
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Set a display trigger for the object in the logging view.

- Use Condition: Select whether to use a display trigger.

- Type: Set the type of a condition.

Bit On Displayed when the device is turned on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device is turned off.
Range Displayed when a value is included in the set area.
Multi Bit Operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies the logical
command.

- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input part or use the keypad button. You can
set network when you press the keypad button to open the device window.

- Range: Set a range condition.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number.
expression Click to enter a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: When setting multi bit, enter a bit number and press [Set] button to set the bit condition.

4-511
 4.Editing common data

4.4.10 Clock object

Displays the latest time, oldest time, and cursor position/time of the logging trend that occurred in
XGT Panel date/time or logging trend.

• Basic: It is a basic setting for clock object.

- Type: Set a format to display the clock.

Items Description
Date/time Date/time

Date Date

Time Time

- Date: Set a date display format.

4-512
 4.Editing common data

Items Description
YYYY/MM/DD Yy/mm/dd (4-digit year)

YY/MM/DD Yy/mm/dd (2-digit year)

MM/DD/YYYY Mm/dd/yy (4-digit year)

MM/DD Mm/dd

MM/DD/YY Mm/dd/yy (2-digit year)

DD/MM/YYYY Dd/mm/yy (4-digit year)

DD/MM/YY Dd/mm/yy (2-digit year)

DD/MMM/YYYY Dd/mm/yy (4-digit year)

DD/MMM/YY Dd/mm/yy (2-digit year)

- Time: Set time display format.

Items Description
HH:MM:SS Hour:minute:second

HH:MM Hour:minute

- Display Day: Set whether to display the day of the week.

- Zero Fill: If the date or time has 1 digit, fill it with 0s and display it.

23/3/2010 15:15:3 ▶ 23/03/2010 15:15:03

- Preview: Each item set above is displayed in the Preview.

- Clock Type: Set a clock type.

System Clock Indicates the hardware system time in XGT Panel.

Logging Trend Shows the most recent time, cursor position time, and oldest time of
Clock the displayed data in the logging trend object, which exists on the
current screen of XGT Panel.
If there is no logging trend object in the screen, the time cannot be
displayed, so it is displayed as ‘-’ according to a specified format.

- Description: Enter the description for the corresponding object.

4-513
 4.Editing common data

• Display: Set the display format for the clock object.

- Library: Select a shape from the library to display the clock.

- Open: Enter the shape to display the clock directly via the image file.

- Transparent BG Image: Select when you do not display the background image.

- Main Color: Set the main color. (You can set a main color only when the image to be displayed is
a vector. )

- Sub Color: Set a sub color from the image.

4-514
 4.Editing common data

• Text: Set a text for the clock object.

- Font: Set the type of font in which the clock is to be displayed.

- Size: Set the size of the text on which the clock is to be displayed.

- Width Ratio: Enter a ratio in the drop-down list to widen or shorten the spacing between texts
(range: 1-600%).

- Color: Determine a character color.

- Font Style: Set a font style. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can select multiple types at the
same time.

4-515
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Set a display trigger for data list object.

- Use Condition: Select whether to use a display trigger.

- Type: Set a case format.

Bit On Displayed when the device is turned on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device is turned off.

Range Displayed when a value is included in the set area.

Multi Bit Operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies the logical
command.

- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input part or use the keypad button. You
can set network when you press the keypad button to open the device window.

- Range: When setting a range condition, consider the device size for setting.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit.

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number.

Expression Click to enter a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: When setting multi bit, enter a bit number and press [Set] button to set the bit condition.

4-516
 4.Editing common data

4.4.11 Insert screen object

Insert screen refers to inserting other entire base screen into the current base screen. You can insert
and use all the contents you edited in 1 Base Screen into 2 Base Screen, and after inserting, you can
add a new figure and object to 2 Base Screen for editing as well.
This has the advantage of being able to edit frequently used screen only once and call them from
other screen.

Drag and drop a window (base screen, window screen) from the project window to the edit window to
insert a screen as a base screen.

The corresponding window is inserted as shown below.

4-517
 4.Editing common data

• Basic: It is a basic setting for screen insertion. If you select a base screen or a window screen to be
inserted, drag and drop it on the target screen and double-click it, the following window is created.

- Screen Type: Set the type of a screen you want to insert.

- Go to Screen: Set whether to call the current screen.

- Screen: Set the number of a screen you want to insert.

To use the insert screen object as the background of other screen, do the followings.
For example, to insert the “B2” screen into the “B1” screen as a background, open the B1 screen,
select the screen (B2) you want to insert, and right-click to select the ‘Set as background at all Base
Screen’ menu. As a result, the screen of B2 is created in the form of insert object at the front of the
screen of B1 to be inserted. At this time, the screen insertion object becomes the state where the
selected lock is applied, and it cannot be selected. To unselect, press the ‘Unlock Selection Lock’ menu.

To use the insert screen object as background for all other base screens, do the followings. For
example, to insert the “B2” screen into all base screens as a background, select the screen (B2) you
want to insert, and then right-click to select the ‘Set as background at all Base Screen’ menu. As a
result, the screen of B2 is created and inserted at the front of the screen in the form of an insert object
in all base screens except for B2. At this time, the screen insertion object becomes the state where
the selected lock is applied, and it cannot be selected. To unselect, press the ‘Unlock Selection Lock’
menu.

4-518
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 The insert screen has the following restrictions when it is inserted into other screen.
- Even if you set the background in the insert screen, the background does not show up.
- The script set in the insert screen does not operate.
- You cannot add another insert screen inside the insert screen. If you add it, the screen
malfunctions in the device.
- You cannot insert an insert screen with the same number in the base screen.
 You can insert a base screen into another screen with drag.
 When you insert a base screen, which has already been inserted into other base screen, the already
inserted screen is not inserted. Only the corresponding base screen is inserted.
 If you click Move insert screen icon in the Data Element Window, you can move to the
corresponding insert screen without unlocking.

4-519
 4.Editing common data

4.4.12 Multimedia object

Below is the description of multimedia object. You can play a video file or use a camera using a
multimedia object. For details, refer to <4.3.2.4 Special switch>.

• Multimedia: It is a basic setting of multimedia object.

4-520
 4.Editing common data

- Display Video File: The video setting is enabled when you select a video file.

- Display Video Input: The camera setting is enabled when you select the camera.

- Repeat: Set whether to play a video file repeatedly.

- \USB Storage\: Enter the folder path where the video files are located.

- Camera Type: Select one type among built-in camera, USB camera, or IP camera.

Items Description
Built-in Camera Shows the camera image of the display unit.

USB Camera Shows the video from a USB camera connected to the device.

IP Camera Shows the IP camera video of the RTSP path.

- USB Index: Enabled when you select the camera type as USB camera, and the USB index is
specified.

4-521
 4.Editing common data

Notes

 The USB camera number refers to the location of the USB port, and you shall connect the
USB camera to the camera number location you set.
 The port on the display unit side is USB 1 and the rest is USB 2 among the 2 USB ports of
the main unit.

- IP Camera Setting: Enabled when you select the camera type as IP camera, and you shall add
RTSP setting value.

- RTSP IP: Enter the IP address of RTSP.

- RTSP Port: Enter the port number of RTSP.

- ID: If RTSP camera authentication is required, set the ID to authenticate.

- Password: If RTSP camera authentication is required, set the password to authenticate.

- Camera Path: Enter an additional address required to access RTSP camera.

Notes

 If IP camera is required to be authenticated, you shall enter it as an address value, which

includes ID and password in an address in the RTSP format.
Example) For IP camera connected to rtsp://admin:1234@192.168.1.51:554/StdCh1, enter
the following:
RTSP IP: 192.168.1.51
RSTP port: 554
ID: admin
Password: 1234
Camera Path: StdCh1

- Use Flip: Set whether to invert the camera image to left and right.

- Status device: Enter a device value from which you read the current status value of the
multimedia object.

Status device value Description

0 Stop status/Ready status (camera)

1 Play status/Live View (camera)

2 Error status

3 Preparing for play (camera)

- Description: Enter the description for an object.

4-522
 4.Editing common data

The multimedia object has the following restrictions.

Items Description
Video play file Supports mp4, avi, wmv files.

HDMI extended screen The video playback function is not supported on the HDMI extended
screen.

Playback speed High-definition, high-capacity videos may take a long time in loading or
may cause interruption during playback. 1024 x 768 resolution is
recommended.

Number of multimedia You can create only one multimedia object in each screen and Windows
objects window.

Concurrent play You can play a video in only one place.

If you play a video from the multimedia object in the pop-up window while
a video plays on the base screen, the existing video stops.

Video/Audio specifications that support Parser/Demuxer

Demuxe ASF AVI MP4 OGG FLV MPG2 MKV RMVB
r feature

Video H264 - Y Y - Y Y Y -

MPEG2 - Y - - - Y Y -

MPEG4 Y Y Y - - - Y -

H263 - Y Y - Y - Y -

MJPEG - Y Y - - - Y -

VC1 Y Y - - - - Y -

DivX Y Y Y - - - Y -

Xvid - Y - - - - Y -

VP8 - - - - - - Y -

VP6 - - - - Y - Y -

Theora - - - Y - - - -

RV - - - - - - Y Y

Audio AAC - Y Y - Y Y Y Y

MP3 Y Y Y - Y Y Y -

WMA Y Y - - - - Y -

4-523
 4.Editing common data

Demuxe ASF AVI MP4 OGG FLV MPG2 MKV RMVB

r feature

AC3 - Y Y - - Y Y -

PCM/AD Y Y Y - Y Y Y -
PCM

AMR - - Y - - - Y -

Vorbis - Y Y Y - - Y -

SPEEX - - - Y Y - Y -

DTS - - - - - Y Y -

FLAC - - - Y - - Y -

DD+ Y - Y - - Y Y -

RA - - - - - - - Y

Video Codec Supported

Type Profile Minimum Maximum Frame rate Bit rate
resolution resolution
Video HEVC main/main 144x144 1920x1080 60 fps 100 Mbps
Decoder 10

H.264 HP/MP/BP 48x48 1920x1080 60 fps 60 Mbps

VP9 profile 0, 2 72x72 1920x1080 60 fps 100 Mbps

VP8 - 48x48 1920x1080 60 fps 60 Mbps

Video H.264 HP/MP/BP 132x96 1920x1080 60 fps 40 Mbps

Encoder
H.265 main/main 64x64 1920x1080 60 fps -
10

4-524
 4.Editing common data

Supportable Audio Codec

Function/profi Function/profi Channel Sample rate Bit rate
le le
Audio MP3 MPEG-1 stereo/momo <=48 8-448
Decoder (Layer-1/
Layer-2/
Layer-3)

MPEG-2
(Layer-1/
Layer-2/
Layer-3)

MPEG-2.5
(Layer-3)

AACLC MPEG-2 <=5.1 8-96 8-368

AACLC

MPEG-4
AACLC

HE-AAC HEAAC V1 stereo/momo 8-96 momo: 8-384

HEAAC V2 stereo: 16-768

Ogg Vorbis q1-q10 stereo 8-192 <= 500

WMA STD L1 @ QL1 stereo/momo 44.1 64-161

L2 @ QL1 <= 48 <= 161

L3 @ QL1 <= 48 <= 385

WMA Pro M0a @ QL2 stereo/momo <= 48 48-192

M0b @ QL2 stereo/momo <= 48 <= 192

M1 @ QL2 <= 5.1 <= 48 <= 384

M2 @ QL2 <= 5.1 <= 96 <= 768

WMA Pro <= 7.1 <= 96 <= 1500

WMA N1 stereo/momo <= 48 <= 3000

4-525
 4.Editing common data

Function/profi Function/profi Channel Sample rate Bit rate

le le
Lossless N2 <= 5.1 <= 96 <= 3000

N3 <= 7.1 <= 96 <= 3000

RA cook stereo/momo 8, 11.025,

22.05, 44.1

AMR_NB - - 8 12.2, 10.2, 7.9,

7.4, 6.7, 5.9,
5.15, 4.75

AMR_WB - - 16 23.85, 23.05,

19.85, 18.25,
15.85, 14.25,
12.65, 8.85, 6.6

BSAC - <= 5.1 <= 48 64 per

channel

4-526
 4.Editing common data

Supportable USB camera

Items Description
Supported function UVC supported

Format in use MJPEG, H.264

Supported platform Linux platform supported

Notes

 If the video does not play, please take the following measures.
-LXP
Please encode a video file with the settings below and then play the video file using a
video encoder program.
 Precautions
Resolution: 1024 x 768, Codec: H.264

4-527
 4.Editing common data

4.4.13 Explorer
The recipe explorer is an object that displays a list of basic recipe files edited in LXP-Designer or
extended file recipes stored in storage devices (USB, SD Card, extended memory). After displaying the
recipe type and file desired by the user through the recipe explorer, the corresponding data can be
directly written to the PLC. Also, PLC device values can be written to recipes in the storage device.

• Explorer: This is the default setting for explorer objects.

- Basic recipe explorer: Recipe number and block number are displayed.

- Extended File Recipe Explorer: Displays transfer conditions, recipe file names and numbers, and
names and numbers for each block.

4-528
 4.Editing common data

Item Description
Back Area Color

Specifies the color of the background area of the explorer.

(see picture above)

Data Area Color Specifies the color of the data area of the explorer. The explorer items
(eg, extension file recipe name, basic recipe name, file name, etc.) are
displayed.
(see picture above)

Info Area Color Specifies the color of the information area of the explorer.
Displays file information.
(see picture above)
Basic Recipe Explorer: Displays information such as data type, number
of blocks, and number of devices.

No. of Row Sets the number of rows of items to be displayed in the explorer.

Color Specifies the line color of the explorer.

(see pictured above)

Plate Color Specifies the background color of the switch.

(see picture above)

Text Color Specifies the font color of the switch.

(see picture above)
- Description: Enter a description for the object

Notes

 Basic recipe navigator switch type.

 - [HMI -> PLC]: The data in the block of the currently selected recipe is transmitted to the
designated target PLC device.

4-529
 4.Editing common data

 - [PLC -> HMI]: Values are read from the target PLC device specified in the currently
selected recipe and block, and are saved in the NVRAM area of the HMI.
 - [Export]: Backs up the currently selected recipe. That is, for the currently selected recipe,
the same operation as the operation when the existing basic recipe backup device is turned
on is performed.

• Text: Set a text for Explorer object.

- Font: Select a font.

- Size: Select the size of text.

- Color: Set the color of text.

- Font Style: Set the style of text. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can select 2 or more.

4-530
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Set a display trigger for the object in the explorer.

- Use Condition: Select whether to use a display trigger.

- Type: Set the type of a condition.

Bit On Displayed when the device is turned on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device is turned off.
Range Displayed when a value is included in the set area.
Multi Bit Operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies the logical
command.

- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input part or use the keypad button. You can
set network when you press the keypad button to open the device window.

- Range: Set a range condition.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number.
expression Click to enter a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: When setting multi bit, enter a bit number and press [Set] button to set the bit condition.

4-531
 4.Editing common data

4.4.14 Thermal Camera Object

This is a description of the thermal camera object. You can check the temperature value of the thermal
camera object connected to the XGT Panel.
Before creating a thermal camera object, you must add a thermal camera in [Project Properties]-
[Thermal Camera] <2.2.2.11 Thermal Camera>.

Item Description
Thermal Camera Among the thermal cameras added in [Project Properties]-[Thermal
Camera], set the camera number to be displayed on the object.

Display Background Set whether to display the background image added to the ROI area in
Image [Project Properties]-[Thermal Camera].
Even if a background image is added to the ROI area, only the input
temperature value of the thermal camera is displayed if [Display
background image] is turned off on the object.

Display Palette Set whether to display the palette on the right side of the thermal camera
object.

Display ROI area Set whether to display the ROI area added in [Project Properties]-
[Thermal Camera].
Even if an ROI area is added, only the input temperature value of the
thermal camera is displayed when [Display ROI area] is turned off on the
object. When [Display ROI area] is set, the ROI area is displayed in a
rectangle along with the temperature value. .

4-532
 4.Editing common data

Item Description

Item Description

Display current lowest Set whether to display the current minimum

temperature temperature value in the ROI area..

Display current highest Set whether to display the current maximum

temperature temperature value in the ROI area.

- Description: Enter the description of the object.

4-533
 4.Editing common data

4.4.15 Database Viewer

This is an object that retrieves and displays the data of the registered table using the query job created in
the database setting. Database settings must be preceded before creating database view objects.<4.1.9
Database>

• Display: This is the display item setting of the database view object.

- Database: This is the setting for data inquiry.

Query Choose a query operation.

- Table Form: Set the table form.

No. of Row Set the number of rows..

No. of Column Set the number of columns.
Space Set the X-axis and Y-axis margins where DB table data is
expressed..

- Frame Display: Set whether to use frame

Frame Color Set the frame color.

Plate Color Set the background color.
Line Color Sets the line color.

4-534
 4.Editing common data

Line Width Set the line width.

- Description: Enter the description of the database viewer object.

Notes

 Only one database view object can be set per screen.

• Header: Sets the header for the database view object.

- Use Header: Sets whether to use the header of the database view. If the use of header is not set,
the header title cannot be entered and the header is not displayed in the XGT Panel.

Plate Color Sets the background color of the header.

Text Color Sets the text color of the header.
Bold Bold header content.
Italic Italicizes the header content.
Strike Displays a strikethrough through the header content.
Underline Underlines the header content.

- Header Edit: Header editing function.

From Text Table in When [From Text table in header edit] is selected, headers for all

4-535
 4.Editing common data

Header Edit columns must be selected from the text table, and direct input is
not possible.
Select [From Text table in header edit] and double-click the
column to display a dialog box where you can select a text string.
Setting of Cell Size Database viewer object size is fixed object size based on font
and font size. However, in order for the user to manually adjust
the size of each cell, select [Setting of Cell Size] and designate
the cell size himself.
Import DB Field Connects to the database, searches the field names of the
Name specified table, and displays them in order from the first column
after the number in the header

4-536
 4.Editing common data

• Text: Set a text for Database Viewer object.

- Font: Select a font.

- Size: Select the size of text.

- Color: Set the color of text.

- Font Style: Set the style of text. (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). You can select 2 or more.

- Horizontal Alignment: Set the alignment (left, center, right).

4-537
 4.Editing common data

• Display Trigger: Set a display trigger for the object in the database viewer.

- Use Condition: Select whether to use a display trigger.

- Type: Set the type of a condition.

Bit On Displayed when the device is turned on.

Bit Off Displayed when the device is turned off.
Range Displayed when a value is included in the set area.
Multi Bit Operates when the result of multiple devices satisfies the logical
command.

- Device: Enter a device or tag address directly into the input part or use the keypad button. You can
set network when you press the keypad button to open the device window.

- Range: Set a range condition.

Size 16 bit or 32 bit

Type Signed DEC, unsigned DEC, BCD, real number.
expression Click to enter a conditional expression.

- Multi Bit: When setting multi bit, enter a bit number and press [Set] button to set the bit condition.

4-538
 4.Editing common data

4.5 Displaying & changing XGT Panel information

Displays XGT Panel information data or changes time and connection password.

1. Select [COMMUNICATION] ▶ [View XGT Panel information] from the menu.

2. If a Dialog appears, connect XGT Panel to check the information. You can connect to XGT Panel
using Ethernet or USB.

3. If you select a connection method or press Refresh, it connects to XGT Panel and reads
information, and then displays the information if it is read normally.

4-539
 4.Editing common data

• Information: Shows general information of XGT Panel. If you press Refresh button, the information
is updated.

- Model Information: Shows the connected XGT Panel series, main unit and display unit
information.

- Alias: Shows the name of connected XGT Panel.

- LAN0 MAC Address/LAN1 MAC Address: Shows the MAC Address information of LAN0 and
LAN1 of the connected XGT Panel. MAC Address is fixed for each XGT Panel and cannot be
changed.

- State: Shows the runtime operation status of the connected XGT Panel (whether in operation).

- Runtime Version: Shows the runtime version of the connected XGT Panel.

- OS Version: Shows the OS version of XGT Panel.

- Main Unit HW Version: Shows the OS version of the connected XGT Panel.

- Display Unit HW Version: Shows the display unit HW version of the connected XGT Panel.

- PLC number: Shows the PLC driver information of the project saved in Runtime..

- Flash Usage: Shows the flash memory usage of the connected XGT Panel.

- USB Usage: Shows the USB memory usage mounted on the connected XGT Panel.

4-540
 4.Editing common data

- Extended Memory Usage: Shows the expansion memory usage mounted on the connected XGT
Panel.

- SD Usage: Shows the SD card usage mounted on the connected XGT Panel.

• Setting: You can set the name and time. If you click Apply button, it is set.

- XP-Runtime name: Set the name of XGT Panel. If there are multiple XGT Panels on the network,
set a name to distinguish each panel easily.

- Time: Set the time of XGT Panel to the time set by a user (direct setting) or the time of the PC
where LXP-Designer is running.

4-541
 4.Editing common data

4.6 Using CSV file converter

Use a CSV converter to convert the a decoded CSV (CSVE) file into a normal CSV file.

Converting CSVE file to CSV format:

1. Select [TOOL] ▶ [CSV Converter].

2. [Add CSVE Files], select a CSVE file in the Browser window.

4-542
 4.Editing common data

3. Click the […] button. Select the target folder to save the converted CSV file

4. When you click [Convert], CSV file conversion starts.

4-543
 4.Editing common data

4.7 File backup using external storage device

Describes the management function of the external storage device which saves the backup data of logging,
recipe, and screen image.

• XGT Panel is capable of backing up logging, recipe, and screen image data to a USB storage
device according to the content set in LXP-Designer.
• If there is no more backup capacity in a specified storage device, proceed or stop the backup while
deleting the existing data according to the content set in LXP-Designer.
• Monitor whether the external storage device specified as backup device in LXP-Designer is
attached or detached.
• If you save the backup data to an external storage device, the safe removal switch shall turn on and
the LED turn off. If you do not follow these precautions, the problems with data backup may occur.

4.7.1 Path structure on file backup

The figure below shows the path where the backup file is saved.
The root directory of CF or USB storage

Logging

1 (Logging number)

YYYY.MM.BeginDay.EndDay.0

DD.BeginHour.EndHour.0 (Filled storage limit per folder)

DD.BeginHour.EndHour.1 (Filled storage limit per folder, and share the same start and
end time.)
DD.BeginHour. FF (Storage limit not reached)

HH.BeginMinute.FF

Lhhmmss0.CSV

2 (Sub directory_ same as 1)

Recipe

Rhhmmss0.CSV (each logging number has the same sub

structure)

Screen Image

Shhmmss0.BMP (each logging number has the same sub structure)

4-544
 4.Editing common data

Path structure on logging backup

(1) The ‘Logging’ directory is created under the root directory of the USB/extended memory/SD storage
device.
(2) A directory with the name of the logging number is created under the ‘Logging’ directory.
(3) A directory whose name is year/month is created under the logging number directory.
- Include a directory for date in the sub-directory.

- You can create a directory for up to 500 dates.

- The year/month name directory includes the information of the directory of the earliest created date
in its child other than year/month information.

For example, if a directory created in January 2021 includes directories from the 21st, the directory
name is displayed as 202101.21.FF. The last FF expression means that you can store more data
created in January 2021. (When the current number of subdirectories is less than 500)

- If Month is changed (when going to the next month), change the directory name to the latest
created date information among subdirectories.

Example) If February with directories created from the directory on 15th to the directory on 30th in
the directory created in January 2015 201501.15.30.0

- When the number of day directories included under one year and month directory exceeds 500
even if the month has not changed, Change the directory name as the date information of the most
recently created day directory.

Example) If there are more than 500 directories from the directory on 1st to directory on 15th in the
directory created in January 2015

: 201501.01.15.0

- If there is a year and month directory with the same start and end dates when the month changes
or when the total number of day directories included in the child directory exceeds 500, and the
directory name is changed, the last digit index number increases.
Example) If the directory is the directory in January 2015 and there are 3 year and month
directories with more than 500 subdirectories created on the 10th of this month
: 201510.01.10.0
: 201510.01.10.1
: 201510.01.10.2
(4) A directory with Day as its name is created under year/month directory.
- The day directory contains Hour directory under it.

- A day directory can have up to 500 hour directories.

- The name of day directory includes the information of the earliest created hour directory in its child
other than day information.

4-545
 4.Editing common data

- Hereinafter, the relation between the day directory and the hour directory is the same as (3) the
relation between the year and month directory and the day directory.

(5) A directory, which has hour information under day directory, is created.
- The hour directory includes backup files under it.

- The hour directory is capable of containing up to 500 backup files.

- The name of hour directory contains the minute information of the earliest created file in its child
other than hour information.

- Hereinafter, the relation between the hour directory and backup file is the same as the relation
between the year and month directory and the day directory.

(6) The logging backup file has the created hour, minute, and second information as file name.
- A backup file is created in CSV format.

- A file name starts with ‘L’, which refers to logging, and includes hour, minute, second, and index
information.

- If a backup file is created at the same time up to second, increase the index information at the end
part.

Path structure on screen backup

(1) A directory called ‘ScreenImage’ is created under the root directory of USB storage device.
(2) A directory, which has year and month as name, is created under ScreenImage directory.
(3) The other directory structure is the same as logging backup path structure.
(4) The screen image backup file has the created hour, minute, and second information as file name.
- A backup file is created in bitmap format.

- A file name starts with ‘S’, which refers to screen image, and includes hour, minute, second, and
index information.

- If a backup file is created at the same time up to second, increase the index information at the end
part.

Path structure on camera recording backup

(1) A different directory is created depending on the camera recording method.
- For normal recording, a directory called ‘record’ is created under the storage root directory.
- For event recording, a directory called ‘prerecord’ is created under the storage root directory.
(2) For recording file, up to 1000 files are saved in each folder, and if the number exceeds 1000, the
oldest file is deleted and a new recording file is created.
(3) Even if the capacity of the storage is full, the oldest file is deleted and a new recording file is
created.

4-546
 4.Editing common data

Path structure on camera capture backup

(1) A directory called ‘cameraCapture’ is created under the root directory of the storage.
(2) For capture file, up to 1000 files are saved in each folder, and if the number exceeds 1000, the
oldest file is deleted and a new capture file is created.
(3) Even if the capacity of the storage is full, the oldest file is deleted and a new capture file is created.

Notes

 If you change the time to a later time than the time currently set in the device when you change the
device time, normal operation is guaranteed thereafter. However, a normal operation is not
guaranteed when changed to the previous time. In this case, only if you shall delete all
subdirectories including a directory, in which the changed time unit is contained, and start the
device, the device operates normally. That is, if you change from December 10 to December 5, you
shall delete all the year and month directories including the directory created on December 5 and
then restart it.
 For each function of logging, recipe, screen image, and memo, classification for project is not
supported. For example, if there are logging groups of 1, 2, and 3 in project A, and each logging
group backs up files, directory 1, 2, 3 are created and each data is saved under it. After that, if you
download and back up files from project B, which has logging group 1 and 2, they can be mixed with
the files backed up in project A in one directory. In this case, a user shall distinguish between the
backup files of project A and project B by the time you downloaded files.

4-547
 4.Editing common data

4.7.2 Operation setting if there is no capacity to back up in storage

If there is no backup capacity in a storage, you can specify whether to stop the backup operation or delete
the oldest backed up file and perform an operation in LXP-Designer.
[LXP-Designer project property -> Set storage usage -> Backup data location -> Delete old file if disk is full].

When backing up while deleting old files when the area is full:
• If there is no capacity to back up in the storage, search the data in the oldest year/month directory
under the logging, recipe, and screen image directories. (However, for logging, search the data in the
directory under the logging number you want to back up now. That is, if there is no data backed up in
the directory of logging number 2 at the backup time for logging number 2, and there is data only in
the directory of logging number 1, do not search/delete the data of logging number 1.)
• Search the oldest day directory under the oldest year and month directory.
• Search the oldest time directory under the oldest day directory.
• Delete the oldest backup file under the oldest hour directory.
• If you check the capacity for storage and you still need more capacity, repeat the steps (1) ~ (4)
above and then check the capacity again.
• If one hour directory is all deleted when you perform the file deletion operation, delete the
corresponding hour directory.
• If one day directory is all emptied when deleting hour directory, delete day directory.
• If one year, month directory is all emptied when deleting day directory, delete year, month directory.

4-548
 4.Editing common data

Notes

• If a directory or file (user file or directory) you cannot recognize is found in the backup path, s
earch the old ones among the remaining normal backup files except for it.
• If only user data remains in the current directory you are searching, the backup operation fails. XGT
Panel cannot delete user's data, and it stops operating at this point.

If there is insufficient memory or limit on excess

• Set the storage usage in the project property of LXP-Designer. If you check [Delete old file if disk is
full] checkbox, the oldest video files are automatically deleted. If you do not check it, LXP-Designer
may stop suddenly and an error message may occur.
• If the number of files is more than 1000, the most recently created file is deleted from the most
recently created folder. If the files are deleted and the folder is empty, the corresponding folder is
deleted.

4-549
 4.Editing common data

4.7.3 Monitoring the connection status of external storage

XGT Panel monitors the state of the connection to the external storage set when specifying the
backup path in LXP-Designer. The figure below shows the backup path set in LXP-Designer.

To use this monitoring function, you shall set the [Alarm window pop-up] option in LXP-Designer and
download the project.

4-550
 4.Editing common data

If you have removed the external storage mounted on XGT Panel which sets the backup path of logging,
recipe, screen image, and so on as an external storage, the corresponding system alarm occurs. If you
mount the external storage on XGT Panel again, the system alarm is cleared.
You can check the specified system alarm internal device address in LXP-Designer as shown below.

4-551
 4.Editing common data

4.7.4 Safe removal switch

The safe removal switch is used to ensure that data is backed up safely when you remove the
storage.
If you remove the storage immediately without operating the safety removal switch, the LED turns off
upon removal. If you operate the safety removal switch, the LED turns off and the connection with the
storage is internally disconnected. That is, after the LED is turned off, you cannot back up anything to
the storage, and you cannot use data in the storage such as file recipe.
Therefore, in order to operate the safety removal switch and use it again after the LED is turned off,
you shall remove the storage and then install it again. When you operate the safety removal switch,
and then install the storage again, please re-install it after at least 5 seconds.
When the following functions are operating, the LED does not turn off even if you operate the safety
removal switch, and the LED turns off after the corresponding operation is completed.
• It does not turn off if the image stored in the storage is being used as object image to be loaded.
• It does not turn off when reading or writing the extended file recipe.
• The LED does not turn off when searching a list of backup files to be uploaded in LXP-Designer.
• It does not turn off when the sound file or image included in the project is being loaded.
• It does not turn off when reading the project backup data into the storage or reading it in LXP-
Designer.
• It does not turn off when downloading a project to a device using LXP-Designer or a storage.
• It does not turn off when changing the image in the Start menu.
• It does not turn off when the ladder monitor program stored in the storage is operating.

Function Subcategory Operation

Data backup Alarm Write

Logging Write

Recipe Write

Screen Write

Video Write

Still image Write

Data upload Alarm Read

Logging Read

Recipe Read

Screen Read

4-552
 4.Editing common data

Function Subcategory Operation

Video Read

Still image Read

Web server Create web page Write

Search file list Read

Project upload Project backup - Communication Read

Project backup - Storage device Write

Project download Image Write

Sound Write

Storage device download Write

Change start menu image Read

Storage device download Project data Read

4-553
 4.Editing common data

4.8 Use Audit Log Viewer

When [History Alarm], [Logging], etc. are backed up as an encrypted CSV, the function to display the record
value of the log file is provided. The supported format is .CSVE (Encrypted CSV Format).

1. Select [TOOL] ▶ [Audit Log Viewer] to launch the Audit Log Viewer.

2. [… ] button and select the folder where the job log file is located.

3. A list of CSVE job log files is displayed. After selecting the desired file, click the [Search] button to
display the job log (record) values.

4-554
 4.Editing common data

4-555
 5. Other Functions

5. Other functions

5.1 Gesture, multi-touch, screen zoom

5.1.1 Gesture definition

1. Flick

Move up/down/left/right section quickly while keeping the touch with one finger.

2. Swipe

Move up/down/left/right section slowly while keeping the touch with one finger.
Notes

 When using gesture functions other than screen switch, the touch position shall be within the object for
which you want to use the gesture function.

5-1
 5.Other functionst

5.1.2 Screen switch gesture function

1. The screen switch gesture function operates under the following conditions.
Gesture Gesture type Action to perform
direction
Left Flick Screen switch to next screen
Right Flick Screen switch to previous screen

2. The screen switching gesture function operates the moment you release your hand after performing
a flick.
Notes

 The screen change function operates based on the screen number created in LXP-Designer.
Therefore, when the next screen is switched, the screen is switched to the next number of the current
screen, and the previous screen is switched in the same way as well.

5.1.3 Logging trend graph gesture function

1. The logging trend graph gesture function can recognize a gesture from the moment you touch the
logging trend graph object and operates under the following conditions.
Gesture Gesture type Action to perform
direction
Left Swipe Perform View the next data 3 times.
Left Flick Perform View the next data 1 times.
Perform View the previous data 3
Right Swipe
times.
Perform View the previous data 1
Right Flick
time.

Notes

 If you touch logging trend graph object, you can perform the gesture function and a blue border is
displayed. Through this, you can check whether gesture recognition is possible.

5-2
 5. Other Functions

5.1.4 Logging view gesture function

1. The logging view gesture function can recognize a gesture from the moment you touch the logging
view object and operates under the following conditions.
Gesture Gesture type Action to perform
direction
Perform View the next column 1
Left Swipe
time.
Perform View the next column 3
Left Flick
times.
Perform View the previous column 1
Right Swipe
time.
Perform View the previous column 3
Right Flick
times.
Down Swipe Perform View one line up 1 time.
Down Flick Perform View one line up 3 times.
Up Swipe Perform View one line down 1 time.
Up Flick Perform View one line down 3 times.

Notes

 If you touch View logging object, you can perform the gesture function and a blue border is displayed.
Through this, you can check whether gesture recognition is possible.

5-3
 5.Other functionst

5.1.5 History alarm view gesture function

1. The history alarm view gesture function can recognize a gesture from the moment you touch the
history alarm view object and operates under the following conditions.
Gesture Gesture type Action to perform
direction
Perform View the next column 1
Left Swipe
time.
Perform View the next column 3
Left Flick
times.
Perform View the previous column 1
Right Swipe
time.
Perform View the previous column 3
Right Flick
times.
Down Swipe Perform View one line up 1 time.
Down Flick Perform View one line up 3 times.
Up Swipe Perform View one line down 1 time.
Up Flick Perform View one line down 3 times.

Notes

 If you touch View history alarm object, you can perform the gesture function and a blue border is
displayed. Through this, you can check whether gesture recognition is possible.

5-4
 5. Other Functions

5.1.6 Multitouch function

1. A user can touch the object up to two points he or she wants to operate.

2. The multi-touch function operates in both normal screen and pop-up window (window screen, etc.).

Notes

1. The first touch input disappears automatically if the second touch input performs an operation to
lose the existing focus (Ex: numeric input), such as opening a new window when performing multi-
touch.

2. Since the coordinates of the second touch are calculated based on the first touch input, if you
release your hand from the first touch while both points are being touched at the same time, the input
value of the second touch disappears. (On the contrary, if you release your hand from the second
touch and touch it again, it operates normally.)

5-5
 5.Other functionst

5.1.7 Screen zoom function

1. You can to zoom in or out the entire screen using the screen zoom function.
2. The screen zoom function zooms in if a user touches two points on the screen and then increases
the spacing between the two points, and zooms out if he or she reduces the spacing.

5-6
 5. Other Functions

5.1.8 Gesture function On/Off

1. A user can select whether to operate the gesture function.

2. If you enter Menu - Control Panel - Touch, you can set “Gesture-related functions” as follows:

5-7
 Appendix

Appendix

1 XGT Panel OS Update

1.1 About OS update
As system software within XGT Panel, it is not automatically updated by writing a project in LXP-
Desinger. After selecting the OS update file list (.bin) to be updated through LXP-Desinger's menu-
[Communication]-[XGT Panel OS Update], run [Update].

1.2 Screen and Feature

Item Description
Connection Setting Set the XGT Panel connection method.

Update Execute update.

Close Close the program

Path Select the OS file (.bin) file.

Appendix-1
 Appendix

Item Description
OS Version Outputs the version of the selected OS file.

2 Rules for displaying objects before communication connection

Object Before completion of 1 scan Time out occurred

Lamp object Not displayed Image display

Message object Image display Image display

Number/character Image display Image display

object

Graph object Graph display Graph display

Animation object Image display Image display

Window object Not displayed Not displayed

Part object Not displayed Not displayed

Appendix-2
 Appendix

3 Terminology

Category Description
1: 1 1:1 communication refers to a method to send a command to
one controller from one panel.

1: N 1:N communication refers to a method to send a command to

several controllers from one panel.

baud rate A unit indicating the baud rate of a signal. This is expressed as
the unit number of telegraphic code (number of bits) that can
be sent in one second. This refers to the number of characters
sent in one minute multiplied by the number of units of sign
required to send one character and then divided by 60.

bit object This is an object used in LXP-Designer, and refers to the

object that controls the bit value.

bitmap An image file format which draws a picture with small dots as
one of the image file formats

case As one of the languages included in imperative programming

language such as C++/Java, controls the flow of program
execution.
In LXP-Designer, provides multiple conditional expressions in
which the value of the device object is one of the operands
and used to control the assignment for an individual object.

condition Used in equations used to control conditional statements and

loops, or in control statements such as WHILE/IF.
In LXP-Designer, a device value is used to provide one
condition or a conditional expression of the operands to control
the assignment of an individual object.
controller A physical device that provides commands to the machine,
LXP-Designer supports many types of controllers.

DEC keypad Window screen to set a decimal value over LXP-Designer

setting window A major component of LXP-Designer. This refers to a screen

where you can place and set objects
(base screen, window screen).

Ethernet As one of the communication connection methods, the

maximum throughput of Ethernet is 1 Gbps.

falling edge Shows the change when the bit value changes from level 1 to

Appendix-3
 Appendix

Category Description
level 0.

FLOAT keypad Window screen to set a real number value over LXP-Designer

HEX keypad Window screen to set a hexadecimal value over LXP-Designer

IL language As an abstract language of the design system, refers to a

language that helps in program analysis.

inverter An electrical device for converting direct current (DC) into

alternating current (AC). The device gets the desired voltage
and frequency through appropriate conversion method, or
switching element, and control circuit.

log Refers to the function with which a user sets the logging option
to trace the specific object and trace the corresponding object,
and capable of recording the operation of the corresponding
object.

N: 1 N:1 communication refers to a method to send a command to

one controller from several panels.

offset function Refers to the offset value based on the initially specified
device address value to change the address value of the
device.

operator Refers to symbols used to link expressions. A logical operator

is used to create a test expression that control the flow of a
program.

range Refers to a set of values included in a specified range.

raster image An image file format which forms a picture with dots. That is,
this is called a bitmap, and the raster image supports several
image file formats such as GIF, JPG (JPEG), and BMP.

rising edge Shows the change when the bit value changes from level 0 to
level 1.

Appendix-4
 Appendix

RS232 One of the signal specifications. This is a method to connect in

series between a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and a Data
Circuit-Terminal Equipment (DCE). The maximum throughput
of RS232 connection is 115 kbps.

RS485 Physical layer specification of the OSI model for a two-wire

half-duplex multipoint serial connection. The EIA-485 standard
defines a differential signal, and expresses data as a voltage
difference between two lines. In addition, RS485 provides a
baud rate of 35 Mbit/s at 10m and 100 kbit/s at 1200m.

screen One of the basic components of LXP-Designer, which refers to

a space where a user can place many types of objects.

script Refers to a command interpreter, or a small program in which

other script languages are written.

servo Refers to a device used to control an operation through the use

of feedback. This term applies to only a system which properly
allow feedback or error correction signals to be controlled by
mechanical position, speed, or other parameters.

toolbar As one of the components of LXP-Designer, the shortcut of the

menu is specified to an icon or button.

unsigned DEC Refers to an unsigned DEC.

vector image A method to display an image using dots and lines. A vector
image is not expressed in dot format. Therefore, you can
increase or decrease the size without breaking the image.

Window Refers to one operating system (in case of MS Windows) or

one type of screen as a component of this LXP-Designer.

word object A kind of object of LXP-Designer controlled by word device

XG5000 simulator As a simulator used in PLC S/W (XG5000), it can interoperate

with LXP-Designer simulator to perform a test.

Appendix-5
 Appendix

4 List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Definition

A/V audio/video

ASCII American standard code for information interchange

BCD binary code decimal

CF compact flash

CMY cyan-magenta-yellow

CMYK cyan-magenta-yellow-black

COM communications

CPU central processing unit

DEC decimal

GIF graphic interchange format

GUI graphical user interface

H/W hardware

HEX hexadecimal

I used in device expressions to represent input

IB used in device expressions to represent byte input

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IL intermediate language

IP internet protocol

IP ingress protection

IW used in device expressions to represent word input

JPEG joint photographic experts group

LAN local area network

LCD liquid crystal display

LD ladder diagram

LED light emitting diode

M metadata

MPEG moving picture experts group

Appendix-6
 Appendix

Abbreviation Definition

PC personal computer

PDF portable document format

PIN personal identification number

PIR passive infrared

PLC programmable logic controller

Q output

QB bit output

QCIF quarter common intermediate format

QVGA quarter video graphics

QW word output

RAM random access memory

RGB red-green-blue

ROM read-only memory

S/W software

SD secure digital

SDK software development kit

SMTP simple mail transfer protocol

SRAM static random access memory

TCP transmission control protocol

TIFF tagged image file format

UDP user datagram protocol

UI user interface

URL uniform resource locator

USB universal serial bus

VGA video graphics array

VM virtual memory

VSP virtual serial port

WAN wide area network

Appendix-7
 www.ls-electric.com

■ Headquarter ■ Overseas Branches

LS-ro 127(Hogye-dong) Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 14119, Korea
■ Seoul Office
LS Yongsan Tower, 92, Hangang-daero, Yongsan-gu, Seoul, 04386, Korea
Tel: 82-2-2034-4033, 4888, 4703 Fax: 82-2-2034-4588
E-mail: automation@ls-electric.com
■ Overseas Subsidiaries
• LS ELECTRIC Japan Co., Ltd. (Tokyo, Japan)
Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: japan@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC (Dalian) Co., Ltd. (Dalian, China)
Tel: 86-411-8730-6495 E-Mail: china.dalian@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC (Wuxi) Co., Ltd. (Wuxi, China)
Tel: 86-510-6851-6666 E-Mail: china.wuxi@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Middle East FZE (Dubai, U.A.E.)
Tel: 971-4-886-5360 E-Mail: middleeast@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC Europe B.V. (Hoofddorp, Netherlands)
Tel: 31-20-654-1424 E-Mail: europartner@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC America Inc. (Chicago, USA)
Tel: 1-800-891-2941 E-Mail: sales.us@lselectricamerica.com
• LS ELECTRIC Turkey Co., Ltd.
Tel: 90-212-806-1225 E-Mail: turkey@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC Tokyo Office (Japan)
Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: tokyo@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC Beijing Office (China)
Tel: 86-10-5095-1631 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Shanghai Office (China)
Tel: 86-21-5237-9977 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Guangzhou Office (China)
Tel: 86-20-3818-2883 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Chengdu Office (China)
Tel: 86-28-8670-3201 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Qingdao Office (China)
Tel: 86-532-8501-2065 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Nanjing Office (China)
Tel: 86-25-8467-0005 E-Mail: china.auto@lselectric.com.cn
• LS ELECTRIC Bangkok Office (Thailand)
Tel: 66-90-950-9683 E-Mail: thailand@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC Jakarta Office (Indonesia)
Tel: 62-21-2933-7614 E-Mail: indonesia@ls-electric.com
• LS ELECTRIC Moscow Office (Russia)
Tel: 7-499-682-6130 E-Mail: info@lselectric-ru.com
• LS ELECTRIC America Western Office (Irvine, USA)
Tel: 1-949-333-3140 E-Mail: america@ls-electric.com

Disclaimer of Liability
LS ELECTRIC has reviewed the information in this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
However, LS ELECTRIC cannot guarantee full consistency, nor be responsible for any damages or compensation, since variance
cannot be precluded entirely. Please check again the version of this publication before you use the product.
ⓒ LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd 2015 All Right Reserved. 2022.09